UC-NRLF
B 3 TE2 T3M
? A.
A
COREAN MANUAL
OK
PHRASE BOOK:
WITH
IXTRODUCTORY GEAMMAR
BY
JAMES 8C0TT, M.A.,
H. B. M,'h Vice Consul.
8ECOXD EDITION*
Seoul :
EnctLish CHtEcn Mission Peess.
1893,
L6 n
b-^t 73. 07
fao3
PREFACE,
In issuing a Second Edition of my Manual, I would venture to solicit
for my labours the kindly consideration of critics and scholars. The Corean
language presents so many difficulties both of grammatical construction and of
verb inflection that the task of the student who attempts to acquire a mastery
of its colloquial is well nigh hopeless. There are no native grammars of the
language; and the only vocabulary used by Corean scholars is the Oh P'yen
3S^' a Chinese Dictionary which gives the Corean transliteration of the sounds
of the Chinese Characters with their meanings in Chinese.- Although one of the
most ancient tongues of Asia, the influence of Chinese literature and civiliza-
tion early led Corean scholars to relegate the study of their vernacular to a
subordinate place in public estimation. The native aspirant for official position
and literary honours devotes himself entirely to the study' of the Chinese classics ;
and all official and other correspondence is conducted in Chinese t<2>- the exclusion
of the Corean script.
To the Fathers of the French Mission in Corea belongs the distinction
of having compiled the first Dictionary and Grammar of the language — monu-
ments of painstaking accuracy and erudition. As an introduction to the study
of the colloquial, I ventured in 1887 to publish a Corean Manual — a collection
of sentences prefaced by a few grammatical notes intended to help the novice
over the first difficulties of the language and to indicate those essentials of noun
inflection and verb conjugation which require especial study and consideration.
These sentences met with so favourable a reception that, in deference of the
expressed wishes of Corean students and others, I have retained them in niucli;
their original form, making only such alterations as a fuj'tlier acquaintance with
the spoken language has shown to be necessary said useful. The nev/ matter-
added to the present edition is explanatory of the grammar and especially o: V-v>
#,i i ^f>,'^n
I
verb conjugation, and will, it is hoped smooth the course of future students, and
perhaps prepare the way to a more complete and graduated text book. In the
present volume I have striven to embody the results of my own tentative efforts
in the study of the language ; it is in short, the fruits of my own experience
and a slender contribution to the small total of our knowledge of Corean speech.
In conclusion, it is my pleasant duty to record my acknowledgments
to the Rev. M. N. Trollope of the English Church Mission in Gorea for much
and valuable assistance in revising the proofs and for many important emenda-
tions and suggestions as the volume passed through the Press. To Bishop Corfe
I am also bound to convey my sincere thanks for the special printing facilities,
that he generously placed at my disposal in publishing the present Edition.
May, 1893,
THE COREAIS^ ALPHABET.
VOWELS.
coNsoAA:;Tri.
i)iriiTiio:v'cs.
C\
11
7 k
^1
ai, a;- ill aixvid.
'>
}'a
W 11
^1
1
i'(i, tli ill 6'{n'c?.
H
c (o, or u)
x::. t
61)
ci, ^ ill m:t.
^
ye (yO, or ya)
:pl r (initial)
^ 1 (final)
i
yei, //c in v/c^
J.
o
tl lU
^
eui, ui of ^2/1 in
French.
A
yo
^ P
4
oa, wa in wagon.
^
ou, (a)
» 8 (initial)
^^ t (final)
«]
oai, it'OT/ in au;at/.
-^
you, (yu)
JL mute, (initial)
ng, (final)
5^
oi, oi in 5ot?, o of
Grerman.
^
eu
-^ ch
^
cue, wo in ?/;o«.
*l
i
->*' ch' (aspirated c^)
^1
ouei, wc in ii"67/.
$
a (sliort)
-^ k' (aspirated k)
^ t* (aspirated t)
^1
oui, we of pronoun
we, German il
youi, ii prolocged.
-^ p* (aspirated^)
"^ h, (spiritub ubpei)
INDEX.
Introduction — History and origin of the Corean alphabet
ALPHABET
Consonants
Aspirated checks
Reduplicated checks and sibilant
Trills
Euphonic changes . .
Table of consonant sounds . .
Vowels
Pronunciation and transliteration
Table of vowel sounds
Diphthongs
Pronunciation and transliteration
NOUNS ..
Paradigm of case suffixes
Form and use of case suffixes
Number, gender, &c.
Table of declensions . .
(1) Root ending in k, m, ng, n and
(3) „
(4) „ „
Exercises i-iv
PRONOUNS
Personal
Demonstrative
Possessive
Interrogative . .
Reflexive
Indefinite ..
Relative
Exercises v-viii
Pronominal substitutes
NUMERALS
Cardinal
t (sometimes p)
vowel
P
l-XXl
PAaB.
1
2
3
3
4
4
6
11
11
13
15
15
18
18
19
21
22
22
23
24
25
29
29
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
40
42
42
^ INDEX.
Paok.
43
Ordinal
Abbreviated form of nnmerals
Fractions and multiples . .
Numeratives . . . . . . • • • • • • • • * ' * *
Exercises ix-xiii . .
Divisions of time, seasons, &c
54
' .. .. 56
45
45
47
Days — ^to-day, to-morrow, &c
Exercises xiv-xv ..
ADJECTIVES .. "..' ^^
Conjugation of adjectives . . . . . . • • • • • ♦ • • "^
Exercises xvi-xviii . . . . . . • • . • • • • • "'*
Comparison of adjectives . . . . . . • • • • • • • • "'
Exercises xix-xxi .. .. .. ,. . .► .» •• o8
VERB .. .. .. 71
Ordinary conjugation .. .. .. •• 73
Polite „ . . . . . . . . • • • • • • ^^
Interrogative „ . . . . . . . - . . . . • ♦ 91
Conjunction „ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
I. Conditional suffixes myen^ keteun . . . . . , . . . . 94
Exercise xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
II. Casual suffixes ni^ nikJca, nikkanteuro, tent . . . . , . 97
Exercise xxiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
III. Adversative suffix wanan .. .. .. .. .. .. 100
Exercise xxiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
IV. Concessixe su^xes na^ tai, to, kenioa, chirato .. .. .. 103
Exercise XXV .. .. .. .. .... .. 106
V. Deliberative and alternative
(a) na, kena .. .. .. .. .. '. ." .. ,, 107
Exercise xxvi ,, .. .. .. .. .. .. 109
(6) nanka, nanchi, tenchi, chi, nenchi .. .. .. ., ,110
Exercise xxvii-xxix .. .. .. .. .. .. 113
VI. Restrictive conditional suffix ya ., ., .. .. ., 116
Exercise XXX, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 117
VII. Temporal suffixes to^a, wyewsye .. .. .. .. .. 118
Exercises xxxi-xxxii .. .. .. .. .. .. 120
VIII. Suffix ka with verbs " to fear," &c 122
Exercise xxxiii .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 122
Future Perfect Tense .. .. .. .. 122
Exercise xxxiv .. .. .. .. .. ., .. .. 123
Gerundive
(1) ra, re, lla, He .. .. ,. .. 124
INDEX. m
-r, . . Pass.
Exercises xxxv-xxxvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
(2) rya.rye .. .. .. '.. .. .. 127
Exercise xxxvii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Auxiliary verbs . .
(1) Ota, kata, {2) pota .. .. .. ,. .. .. .. 128
{2,) ckouta, {'i) hata 129
Exercise xxxviii .. .. .. .. ,, ., .. .. 130
Negation.
(1) an, ani, {2) mot . , .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 131
(3) (a) chianta, (b) chi mot h&ta, chi ani Mta (c) chi malho, etc, . . 131
Exercise xxxix . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 132
Demonstrative verb ilta "to be" .. .. .. ,. ., .. 133
Exercises xl-xli .. .. .. ., .. ., .. .. 134
Vbbbal nouns.
(1) in »i and /^« .. ., ., ,. .. .. .. ,. 136
(2) in choul, choullo .. * ,. .. .. .. .. .. 137
Exercises xlii-xliii .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 137
(3) in chil and noriXt . . . . . . , . . . . , . . 139
Exercise xliv .. .. .. .. .. ., ,, .. 139
Adverbs derived from verbs and adjectives in kei and i or hi . , . . 140
Exercises xlv-xlvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Causative AND PASSIVE verbs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 142
Exercise xlvii . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . 142
Idiomatic uses of the verb . . . . . , . . . . » , . . 143
(1) tdiro, manle eum .. .. .. ., .. .. .. .. 143
(2) Present and future relative participles . . . . , . . . 143
(3) kochyah&ta, kosipouta . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 144
(4) mcheuhhdta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
(5) chi as {a) an infinitive, {h) an interrogative . . . . . . . . 145
(6) ^niwre in {a) rita ov orita, {b) ma, .. .. .. ... .. 145
(7) Imperfect or pluperfect in tera ;. .. .. .. .. 145
(8) Relative participle in teran . . . . . , . . . . . . 145
Exercises xlviii-xlix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ADVERBS
(1) Time .. 148
(2) Place 150
(3) Manner 151
(4) Degree • .. 152
(5) Negation and affirmation .. ,, ., .. .. ,, 153
POSTPOSITIONS .. 153
CONJUNCTIONS .*.' 154
jy INDEX.
Pas«.
155
156
157
Exercise 1
Il^DIRECT ^VEECB. {oratio obliqua) ••
Exercise li-liii . . . • • • • • • • • • ' *
DOUBLE IMPERATIVE " to tell " or " to order," &c. !<><>
Exercise liv .. .. •• ^^'^
EXERCISES.
1-13. General conversation .. .. .... .. .. 162
14. Trees, flowers, weeds, &c. .. .. •• 1^8
15. General conversation .... .. .. •• •• •• l^^
16. Domestic animals .. .. •• •• •• •• •• 1^2
17. Well, wall, coolies, digging .. .'. .. 194
18. Travelling — horse, chair, &c. .. .• .. 196
19. Road, baggage, &c. .. •• 198
20. Wind, mist, clouds, &c . . . • 200
21. The different parts of the body, &c., blind, lame, &c. . . . . 202
22. Inn, room, dinner, sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
23. Points of the compass, N. S. E. W 206
24. Hunting 208
25. Money, silver, trading .. .. .. .. 210
26. Shopping, silk, piece goods, gauze, sables, skins, &c. . . . . 212
c,„ /Tastes — sweet, sour, &c. \ „,.
'^^- IColours— Red, white, &c./ •• •* '^^^
28. Rice, peas, beans, barley, &c. .. .. .. .. .. .. 216
29. Agriculture, rainbow, thunder, hail .. .. .. .. .. 218
30. Ice, water, soap ; Royal procession . . . . . . . . . . 220
31. Saddle, pony, bull 222
32. Linen, cotton, grasscloth, spectacles . , . . . . . . . . 224
33. Building operations, brickman, lime, roof, &c. . . . . . . 226
34. Chimney, blacksmith, paper-hanger, &c. . . . . . . . . 228
35. Fever, small-pox, ague, &c. . . .... . . . . . . 230
36. Doctor, medicine . . . . . . . . . ." . . . . 232
37. Prisoners, robbers, &c. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 234
38. Warfare, soldiers, rebels . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
39. General conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
40. Household utensils .. .. .. .. .. 240
INTEODIJCTION.
The Corean alphabet as originally invented in 1447 A.D. contained twenty-
eight distinct letters, classified and explained by native scholars as (1) initials, (2)
finals and (3) medials.
I. Eight letters used either as initials or aS finals : —
7
termed
=g
i
11
ki-yek for
k
W
»»
^
i§
V
61.
ni-eun „
n
^
»»
m
[*]
t>
^
ti-kkeut „
t
E
♦»
m
ZL
^
6.
/ li-eiil
\ ri-eur „
1
r
tj
»i
m
#
p
6.
mi-eum „
m
^
»»
*
g.
^
0
pi-eup „
P
^
»)
i«
mi
X
^
Bi-ot „
B
6
m
m
6
I-^
ngi-eung „
ng
The two characters [7ft] and [^] are to be read not as Chinese ideographs
but with the sounds of their equivalent meaning in Corean, viz : lihut and ot.
The reason is that the Coreans possessed no word in Chinese ending in t final
wherewith to indicate this sound for the value of the consonant as a final.
For t final, Coreans now use only the letter A ; but in ancient books and
even to the end of the last century n also appears as a final in certain words.
The t in ot of 8i-ot passes into s when inflected for case ; hence its use as
representative of 8 final.
II. Nine letters were used as initials only : —
^
as read in
[*]
?1
for k' (a
spirated k)
5
)i
J&
A
„ t' (
t)
5Z.
•)■>
&
^
» P'(
P)
>
>>
It
A
„ ch
•<*
»>
M
A
» ch' (
ch)
COREAN MANUAL.
O
as read in
m
m
^1
•1
for j (soft or modulated)
„ spiritus lenis.
„ n (faint nasal)
„ h (spiritus asper)
The character [^] is to be read not as a Chinese ideograph but with the
sound of its equivalent meaning in Corean, viz : k'i. In modern Chinese ^ has
replaced the ancient sound and meaning of ^, which, in this connection, must be
read ''yenff, where the initial n is intended to reproduce the sound of the Sanscrit
palatal n as used in the gt f^ IE bI phonetics.
III. Eleven letters used as medials or vowels : — •
^
1
as m
m
m
^
*
4&
-I-
a
ya
e (o or u)
ye (yo or yti)
0
yo
ou (u)
you (yu)
eu in eu?i^
i
a in sd.
But as at present employed the Corean alphabet contains these eleven
vowels and only fourteen consonants. From among the initials three letters early
disappeared from their script and were replaced by the letter ^ which, as an
initial, had in its turn lost the nasal np sound, and now represents a purely open
vowel initial corresponding to the spij'itus lenis. The history of the invention of
the alphabet and especially of the euphonic changes which the language has
undergone, both in speaking and in writing, is highly interesting philologically.
A careful study of the early pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs will show
clearly how these four letters O A 15 Ci came to be included under one phonetic
INTRODUCTIONS^
as the initial. The letter q was employed to indicate a pure open vowel initial
with the force and usage corresponding to the spiritus lenis, and as such appears
regularly in old books and especially in manuscript works. No modification has ever
occurred as regards the sound it was invented to represent ; but in modern Corean
writing it has ceased to appear as a distinct circle somewhat like our English iigure
aero (0), and has now assumed a shape analogous to the nasal n^ ending, viz : O-
The triangular letter A was originally selected to indicate an initial
consonant J as heard in the Chinese words H A t M? &c.
This initial ; sound, however, is totally unknown to Coreans and only
appears in this instance as an attempt to reproduce the Chinese pronunciation of
the fifteenth century A. D. at the time of the invention of their alphabet. Anciently
these words jwssessed a distinct fi instead of j as their initial consonant and were
transliterated into Corean accordingly, though this n has now disappeared from
modern Corean in common with the euphonic change still visible in Corean
enunciation, whereby the initial n sound is made to disappear before the vowel i and
its allied semi-vowel y. The modern pronunciation in Cantonese and Japanese of
Chinese words now read with _;, fidly establishes this n sound as the correct value
of the ancient initial in the third century A. D. when Chinese symbols were first
introduced into Japan from Corea. In Japan, however, in addition to this Go-on
H ^, as it is called, there is a concurrent j pronunciation known as Kan-on J|| ^,
drawn from China direct towards the close of the sixth century. A comparative
table of a few of the more common words occurring in Buddhist liturgies is
here appended, giving their Corean transliteration as originally used in the fifteenth
century, as also their pronunciation in Japanese and in the Shanghai dialect.
The former shows the presence of ^' as the initial, but the latter sounds prove the
true value of the original n as the initial ; while as regards modern Corean this n
has been dropped in accordance with the laws regulating Corean euphony.
Chinese.
Bmiahist
Japanese
Corean.
Sounds.
^1
ni (chi)
^1
il
nin
^
nin
^i
nin
^1
ni
"1
niaku
%
nyo
Shanghai. Corean.
g ^1 ni (chi) nyih
^ tL nin niiin
1=
:g| Ti nin ning
rfO ^1 ni 6rh
m
niun in
im
zah yak
niang vang
IV
COREAN MANUAL.
a
^1* niakii
^1 nei
zah
m
yak
a or vei
While the use of the Corean letter A was regularly employed in Buddhist
books to transliterate the sound of J, the words themselves in ordinary colloquial
were invariably pronounced with a true open vowel and accordingly written with
the sphittis lejus O ^^ their initial — the triangular form disappearing as a distinct
letter from the current script of the people.
The letters "S and (J) were selected to represent two nasal sounds — n and
n(/ resi^ectively of ancient Chinese — and still heard in Cantonese, in Shanghai
and in other dialects of China. As faint nasal initials they have early disappeared
from Corean ; an open vowel initial sound took their place and the words are now
always written with the spiritua lenis Q. But in Buddhist books giving the
Corean transliteration of the Sanscrit, the value of this n is indicated by the letter 1$.
The following are a few of the more common Chinese characters appearing
in Buddhist Rituals representative of this n as an initial : —
"ai
5g
«ak
la
N*
^
o^ 6^ ^]
'am
"vei
As regards the nasal initial 7}g, modern Corean has dropped the sound
entirely, leaving only the open initial vowel written with the spiritus lenis. But
the Corean transliteration of Sanscrit sounds, as also the pronunciation of modern
Japanese and Cantonese, all agree in retaining the regular nasal ng as the initial
sound but represented in Japanese by g.
hinese.
Buddhist
Corean,
IS
o\
^
<Ji
w
<i4
\W
A]
«lt7
0
@
-5"
^
f
pauese.
Cautonese.
Modern
Corean.
ga
ngo
a
gan
ngam
am
gio
ngyOng
ang
gi
ngi
eui
gio
nging
eung
ga
nga
a
INTRODUCTION.
Tlie attempt ou the part of the C'oreau scliolars in the 15th ceutury to
reproduce by means of the letters A "o <[) the diiferences between the oi)en vowel
initial, the sonnd of ^' and the two nasal initials n and w</, however praiseworthy from
a pliilolotjical point of view, was early doomed to failure. For, however distinct such
shades of pronunciation might be to the ear of educated Coreaus, the people generally
were incapable of differentiating in their daily vernacular the faint initial,
sounds j, nasal n and 7fg — sounds which had early disappeared from their language
iind in which the / initial had originally no separate place as a distinct letter — the /
nasal n fulfilling its functions. In their script, therefore, the people discarded the (
use of A ^ nud ^ as separate and distinct voc^ilizations ; and treating the \
sounds as open vowel initials, resorted to the letter O corresponding to our English /
-cipher zero and indicating the spin'UfS lenis. But in course of time — fully a
century and half later — this simple circular letter O <'^ud the nasal final <J> (in
which the upper stroke is merely an appending hook) became so assimilated as
to result in the modern <J>, which as an initial is now always mute, and used
iis a " proconsonant " corresponding to the true spiritus lenis-, while as a final it
continues to retain its original pronunciation tifj — a strong distinct nasal.
The question of these phonetic changes and the modifications accxn-dingly
of their alphabet by the Coreans are two points intimately associated with the
:ancient pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs as originally intrmluced into the
country in the eleventh century B. C. and especially at the time of the Buddhist
propagandism in 372 A. D. The chief feature requiring special attention in this
res])ect is the identity between the Corean and C^antonese jiroiinnciation of Chinese,
with one exception — but an exception that only accentuates the rule — of the t final
in Cantonese being invariably replacetl by I final in Corean. In their transliteration
of Chinese, Coreans give six letters as finals, viz : k, L m, n, p and ng. But in the
transliteration of their own vernacular Coreans possess and constantly use not only
these six but a final t as well, making seven finals in all for their own language.
It is therefore evident that in rendering the sounds of Chinese words, Coreans were
not debarred by any special defect in their vocal organs from pronouncing a final t.
Thus the natural inference is that the sounds of Chinese ideographs as originally
taught to Coreans, contained no t as a final but were regularly pronounced with / as
the final, and this latter sound has been passetl on accordingly from generation to
generation. On the other hand, the Chinese are incapable of sounding Z final: they
are equal only to the utterance of that letter when initial ; and no dialect jmssesses a
regular I final in its pronunciation. The question is an interesting and imjwrtaut
factor for the philological student ; but whatever its solution, there is every reason
to consi«ler that when the Cliinese ideogra])lis were first introduced into Corea from
t\\e north (►f China, words now pronouncetl by Cantonese with t as the final, ended
originally in /, and no Chinese word thea ended in t. Regarding the pronunciation
•of Chinese, apart from the evidence supplied by dialects, it is not until the fourth
vi (KOREAN MANUAL.
centnry A. D. that the student can find himself on sure ground. The i)ropagation
of the Buddhist religion had shown the necessity of some authorized standard for the
transliteration of its Ritual into ('liinese from the original Sanscrit ; and Liao I "J* ^,
i\ learned priest during the time of the Tung-chin dynasty ^ ^ (A. D. 40(J), selected
thirty-six Chinese ideographs to represent the initial consonants of the Sanscrit
alphabet. These phonetics, afterwards modified ])y Slien Yo j^ f^ (A. U. 500) with
the collaboration of certain Hindoo priests, continued to be tlie standard jn-onunciation
of Sanscrit in C'hinese until A. D. 1376, when they were finally revised and
reduced to thirty-one phonetics — ^tlie three characters j^ ^ \^ representing three
cerebrals of the Sanscrit being included under tlie corresi)onding palatals ; i%
under ^ ; and ^ under ^ ; the sounds respectively being considered identical
in Chinese. These thirty-one ideogi-aphs are now known as the " Hung Wu Cheng
Yiin" ^ ^ IE tl — 77^^ Phonetics of Hmg Wu (the first Emperor of the Ming
dynasty). These phonetics form an important link in the liistory of the invention
of the Corean alphabet ; and a comparison of them with the Sanscrit equivalents
will supply the key to the grouping and pronunciation ef the Corean lett^ers. At
the same time they are equally interesting as regards the Corean value of the
sound of the C/hinese [ideographs and illustrate certain modifications that have
occurred in aspirates or have otherwise aifected the language.
The initial sound of each ('hinese phonetic was intended to represent the
value of a corresponding letter in Sanscrit and, tabulated as known and used by
Corean scholars in the fifteenth century, they show as follows : —
1. The initial consonant sound in j^. ^, ^, ^ represents the Sanscrit
gutturals n, h, kh and g ; which in C^orean passed into ^ (7ig), y (/-) and ^
{It) respectively. The Sanscrit sonant gh found no equivalent in Chinese. In^
Corean all distinction between surd and sonant has been neglected — colloquially
the two sounds are interchangeable but made unconsciously on the i)art of the
speaker, and accordingly the Corean y may be read k or g. The initial nasal
^ of the Corean corresponding to tlie Sanscrit ??, was always so faint that it had
early disappeared as a distinct initial ; its place was taken by the spiritas leyiis
represented by the circle Q- w^ii^^^^ again in its turn became modified until it
resembled the present nasal final ^ — a series of changes naturally resulting from
the Corean system of writing down the i)age with a Chinese pen or brush.
2. The initial consonants in ^, ^, ^, ^ represent the Sanscrit dentab
n, t, th and cJ, which in Corean jmssed into l* (/?) c (0 ^^^ S (^')- ^'^»e Sanscrit
dk had no equivalent in Chinese : while in Corean all distinction of surd and
Fonant was neglected and only one letter t required as an initial with its
aspirated form f.
3. In C'Orean the trill Q here follows, being defined as the initial sound
in the Chinese character which in these phonetics was selected to rei)resent the
Sanscrit semi-vowels / and r. In (-orean this trill is properly a sound ranging
IXTRODUCTION. vii
l)etween the two j^^'onuuciatious, uenrer r as an iuitiiti but approaeliino^ what may
best be exphiiued as a soft, modified / wlieu final. But iu transliteratiug Chinese
words possessiug: / as tlie initial, the C'oreans were unequal to the true phonetic value
of the letter, and while retaining / wherewith to indicate the original sound, they
modified and merged this distinct / pronunciation of the Chinese root into ??, and
then, following the peculiarities of the C\)rean vocalization of this letter they further
modulated this v and finally dropped it in many words as a distinct initial consonant
sound. This principle affecting the value and sound of n is likewise exemplified iu
( 'orean by the transliteration of the Sanscrit guttural, cerebral and palatal sounds
of ;?, which as initial consonant sounds have entirely disappeared from Corean ; they
luive been regularly replaced by the open vowel initial.
4. In transliterating the Sanscrit labials w, ^, jjh and h the Chinese introduced
a variation in their pronunciation, iu order to express the distinction of sounds in p
and h wlien modulated and softened intoy and v resjiectively. These allied sounds
the Chinese classified as /^^ffryand liijht labials. The heavy labials are Bfl. ^. ^ 3&
and correspond exactly with the Sanscrit m, p, ph and b ; whereas the three
characters ^, ^^. ^ are considered light hibials and represent the modified corres-
ponding sounds of f, f (defined in Chinese as f. clear) and f (defined as f thick),
derived respectively from m, p and b. This divergence in pronunciation has been
carried fidly into modern C-hinese, giving m, p and p' {p aspirated) the heavy labials
as above ; while w and f reproduce the light labials — the aspirated or thick /
disappearing. The Corean vocalization on the other hand, is characterized by
great simplicity and reguhirity. No regard was paid to any distinction between
surd and sonant, nor did the aspirated p ever pass into / as seen in Chinese and
in our modern English, where ph has the force and value of/.
The Corean letters D B JE were taken to represent the Sanscrit m, p and ph
{p aspirated). As regards the Chinese, however, there can be no question but
that in selecting the ideograph ^ they intended to represent the Sanscrit semi-vowel
?% a sound entirely unknown iu Corean. Neither in Chinese nor in Corean is there
any equivalent of the Sanscrit bh.
In short it mav well be regarded as the invariable rule that where to
appears as the initial sound of words in modern Mandarin pronunciation, its place
is taken bv b in Japanese, by a soft or modulated m in Corean and by v in the
Shanghai dialect.
5. In the use of tlie Chinese characters ^, ^ ^ and ^ i|||^ we discern the
attempt to reproduce the sounds respectively of the Sanscrit palatals c, ch and jh
and cerebrals t, th and dh. But in Corean with no distinction between palatal and
cerebral or between surd and sonant, these sounds became conjoined and were
represented by two letters, viz : 7C=r// and y;,=cU (eh aspirated). The Chinese,
however, were further able by means of the initial sound in such words as 0 t
15 g,, &c., to indicate the value of the Sanscrit ;, calling it half palatal and half
viii • CORE AN MANUAL.
cerebral. Tlie Coreans in tlieir first attempts to formulate an alphabet, followed
the (Hiinese classification of sounds of the fifteenth century A. D. and invented the
triangular letter A to represent this ; of the Chinese. But, as nlvendy explained,
the pronunciation of this sound was outside the range of their current vocalization.
The letter itself early disappeared from their alphabet and was replaced by the open
vowel initial, which indicates the regular pronunciation of the Coi'ean vernacular.
Originally in C-orean these (lu'nese derivatives were read with 7? as their initial, and
this n is still used in Japanese pronunciation of Cliiuese ideographs. But in ( \)reau
the 91 sound was always faint and modulated until eventually it was dropped — a
phonetic modification still exemjilified in the modern vernacular, where as »regards
words jiurely (/Orean in their origin, ?? before the vowel /, &c., is constantly elided and
made to disappear as a distinct initial consonant sound.
6. By means of the Chinese characters »iJ» and f^ the original intention in
respect to their selection was to indicate the variants between s and z. As regards
^ and H, the object was to mark the UKKlificatious of these two sibilants s and z
into sk and zh respectively, i.e., where the sibilant is softened by the i)reseuce of
an ontbreathing. While ,s and s/t have remained as distinct regular sounds iu modern
Chinese, the two initials 2 and s// have undergone certain modifications, jiassing into
/is and sh according to the position of the outbreatlu'ug. Thus ^ iu Maudai'in is
now pronounced /(siek and j|| as s/^ath This latter Chinese character has, however,
a strong aspirate when used iu Buddhist books, ranging in value from c/t' aspirated of
ck^an to s (aspirated),*ap])roac]iing z (aspirated) ins/tan of the modern jn'onunciation.
These four Chinese j)houetics were selectetl to represent the sounds of tlie Sanscrit
sibilants ; but to the Corean ear such minuteness of distinction was too cumbersome
and only one letter A (s) was required to represent these four Chinese initial
sounds. At the same time the yalue of the original sounds was not without its effect
on the j)ronunc,iation of the Corean transliteration, and in many Chinese words now
commencing with an initial s/i, we find Coreans likewise modifying their initial s
sound and unconsciously reproducing an approximation to'^^/' oi'l/ts according as the
outbreathing/c follows or precedes the sibilant s. In ( -hinese words originally showing
z&s their initial, Coreans now follow their s sound by ay, but so modified tliat the s
is emphasized while the y is merged into the pronunciation of the vowel immediately
following with the effect of lengthening its value.
7. So far the Chinese had adhered to the Sanscrit classification into
gutturals, })alatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials and sibilants. But in regard
to the vowels or semi-vowels and the asj)irate, this strict sequence and identity
of correspondence between their phonetics and the Sanscrit alphabet could no longer
be maintained. In resj)ect to words o])ening with a vowel sound, a distinction
was drawn in the (/hiuese ])honetics between an open clear vowel initial and the
modified nasal n as the initial. For the former the character l^ was' selected
and read you or yu in Corean, and as written ^ the circle O was taken as
mTRODUCTION. ix
indicative of its value as an open initial. On the other hand, instead of the open
vowel initial the nUsal n appears in certain Chinese sounds as their initial which,
when followed by the vowels y or ^■, were read with an enunciation corresponding
with the n in Spanish. Only in Chinese this initial n was very faint, and as a nasal
scarcely perceptible. But the sound had its distinct presence and influence on the
language, so much so that in the fifteenth century the Coreans invented a special
letter to indicate its individuality, viz : ^ composed of the circle O of the spirittis
■ lenis with a diacritical mark like a hyphen ( — ) over it, thereby representing the
affinity of the two sounds, both in writing and in pronunciation. The Chinese
character ^ with its original sound of "^yeng, for which the character ^ waa
subsequently used, was selected as the phonetic typical of this initial semi-vowel.
But the true use and value of this nasal n as an initial can be best studied
from its Corean pronunciation, both as regards words indigenous to the language and
especially in derivatives assimilated from Chinese, where there is a regular tendency
to elide the nasal n before y or ?.
Thus
nikta is read ikta (ripe).
nyang •pan „ „ yang fan (gentleman.)
^^
nyeit ckyek „ „ yeit chyek (ancient.)
^l^
nyem nye „ „ yem ye (anxiety.)
&c., &c.
The Coreans drop the w as a distinct sound, leaving a sound which is
practically only an open vowel initial, though at times the presence of the nasal n can
be clearly detected in the utterance of certain speakers. As regards Chinese,
however, the Shanghai dialect stUl preserves this nasal n initial as a regular
consonant in conjunction with the words y and ?, as may be seen in the following
examples : —
Shanghai. Corean. Peking.
J^ nioh ouel yiieh
lAl
pn
mun
eun
ym
niung
yeng
ying
nion
ouen
ytian
nick
ok
ytt
nti
g
ytt
nil
ou
ytt
COREAN MANUAL.
8. As regards aspirates, the Chinese maintained the distinction between the
soft sibilant aspirate approximating nearest to the sound of sh as- heard in pleasure,
etc., and the guttural aspirate proper in horn, etc. ; and the two characters selected
as representative of the two sounds were ^ and g, read respectively in Corean
kyo and hap. This h in ^ has not, however, the distinct aspirate sound ; it contains
rather the rudiments of a faint s modified by an outbreathing and generally written
hs for the transliteration of Chinese ideographs. Both in Cantonese and Corean the
pronunciation agree in ignoring this s sound and retain the regular aspirate h, viz t
1iiu=hyo. But in Shanghai and Peking the presence of the 5 sound asserts itself to
the exclusion practically of the aspirate proper, and ^ is then read Kio in Shanghai
{h^z=.ks) and ksiao in Peking.
In the Corean vernacular both sounds were represented by '§', but in
pronunciation this letter is found passing regularly into a modified s before the
Towels i or y. This change from a guttural aspirate to a sibilant aspirate is made
unconsciously by Coreans, while on the other hand, the true sibilant itself, in many
words as uttered by uneducated Coreans, passes into a regular aspirate. As originally
invented this letter '§' was intended to represent the sound of the sibilant aspirate
(hs, sh), while in order to mark the proper guttural aspirate h the letter "q" was to
be reduplicated, thus '^■Q=hh, thereby accentuating the identity and affinity of
the two sounds ; and in many books, even as late as the seventeenth century, thia
combination of letters indicating the strong guttural aspirate occurs constantly in
Buddhist liturgies. Accordingly the Chinese character |g, the representative of
this initial consonant, was first transliterated in Corean 'o'^=hhap. But this
nicety of distinction was early abandoned as too cumbersome ; and regardless of
philological accuracy the letter 'o "^^^ made to represent both the guttural or true
aspirate and the sibilant aspirate indiscriminately. As regards the pronunciation
of the Chinese character ||^, the ancient sound, as also the Corean and Cantonese,
all agree in the value of h as the strong guttural aspirate, viz : hap. In Shanghai it
is also read ha with the regular aspirate, but in modern Mandarin the guttural has
given place to the sibilant aspirate, and ^ always read hsia ; the proper transliteration
of such sounds {lis, h\ sh, etc.) has been a fertile source of learned disquisition by
sinologues and others. But the general consensus is that the outbreathing of the
aspirate precedes the sibilant, and that hs rather than sh indicates the correct
pronunciation.
These thirty-one phonetics of Hung Wit supply the key to the order and
arrangement of the Corean alphabet. The sounds were divided into two main
groups — iH clear and ^ thick — each again divided into ^ wholly and p^ less,
according as the pronunciation of the letter was soft or hard. Unaspirated letters
came under j^, aspirates under j^, while sonants proper were classed under tJij j^.
Followiug the Sanscrit classification these sounds were farther subdivided into
gutturals, palatals, dentals, labials, sibilants, aspirates, etc. In regard to the
INTRODUCTION. xi
pronunciation of these phonetics, Coreans were at the time of the invention or
their alphabet guided not by the sounds with which they themselves read the
Chinese ideographs, but by their value and use as current in China at the beginning
of the fifteenth century. For this special purpose the Coreans consulted the Chinese
scholar ^ ^ Huang Ts'an, then living as an exile from China on their N. W.
frontier beyond the Yaloo River. Several missions were sent by the King of Corea ^^
to obtain his assistance in elucidating the correct pronunciation of the Chinese
characters. We can thus understand and explain the Chinese and the Corean
vocalization of these phonetics, in several of which the differences are very marked
and important. In these phonetics the Chinese characters are to be read with their
sounds as recognized in the early years of the Ming dynasty A. D. 1400. But
according to Corean scholars, the Corean pronunciation of Chinese goes back to the
eleventh century B.C., and shows great modifications as compared with these phonetics^
The ideograph Q is transliterated il in Corean, but the presence of a faint nasal n
can be traced in some dialects of modern Chinese and especially in Japanese. The
ancient reading of the character is acknowledged to be nyit, and the sound of the
nasal n may best be defined as ranging between the Sanscrit palatals J and n ; and
this may help to supply the clue to the divergence in the pronunciation of Q as nichi
in Japanese, n^ik in Shanghai, compared with jih of the Ming dynasty and of
modern Mandarin. The disappearance of this initial ?i in Corean is in strict
conformity with the principles regulating Corean euphony, whereby this initial n
before the vowels i or y passes into a faint nasal and finally disappears as a
distinct sound, both in their vernacular and especially in their pronunciation of
Chinese. Compare L=| :^, which is transliterated nyeheiil but read yeheul (a
cascade) ; L^ g transliterated nyer&m but read yeram (spring) ; *^ Ah ^| nipsakoui
but read ipsakoui (a leaf), etc., etc. Finally, we have only to study the regular
pronunciation in the Shanghai vernacular to understand and appreciate the true
value and use of this nasal n as an initial.
As regards ^ and |^ the true Corean transliteration gives no aspirate as
here shown in these phonetics — they are written f^ and >^ and read kyei and pang
respectively — in the forms ?^ and ^, k'yei and p'ang, we have merely a reproduction
of the Chinese pronunciation of that period. As regards aspirates generally, the
Corean pronunciation of Chinese presents so many anomalies that it is impossible to
lay down any definite law governing their connection and use. Words are constantly
occurring in Corean — words which have long been assimilated into the language —
possessing strong aspirates, especially with the initial jo, such as : —
;^ = P'a; WL — P'an; A = P'al
BR == p'ai ^ == p'il iJi^ = p'il
^ = p'j-o etc., which in Chinese are marked by no aspirate.
♦^,i
xii COREAN MANUAL.
The two characters ^ and ^^ are rendered p] and HI in Corean ; but in the
table of these phonetics, in order to indicate that these sounds are merely approxi-
mate, the labials are divided into two categories — g heavy or strong and $2 light
or modulated; and the two characters are accordingly placed under the light or
modulated^ in order to show that the m and p sounds of the Corean transliteration
require to be softened and modified so as to approach the Chinese pronunciation of
u (=:v=w) in wei and of / in fei. In Corean, however, there are only two labials
proper, viz : m and j», for the aspirated jo is never modified into^but always remains
a distinct labial, viz : p followed by a strong outbreathing.
While Coreans did not require any special form of letter to mark sonants
as distinct from swds — the two sounds being interchanged in their daily
speech, yet the authors of the alphabet were fully aware of the difierence ; and
finding that the checks and sibilant were pronounced in Corean with a special
emphasis- so as to produce a new and allied sound, they very accurately represented
this peculiarity of the Corean language by reduplicating these consonants, thereby
indicating at the same time their true value and pronunciation, viz : yj=kk=g ; HH=
ppz=b ; tZ}[Z=ii=d; 7;^=chch=j and m=s5=«. And these reduplicated letters
were originally intended to convey the sound and pronunciation of the sonants y, b, d, J
and z as found in the Hung Wu phonetics. This principle was likewise carried into
the aspirate, which in its guttural form they represented by ^'Q=hh in contra-
distinction to sibilant aspirate •^=hs or sh. This reduplicated form, indicating the
true aspirate, appears regularly in Corean transliterations of Buddhist books ; but in
modern writing the two sounds are no longer difierentiated, though in their colloquial
the sibilant and guttural aspirates regularly occur. The following Table shows the
Hung Wu phonetics with their corresponding Corean letters and sounds : —
INTRODUCTION.
xui
^
^x
^
f:
m
IE
#
^ ft-
4i tt
^] 6
H "
M
7i 7
^b
03^
2:
^S.
»J D I ^j- H
A^ A
^ X
>a X
-^ o
^ ^
22
ff >7
^ ^
en
^1 ^
Z2.
o
^ ^
cc
HH
m
n
JA
m
Ml
7v?
p
Mi
M
ir
oo
xiY COREAN MAjS^UAL.
Both Buddhist and national records concur in ascribing the honour of invent-
ing the Corean alphabet to the fourth King of the present dynasty ; and assign the
year A. D. 1447 as the date of its official publication. The President of the Board of
Ceremoniesin the proclamation he issued in terms of the Royal Edict on the subject,
recapitulates the great advantages accruing to the Corean student in possessing an
alphabet equal to the correct transliteration of native words and Chinese ideographs.
He refers especially to the clumsy system introduced by Syel Ch'ong |^ ^„ the Buddhist
priest who, towards the close of the seventh century A. D., arbitrarily selected
certain Chinese characters to represent Corean inflection and agglutination on the
same principle as the Japanese now use their Kana characters (fg ^). And this
Ifido 1^ 1^ syllabary, as it has been termed, still remains in constant use among
petty officials — hence the name.
The present Corean aljjhabet 'owes its origin to the promptings of native
ambition on the part of the King and Government to figure as an independent State.
The Corean Envoys at the Court of the Ming Emperors found that all States having
relations with China, possessed a literature and script of their own and distinct from
Chinese. A school of languages had long been established in Nanking for the
purpose of training Chinese as official interpreters and for conducting correspondence
with neighbouring countries in their own vernacular. The King of Corea, eager to
mark the individuality and independence that he claimed for his State, was desirous
of abandoning Chinese as the official script of his Government. With the assistance
of the Envoys who had acquired at Nanking a knowledge of the difi^erent alphabets
in use by countries bordering on China, viz., Mongol, Thibetan, Burmese ; and
especially of Sanscrit, which was then largely studied in connection with Buddhist
liturgy and ritual, the King evolved the present Corean alphabet, consisting of
twenty-eight letters (now reduced to twenty-five) and ordered its adoption by his
people and officials to the exclusion of Chinese. Native conservativism, however,
proved insurmountable, and Cliinese has continued to be used as the medium of
correspondence, both by officials and by the educated classes generally — the native
script being relegated to women and the uneducated masses.
But for purposes of education, especially in transliterating Chinese, the Corean
alphabet has a recognized place ; and the Chinese classics have accordingly been
rendered in the vernacular to assist the student to the correct meaning and pro-
nunciation of Chinese ideographs.
While drawing on the Hung Wu phonetics as above explained for the lounds
and order of their alphabet, the Coreans went to the Sanscrit direct for the form of
their letters. Since the first appearance of Buddhism in Corea at the end of the
fourth century A. D., Sanscrit has been regularly studied by the Corean priest-
hood, who were long the sole repositories of literature in the country and wielded a
powerful influence accordingly. Even as late as the seventeenth century, Corean
IXTRODUCTIOy. XV
monks made a special study of Sanscrit and wi'ote learned disquisitions elucidating
its history in connection with Chifiese and Corean.
The Sanscrit alphabet passed from India through Thibet into China, and by
the time it finally reached Corea the letters had been subjected to great modifica-
tions, necessitate from the circumstance that they had to be written, down the page/
with a Chinese pen or rather brush, instead of horizontally with the Indian reed. Again
under Corean hands this Sanscrit alphabet was further transformed, much as English
print difiers from English writing — the Coreans curtailed and modified the square or
angular shaped letters of the Sanscrit into- a short cursive script for convenience and
speed in wi-iting. And it is from this cursive script that the Coreans have evolved
the form and construction of the letters of their alphabet.
In addition to the consonants of the Sanscrit alphabet, the other letters were
all variously altered and modified ; the divergences in some instances being very marked
and striking. But these changes may all be studied in the exemplars given in the
Buddhist Ritual of Incantation, known as the Chen En Chip ^ g* ^, an early Corean
transliteration of the Sanscrit original with their Chinese equivalents re-published
in 1778 A. D. This work likewise contains some interesting information regarding
the Sanscrit alphabet as first introduced into Corea, and explains the modifications
which the letters, both vowels and consonants, have undergone at the hands of the
Buddhist priests to meet the difficulties of writing with a Chinese pen or brush. A
knowledge of these changes and the principles governing their use, is essential to the
student in tracing the identity between Sanscrit proper, written across the page,
and Corean Sanscrit, wiitten down the page in syllabary forms. And it is this
Sanscrit syllabary combination that supplies the key to the present system of Corean
writing, whereby two or more letters — one vowel with one or two consonants — are
regularly grouped into one logotype.
As regards the Corean alphabet, so far as the consonants are shown as having
been derived from the Sanscrit in the above table, there only remains one more
consonant calling for special attention and study. When originally introduced into
Corea, the Sanscrit semi-vowel y was written ^ but reduced to the form 2^ for
printed books. The letter, however, was further modified for purposes of their cursive
script into the four forms =i, «i:i', JJ , ^, and from these latter the Coreans drew their
four letters possessing y as their initial sound, viz : f: , ^ , j^,, 7f , ya, ye, yo andy^w ; the
connecting link of identification being found in the current Corean script. As regards
the perpendicular stroke of the Corean, tJie principle corresponds with the horizontal
or top line of the Sanscrit writing, on to wl^ich the letters proper were respectively
attached.
The annexed table will show the series of changes which the Sanscrit letters
have undergone before their final modification into the present letters representing
the Corean alphabet : —
XYl
COREAN MANUAL.
Sanscrit Consonants
as introduced
into Corea
in the IVth
Century AD.
5^
as used in the XYth
century A.D.
as printed.
^
^
^
^
H
as written.
^
yy
X
Modern Corean
Consonants
as written.
A^
^
X
'7
7
5
A
L
as printed.
^.
7
W
A
6
11
t
tr
m
P
s
ng
cli
h
t
J
INTRODUCTION. xvii
As regards vowels, the modificationa effected in the Sanscrit letters in different
Buddhist books since their first introduction in the fourth century, have been both
numerous and complicated, so much so that their identification has become practically
hopeless as regards the principles guiding their evolution and construction. But
while the mere shape of the letters afibrds no information to the student, the clue to
their determination is supplied in the classification and order of the different vowel
sounds, accompanied by their Corean transliteration and Chinese equivalents. This
is more especially apparent for the vowel sounds of the Sanscrit i and Iri. As taught
to Coreans the Sanscrit vowels comprise a medley of dots, curves and strokes totally
unlike their Sanscrit originals ; whereas for purposes of writing in combination with
the consonants, the vowel letters were further reduced to one or two short dots and
curves. Thus the vowel i appears regularly as a curved stroke somewhat like a half
circle ( to the left of the consonant, with which it was combined and formed a sylla-
bary. The short vowel a was treated exactly as in the regular Sanscrit — inherent
and part of each consonant sound. But the two open Sanscrit vowels a and a
were taught under the forms 5i and z^, which latter were again further reduced to
2^ and 2j^ for purposes of their current script in Sanscrit ; and the right hand half of
these letters supply the key to the Corean y a, which in their vernacular running hand
was generally written with the distinctive dot or dash towards the foot of the letter.
Where, however, the a sound was less prolonged the Sanscrit vowels were reduced to
a mere appending hook, like a comma, placed to the right of the consonant, and this
was further reduced for Corean into the dot under the consonant for a short. The
Sanscrit o was modified by the Corean Buddhist scholars into a series of short
curves over each other ; but where combined with a consonant in syllabary form these
curves were connected so as to make a short wavy line under the consonant, and this
latter form, together with the abbreviated modification vs^ used in the Sanscrit sound
om, transliterated pg in Chinese, supplies the key to the prototype of the Corean vowel
JL (o), which in their cursive script approximates nearest to the modified Sanscrit
original.
These modifications of the Sanscrit vowels and the four derivatives from the
semi-vowel y, widely divergent as they are from their originals, fully illustrate and
establish the principle which guided the Coreans in the selection and construction
of the letters to indicate the vowel sounds of their language. But in tracing their
formation, reference must always be had to the Corean cursive script as giving the
key to their identification w^ith their Sanscrit originals. The sharp angular form
of the Corean letters in printed books was subsequently adopted to suit the exigencies
of the engraver and facilitate his labours in cutting the wooden blocks from which
their books were printed ; angles and squares under such conditions would naturally
present fewer difficulties than curves and circles. Coreans, however, continue to
employ the cursive script — the Chinese pen, or rather brush, naturally lending itself
to this form which, as thus written, offers a striking resemblance to the Sanscrit seen
xviii COREAN MANUAL.
on leaflets and charms obtainable for a few cash per sheet by Buddhist devotees at
Corean temples.
While as regards vowels the identification between Corean and Sanscrit is far
from easy, and in some measure neither complete nor satisfactory, for consonants on
the other hand, the process of gradual transformation from Sanscrit to the present
Corean letters is both clear and self-evident. But the student, desirous of further
prosecuting his investigations on the subject of the Corean alphabet, is referred to
the Chen En Chip :^ "s ^ and other Buddhist works.
Four epochs mark the history of civilization and literature in Corea : —
I. The introduction of Chinese writing by Ki Tzu 3^ -^ in 1122 B. C.
II. The propagation of the Buddhist religion by missionaries (Chinese, Hindu
and Thibetan) from China in the fourth century A. D.
III. The revival of letters during the if j^ Silla dynasty, 449-920 A. D.
IV. The invention of the present Corean alphabet in 1447 A. D.
As a race the Coreans claim an antiquity dating back some two thousand
years B. C. Tradition and history concur in ascribing the valley of the head-waters
of the Sungari liiver as the cradle of their ancestors. At present two separate
characteristics of type mark the people — the Manchu, tall of stature with well cut
features, and the Japanese witli its distinctive individualities of build and physiog-
nomy ; and these characteristics are further borne out alike by tradition and by the
history of the people. Originally a congeries of rude tribes scattered over the
Corean peninsula, their land became the happy hunting ground of their northern
neighbours, who impelled by the pressure of population and the severity of climate
have, in obedience to a universal law of expansion, pushed their way southwards into
warmer regions and more genial surroundings. The aborigines driven from their
homes by these invaders from the north made their way into Southern Japan across
the narrow straits through the Tsushima Islands, which in early years belonged to
Corean domination. Apart from racial identification of type between modern
Japanese and the ancient inhabitants of the Corean peninsula, Japanese have
likewise a tradition that their own original home lay to the west, where the sun
sank to rest in the ocean ; and their oldest historical records declare that they
"descended from heaven in a boat" — clearly proving their Western origin from
across the Tsushima Straits. Besides, in support of this identity of origin there
stands out as a clear and distinct proof, that remarkable parallelism of grammatical
construction and syntax between the two languages as at present spoken, which can
only be explained by unity of race in prehistoric ages. The aborigines of Japan —
Aiuos — impressed their vocabulary on the immigrants from the peninsula ; but these
latter were unable to abandon the grammatical construction of their sentences, which
remains to emphasize the language as Corean in syntax with an Aino vocabulary.
INTRODUCTION. xix
Between the two countries the early history of art and literature had always been
intimately associated. Corea imports and borrows from China, passing on her new
civilization and literature to Japan, where the pupil more apt than the master and
located in more favourable surroundings, has long outstripped Corea in the march
of progress.
Out of the mists of antiquity and legend, the first acknowledged date in
connection with the Corean race occurs in B. C. 1122 with the introduction of Chinese
literature and civilization by Ki Tzu ^ ^. Yet it is clear that even at that early
period the Coreans were in possession of many elements of culture and society.
A study of the native vernacular, eliminating all Chinese terms, proves the existence
of a people early acquainted with the manufacture of iron and copper, but ignorant of
silver and gold ; charcoal alone being employed in their reduction of these two metals,
for coal does not appear among the products of the country until very recent years.
Their dwellings, as evidenced from their vocabulary, were originally merely
low mud huts or burrows in the ground — a style of housing which has come down
to the present time and is still found among the poorer classes all over the country.
The erection of proper dwellings and the system of heating their abodes by means of
underground flues were arts borrowed from Chinese ; and this is further seen in the
use and meaning assigned to the word pan^ '\^, derived from the Chinese ^, meaning
originally room, but in Corean vernacular conveying an idea always associated with
the heating of the floor of the room.
As regards their numerals, one of the most important points in philology in
respect to primitive races, Coreans are especially interesting. Only from 1 to 99 do
they possess numerals which are unquestionably Corean in their origin. This limit
up to 99 shows that their ideas and notions of property could not have been large-— a
primitive race with few requirements. But as the people advanced with the spread
of civilization from contact with China, the Chinese numerals were imported to
supply the deficiences of the native vocabulary. And the identity of sound with
which the numerals from 1 to 10, etc., are read as compared with their pronunciation
in Cantonese, where ^ as a final replaces the I of the Corean, proves their early
introduction into the latter language.
As for the fauna of the country, alongside of the Chinese names there are
also in current use native Corean words designating most animals, both domestic
and wild. In agriculture the people must early have made great advances, and rice
and grain of various kinds were always known to them as also, of course, native
implements of agriculture.
Possessed of a limited vocabulary suited to the requirements of a simple
primitive tribe, Coreans drew on Chinese for new names and ideas necessary in their
progress to a higher civilization. But all the peculiarities of Corean construction,
idiomatic and grammatical, have remained unchanged ; and in many words these
Chinese terms have become so incorporated and assimilated into the language that
XX COREAN MANUAL.
only a knowledge of Cantonese and the principles regulating Corean euphony can
detect and trace their Chinese derivative. In the ^ 1^ Ok P'yen^ a Corean
compilation of the 17th century, we have a clear and concise dictionary giving the
Corean transliteration (with the meanings in Chinese) of all Chinese words occurring
in the Corean language. A careful study of these Corean initials and finals as laid
down in this dictionary and their comparison with the sounds as used in various
dialects of China, especially Cantonese, may well warrant the scholar in accepting
this Corean transliteration as the nearest approach to the true pronunciation of the
ancient language of China — proving the great antiquity of the people and their early
submission to Chinese civilization and influence.
INTRODUCTION.
XXI
SPECIMENS OF COREAN WRITING.
(a) The square printed form.
^ 51 § -f
S I ^ ^
A >2 A> :!:
^ ± ^] ^
-? *l S ^
^ ^ 4 -&
'S
(6) The cursive script ordinarily employed in letters and cheap editions of
Corean novels.
COREAN MANUAL.
ALPHABET.
mllE Carean Alphabet consists of twenty-five different letters, comprising
eleven vowels and fourteen consonants. Three of the latter, however,
possess a double si^ification and use depending on their position in the word
or syllable ; as an initial, ^ is the mute (or pro-consonant) preceding an open
vowel sound, but as a final is always read ng\ cL as an initial has the somid
of r or n, but as a final that of l; and>^ as an initial s, but when final t.
Coreans do not employ their Alphabet as in European languages, letter
succeeding letter from left to right in horizontal lines; they group the words
into syllables, and write in perpendicular columns commencing from the right hand
top corner. Each word is broken up into its component syllables consisting
of at least one vowel or diphthong with one consonant, either initial or final;
and never more than three consonants and one vowel or diphthong can bo
grouped into one syllable. Thus in kakera, go, we have the word broken up
into three syllables ka-ke-ra p\ 74 ^JL ; 07iera, come, into o-?ie-ra JJ^ yA ^ ;
care being always taken so to divide the syllables, as to be indicative of the
base or root of the word, viz : ka and o respectively in the words before us.
No vowel can stand unsupported by an initial consonant; and, where
tliere is no vocalized or pronounced consonant somid, the letter ^ is prefixed,
being always in this position mute, with a force and usage similar to the cipher
zero (o) in English. Hence the name "pro-consonant;" assigned to it. Just
as -y corresponds to the spiritus asper, so O may very properly be called the
spiritus lenis, indicating an open initial vowel sound, these two breathings
having their correlation in Corean significantly marked by the forms of the
letters representing their sounds. All the fourteen consonants can stand as
initials preceding the vowel or diphthong of the syllable, but only seven single
2 ' ' COEEAN MANUAL.
consonants, 7 A:, 2- ^' ''^ ^'^' ^ ^^' ^ ^'^' "^ i^ ^^^^ >*• ^' ^^^^ *^^^'®® double
consonants, "^1 ZA;, -jj Im and ^^ /p, can be used as finals.
In conjunction with the vowels 6 1- a, 6h ya, 64 e, OT ?/e and
^1 i, the initial consonant or pro-consonant is written prefixed to the left of
the vowel, but with 6^ o, ^^ yo, -$- on, Jrt« you, 6^ eu and C a,
it is always placed directly above them. The final consonant or consonants
come in every case directly under the vowel: ^ pal, foot, ^ talk, fowl.
In ^.^ 0!^, clothes, the letter 6 is the mute or pro-consonant always pre-
fixed to the vowel proper in the absence of a regular pronounced consonant
sound, and used merely for symmetry in writing.
As known and taught among Coreans, their alphabet is a pure
syllabary, and the term en moun 6^ — -|- %^~^ includes both vowels and con-
sonants, and means "vernacular literature" in contradistinction to chinsye^^ /A
^^ "true script," i.e. the Chinese written character.
CONSONANTS.
The Consonants may be classified thus —
1. Four sharp checks, ... p Jc, ')i 2^, "C ^ (final ^ ) and ^ c//-,
2. Four aspirated checks, ... ^ k', 32. i^', -^ i' and jt, cJi\
3. Fourreduplicated checks, ... -^ kk,lSid pp,'^'^ tt smdZ^ chch.
4. Three nasals, ... y^ n, xi m and final ^ ng,
5. Spiritus lenis, ... 6 silent initial, or pro-con son ai;t.
6. Spiritus asper, ... 'ST h, aspirate.
7. One sibilant, ... ^A initial s.
with its reduplication ... J^ ss.
8. One trill, ... -^ I final, and r or n initial.
PEOXUXCIATIO^' OF COXSONANTR.
ASPIBATED CHECKS.
The value of the breathing in the four aspira,ted checks is exactly
^hat of the sp'uitus asper uttered with a strong out-breathing, and always after
th3 consonant. Complete contact takes place in pronouncing the consonant ; the
breath is gathered and allowed to explode audibly and forcibly, directlj'this contact
is withdrawn. In Corean there is no modifying or softening of the sharp checks in
conjunction with the aspirate sound, such SjS ph into f in philosophy, or th as seen
in hath or hatlic. In Corean each sound is clear and distinct, first the check
and then the aspirate. In transliterating these letters I have therefore adhered
to the analogy of the Corean original, where the diacritical mark — is placed
over the ordinary check, and used the forms A*',^', t' and ch\ instead of kh, ph
th and chh, in which last the presence of h might suggest the modification
of the cliecks with the softened sounds, ph, th, etc, of the English language.
Again, as the aspirate sound invariably follows the consonant, the forms hk, hp,ht
and hch are inaccurate and misleading, and therefore inadmissible.
REDUPLICATED CHECKS AND SIBILANT.
Besides these ordinary and aspirated forms, the four checks, k, p, t and
ch, are frequently pronouncsd by Coreans at the beginning of a syllable with so
strong an emphasis that four new and allied sounds are evolved which may
very properly be termed "reduplicated" cheoks. And the name ''reduplicated''
will serve to indicate the manner in which they are written as well as pro-
nounced. It appears that the Coreans, instead of inventing letters to represent
these sounds, have with great discrimination and accuracy taken the ordinary
check as the basis, and, to indicate that the sound was to be intensified, re-
duplicated the initial consonant 'J ^ ^ "C. and ^ as necessary. In -3*
kcnn, catty, we have the regular sound of the ordinary check, ^ k, but by
emphasizing the initial consonant, gathering the breath, and dwelling on it with
considerable pressure so that the vowel sound following it is ignored and almost
lost, we produce the reduplicated sliarp check 77 kk, as in ^^^kkeun, string.
Similarly \d ptje, paddy, and tiBJ ppye, bones; ^ tkl, moon, and ^ ttkl,
daughter; ^L Cl cliata, I sleep, and ^L XX- clicliata, I plait.
The sibilaiit s is likewise found reduplicated, the sound being intensi-
fied bv pressing the tongue against the roof of the mouth, gathering the breath,
and then forcibly and sharply ejecting it with a strong hissing noise. Compare
J\. Ci- sata, I buy, with ■^\, "Ci- ssata, I build; in the first we have the
ordmary sibilant as in English, but in the second the enunciation is sliortened^
sharpened and intensified, all emphasis and accent being concentrated on the
initial consonant sound.
COREAN MANUAL.
Instead of reduplicating the consonant in writing, tlie Coreans
generally employ ^ as a prefix to the left of "]! ^ ^ ^ and ^
to indicate the reduplicated sound ; and in a few books an initial ^ serves
the same purpose. The name 5| /A -Sr ioin slot, which the Ccreans
assign to this reduplication of the four checks and the sibilant, defines clearly
the nature of the spelling and the character of the pronunciation, toin being
the adjective participle of ^ "w* toita, thick, and referring to the thickening cf
the ordinary current pronunciation of the initial check or sibilant, while
^1 „i. siot is the name by which the letter ^ is known to Coreans.
As regards the vowel or diphthong immediately following the reduplicatad
consonant, its quantity is naturally shortened. All breath, accent and emphasis
are thrown on the initial consonant sound, and the vocal organs have neither
time nor opportunity to dwell on the vowel.
TBILLS.
The two trills r and I are represented in Corean by the letter 2. >
with the sound of / as an initial and ^ as a final. This final I does not
correspond exactly to the English pronunciation of that letter; in Corean it is
more softened or trilled, as may be observed from a careful study of the pro-
nunciation of -^ poul, fire, -^ moul, water, etc. As an initial this letter
is read n in words of Chinese derivation which possess I as the initial in their
original. But in many words now assimilated into the language from Chinese,
Coreans ignore the Z of the radix sound and employ V*» n in their transliteration.
Thus ^ Jt^ eui-non is from ^^ I consiilt, and is always written thus,
instead of $A j. eui-ron, although this latter sound is one which the Corean
vocal organs are quite capable of pronouncing.
EUPHONIC CHANGES.
Of the seven consonants employed as finals to close a word or syl-
lable, five undergo certain modifications to meet the requirements of Corean
euphony, the guiding principle being ease and freedom in pronmiciation.
1. Final y k becomes ng before O 7/i or V^ 71.
2. Final ^ m approximates to the sound of ng hcioie^k.
3. Final W 71 becomes I when followed by S ,
4. Final ^ 2^ becomes m before ^ m or 1*^ n.
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS.
5. Final -Am t (i) resumes its normal s somid before another,>t s.
(ii) becomes n before ^ m or «^ n.
And of the initial consonants the three following are subject to various
euphonic changes in Corean pronunciation:
1. Initial U» n (i) becomes I when preceded by ^
(ii) is practically mute, or retains at most only
a faint nasal sound, before the vowel sounds I i, 4 ye^ ;^| ^jci.
2. Initial -J" h may be heard pronounced as a faint sh sound
before the vowel sounds \ i , ^ ye, ^ yei and ^ tjou.
3. Initial ^ Z is constantly modified from its true sound as a trill
into a faint nasal n, in words derived from Chinese.
Thus |f^7j^ is correctly transliterated in Corean ^ ^ rding-sijou, meaning
cold water in the sense of drinking water, but- is pronounced nding-sou. The
initial r passes into a distinct n, while the y in syoit (as we shall see later)
merely prolongs the sound of the on. The rule is that, for purposes of
transliteration, H. is retained to mark the original I sound of the initial letter
of the radix; but in pronunciation it shades off into a faint n or ng, at times
even disappearing entirely as an initial consonant sound, especially before the
vowel sounds I ^, ji ye and ^j yei. This may be explained from the fact
that in many words purely Corean in their origin, an initial n before these
three vowels is subject to a process of modification and elision — the indolent
habits so characteristic of the people as a race naturally extending to their
manner of speech.
Where, however, the word derived from the Chinese has become
thoroughly assimilated into the language, so that to the native scholar all
trace or knowledge of its derivative root has really disappeared, the consonant
n is regularly resorted to, both in writing and in pronunciation. Thus the
common term V|. "jl nan-ri, (pronounced nalli) meaning war, comes from the
Chinese roots ^l (disorder) , and S^ (separation) , the former of which, however,
when used by itself and written singly, is very correctly transliterated ^ ran in
native Dictionaries.
COEEAN MANUAL.
We thus arrive at the following complete
TABLE OF CONSONANTAL SOUNDS.
y (1) k as in Jceel: Tj^kat, hat;
yjrkak, each.
(2) g when the k passes into a sonant :
py X\kanta — ganta, I go;
>y kil — gil, road;
^fl kai—gai, dog.
(3) ng (final) when followed by O w or 1>- n :
^ "? ^^^ ^^^^ — ^^^^ wow/, medicinal water ;
^ 13 ^1 ^^^ neki — ne7ig neki, sufficiently.
y; kk ox g: -^ kkoul—goul, honey ;
TSSLkkot — got, flower;
^ k, The hard A- sound followed by a strong aspirate:
^ k'o, nose;
'^k'a7, knife.
^ (1) p as in paper: y pap, food;
^1 pdi, boat,
(2) W2- (final) when followed by O m or V- w :
H n I -^^^ w<5^'^« — pam mekta, I eat food ;
v^ *a c/top worn — cham nom, idler.
Ti^ i?i? or b: ^B)| C^ ^;>aite— baita, I extract;
^rT M PP^^^^ — balli, quickly.
3Li?>' the sharp p sound followed by a strong aspirate:
S^p'al, arm;
^ PJ'ijW^a, I sell;
■M'p'oimg, wind.
PRONUXCIATION OF COXSOXANTS.
1^ (1) t as in top, used as an initial only :
J^ ton, money ;
tX- V\ ^ri, leg.
(2) ch as in church. This sound is found in the two purely Corean words
t^' -^ tyoheui — chyoheui, paper;
O x\ tyot'a — chyot'a, good ;
and also in words of Chinese origin when this consonant is followed
by the vowel sounds i i, i ye, A\ yei or ^M'Jjo:
XA ^ tilyeng — chikyeng, territory ;
W ^J XX-tyemch'ita — chyemch'ita, I di^ane;
^1 ^ tyeichd — chyeicha, disciple ;
^ -^ tyomoTi — chyomok, section.
tc. ti ^^ <-^'y ^^ ^ "CX-ttarita — darita, I beat;
X^ ttdm — dam, sweat.
P
^ (1) t', the sharp t sound followed by a strong aspirate, but never modified
into the sonant th as in bathe:
Jgi^'q/}, a saw;
,^^Veum, a crack.
(2) ch', when preceding the vowel sounds | /, J ye and :^| yei \n a
few words derived from the Chinese, after the manner of its prototype ti :
^ -i -g- X^i'iA:otik;iato— ch'ikoukhata, I govern;
p^ Xtf^/enc/jya??^— ch'yenchyang, ceiling;
^1 ^ fyeimyen — ch'yeimyen, self respect.
^ch as in church: ^chivi, a load;
^ VX-choukta, I die.
:^chch or j: ^ XX-cJichyotta—iyotta, I drive away;
^l tl chchata—yattii'y taste salt.
COEEAN MANUAL.
3t c/i', the sound of ch followed by a strong aspirate:
J^ ch'i))i, lance;
J^ch'ong, gun;
J^ XX chHpta, cold.
X^ (1) n as in name: Vf. ^^nara,) kingdom;
-^ XX-nopta, high.
(2) I when preceded or followed by g. :
\M ^^pyelno — pyello, especially;
>|J- ^palno — pallo, with the foot;
Vt ^ nanri — nalli, ,war.
(3) mute generally as an initial before the vowel sounds \ i, "i ye and
;^| yei, sometimes shading into a faint nasal n or ng:
H XX-nihta — ikta, ripe;
V^l '^ nyeichyek or ngyeichyek — yeichek, ancient times ;
\A ^ nyeram — yeram, summer;
vl ni or ngi — i, tooth.
X3 (1) m as in man : J9L mom, the body ;
-^ moul, water.
(2) ng (final) when followed by y k:
/A y\ XX-syemkita — syengkita, I serve;
yV ^ A;amA;ewi— kangkeui, cold in the head.
6 (1) spiritus lenis, or mute initial, always prefixed to vowels in the absence
of a vocalised consonant, and hence termed the "pro-consonant" :
CV ^1 ;%! apachi, father ;
<d ^ yenkeui, smoke;
$• t^ oulta, I cry ;
^jjo, bedding.
rKONUNCiATION OF CONSONANTS.
(2) ng at the close of a syllable:
^Vpang, a room;
yj' kang, river;
^^L J3L sonnkof, awl.
(1) h, spiritus asper, always separate and distinct, as in inh-liorn, short-hand,
etc, and never coalescing with a consonant:
3.^
pakhoi, a wheel;
kyetheui, beside;
^^^ ^1 Jwuei, after;
-gl. "C^ ha k tang, school.
(2) faint initial sh before the vowel sounds H, ^ Z/^. ^ I yei and -y|» t/ow :
'gl /m?t — shim, strength;
'gj ^?/e — shye, the tongue;
"ct! hyeim — shyeim, number;
I^ v^ hyoungnyen — shyoungnyen, year of famine.
>>^ (1) s when initial, as in sun:
>y* S(X2?, spade ;
>^\. ^ sardm, man;
r a
>^r J'g. sakton, wages.
(2) t when final, as in hit:
Tj ket, thing
•^pat, field;
,5L ''^'^ot, nail.
In this latter position however it is subject to two euphonic changes :
(«) resuming its normal s sound when followed by another^ s:
y\ ^ ^^katsdro — kassaro, with a hat;
J2. .j^ y^ motsseulket — mosseulket, useless thing.
10 COREAN MANUAL.
(Z>) passing into an n sound when followed by x2 ^'^ or v-* n:
■^ T ^T '^^^otmekta — monmekta, I cannot eat;
31 l" ^tP^^^^^^^* — pinnata, brilliant.
>^ ss or ^: ^t ^O^sseuta — zeuta, I use;
-^M W- ssi^ifa — zitta, I wash ;
-^ 61 'Ci' ssoita — zoita, strike upon.
^ (1) Zas in call or milk, when closing a syllable either singly or in conjunction
with 7 k, n m, or "^ _p :
^nal, day;
Mj'paZ, foot ;
•3*1 XX'mdlMa, clear;
-^ X^salmta, I boil;
.>^ V\-syelpta, I grieve.
(2) r as in carry, when between two vowels, or a vowel and the aspirate ^ '•
" '^JLniara, don't ;
^ ' ^ Vl naranim, king ;
I ' "^ Cl marhdta, I speak.
(3) ^ (initial) in words derived from the Chinese, in which a distinct I
sound appears in the roots:
M H. ^^^^^ pronounced ndiil coming day, i.e. to-morrow ;
^ ^f loin pronounced noin old man.
S\ ^ loisyeng, pronounced noisyeng, thunder.
(4) almost mute initial with a faint nasal sound before the vowel sounds
I i, A ye and ^| yei, in words derived from the Chinese :
"t51 »*«" — i, profit;
T^ ^ ^jHrryengsakoan — yengsakoan, consulate;
wj V^ ryeimo — yeimo, manners.
PEONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. 11
VOWELS.
The Corean Alphabet contains eleven vowels : —
Ol. a ^ o ^6^
6|: ya ^ yo 6\
en
^
e (6, or u) J2- ou (u) 6 ii (short)
ye (yo, or yii) ^ you (yu)
PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION.
In transliterating these vowels I have deemed it advisable, apart from
other considerations, to adhere to the system introduced by the French
missionaries in their Dictionnaire Goreen-Fran(;ais and Grammaire Corccnfie,
two monuments of painstaking accuracy and erudition.
No doubt to the employment of the letter e to represent the vowel
sound tA some exception may legitimately be taken by an English student.
The letter o supplemented by a series of diacritical marks might at first sight
appear more appropriate. But when we come to a careful consideration of
the diphthong combinations derived from this vowel, the use of the letter o
associated with diacritical marks will be found attended with greater difficult-
ies than the employment of the single letter e. Certainly experience proves
that the forms e, ye, ei and yei will be much less perplexing to the student,
and will help to convey a clearer idea of the pronunciation of their sounds,
than can ever be done by oi, ydi, etc. In these diphthongs ei and yei exhibit
in their transliteration the value of the use of the English e, and correspond
very much with ei in eight and ye in yea. For the vowel CA itself, no single
letter can, for purposes of transliteration, properly define or determine its phonetic
value. The somid varies in different words, even in those of the same spelling
in Corean. As a general rule it approaches nearest to the "neutral" vowel in
err, verge, sir, bird, absurd, ranging from 6 short in closed syllables to il
short in words where the vowel sound is somewhat more prolonged. The
letters e and ye then are only to be accepted as symbols for the Corean vowels
64 and (d — the least objectionable under the circumstances, and especially
as obviating elaborate diacritical marks. At the same time the simplicity and
regularity of the Corean alphabet will early enable the student, to dispense
with all adventitious aids derived from any system of symbols which, however
carefully selected for purposes of transliteration, can at best only give an
approximation to the vowel sound.
12 COREAN MANUAL.
The vowels 6|» _y^ and J2»are clear, open and distinct, and in sound
are fairly represented by their English equivalents a, o and on, in father,
soft and uncoutlt, while in quantity they are found pronounced either long or
short; occasionally they are so prolonged that, judging from the analogy of a
few words, it would seem that they must have been follovved by the vowel
^eu, and that this must have been gradually dropped in writing — an abbrevi-
ation to which the Corean' script, down the page, would naturally lend itself.
The vowel ^| has likewise a long and short sound ranging from the
long i in ravine to the sliortened vocalization in pin, kin ; but it never possesses
the broad sound of i in light, life, etc.
In 6 we have normally the French sound eu reproduced and in its
diphthong combinations this phonetic is especially apparent ; but occasionally
this vowel is modified so as to approximate to the sound of t or ^ in jwf?/.
The vov/el 6 is known to Coreans as ar&i a or lower a in contra-
distinction to the regular open a sound, which they term ouei a, or upper a; in
pronunciation its sound may behest defined as the sound of d short, but more
quickly enunciated and occasionally merging into the sound of 6 eu, especially
in participles and in the Oppositive Case.
In the four forms 6i; ra ^^ and -S* we have a series of compound
or double vowels constantly occurring in Corean, and consisting of a ^ sound
prefixed to the simple vowels a, e, o and ou, viz : ya, as in the Enghsh word
yard; ye, as in yeoman; yo, as in yore; and you, as in youth. But in many
Corean words, and especially after an initial >u or ^ the effect of this y sound
is merely to lengthen the pronunciation of its radix vowel, with which it
coalesces so as practically to disappear, A knowledge of this use and practice
will greatly assist the student to a correct pronunciation of many words in
Corean: w (how many) is B]}elt niyet, but read met, as in the English met; in
-^v^ (the native name for the kingdom of Corea), th y merely lengthens
the vowel sounds o and e, which are then read with a value and quantity
much as in English — Chosen. The name for the capital of the 'country
>^ ^^has given rise to constant vagaries, both in pronunciation and in
transliteration. The Corean spelling is dissyllabic, >A^ sye, read sc, where e
has the sound of the " neutral " vowel, or tir vocal, heard ' in err, sir, etc.,
and ^^ Old, where ou has the English u sound heard in youth, pronounced,
however, with a shorter accent, and nearer the u in pull than the corresponding
sound inpool. There is, however, a constant tendency on the part of students to
elision, reducing the sound to one syllable, with the pronunciation of Syoul
(rhyming with school), a word ^g" which ni Corean means ivmc.
PRONUNCIATION OF YOVrELS. 13
TABLE OF VOWEL SOUNDS.
6l a as in father: ^hmal, language;
"^|- niat, taste.
C>U{1) 2/a a.s in yard: ^^yak, medicine;
^^7iyang 100 casli.
(2) when preceded by -A or^ ,tlie y is almost dropped, leaving merely a
lengthened a sound :
^h "Si syang-hdi — sang-hai, always;
.^ \M "o "Ct- c/z^/nrZ^T/eZ/iafo— chakpyelhata, I say farewell.
6-| e as in herd (neutral vowel), with a sound ranging from d short to u short
and a pronunciation that varies even in words of the same spelling:
^ ^ enfek — dntok, a slope; hut (A .^jmeroun — uroun, elder;
Cn ^Cl- cpta — opta, I carry; but 61 'CX'Cpta — iipta, I have not ;
XA XX-tepta — t(;pta I cover; but X^ X^ tepto. — tupta, warm.
OT [1) ycdu^ in yeoman: ra ^ yere, several;
OT ^JA yekeui, here.
(2) when preceded by^ ro -^ ,the y is almdst dropped, leaving a lengthened
e (neutral vowel) sound:
^u ^u ^ ^i ^y^P^y^P^^^^ — sepsephata, I am sorry ;
>M chyet — chet, milk.
(3) occasionally, when preceded by xJ oi' ^ > the y is almost dropped, and
leaves the long e sound of get in English:
tH myet — met, how many;
rf Pye—V^, paddy.
^ 0 as in soft, with the regular sound of o in English, varying between the
0 of or and ore :
J? y^^ moto, altogether ;
/X. J3- sankol, a dale.
14 COEEAN MANUAL.
^^ (1) yo as in yore : ^B- yok, abuse ;
^_ '^yora7i, tumult.
(2) when preceded by>^ or >^ 'the ?/ is almost dropped, leaving merely a
long 0 sound :>^ --^ syomoun — somoun, rumour;
^^- XX-chyopta — chopta, narrow.
.^^oiL as in imcouih, approximating more to the ?t sound in ^9wZZ, than the oo
sound in 2^ool : --j^ moun, a door :
^ poul, fire.
But at times this sound is distinctly prolonged:
Compare -if" noun — noon, snow, with ^ nonn, the eye.
^(1) you asiu youth: J^ ^youmo, nurse;
-tT ^ yountal, intercalary month.
(2) when preceded by^or j^ , the y is almost dropped, leaving merely
a long ou sound: ^ syoid — soul, wine;
^;^ 6 1 cJujo2iin — choiiin, landlord.
6^ (1) cu as in the French pen :
>-3L keu, that ;
v^ -^ seumoul, twenty.
(2) i or y, as in pity:
-^ >w m- Jceuvisyepang — kimsyepang, Mr. Kim ;
^^ xX-seuWa — silt'a, I refuse.
^ I i with a sound varying from i short in pin, chin, etc. to i long in ravine :
Compare y^ ^ "Cl- 7i-i;Jiato, important, with ^ 'C\- h'dta, lo:]g;
^il ^ ^\-p7hata, I compare, with ^jl P^^j»7to«, s:lk.
^ a as in tajj, with the sound of a distinctly shortened :
Compare s r/idl, a horse, with. '^J' mal, speech;
nr^ ;^j /.7.ac7if. until, with ^L ^| hachi, a branch.
PEONUNCIATION OF DIPHTHONGS. 15
DIPHTHONGS.
In order to meet the vocal sounds which their alphabet so far failed
to express, the Coreans very aptly availed themselves of certain diphthong
combinations and thereby evolved twelve distinct forms and sounds: —
^Ijai 5]oi ^^^
$1 ai 41 oui $fl oai
oue
ouei
6^1 ei ^1 youi 4]
(A] yei S] eui «t)]
PBONUNCIATION AND TBANSLITEBATION.
Cm ai. In enunciation, these two diphthongs are practically identical, while
>^l aj. in sound they range from the open ai in maiii (mane), to the shorter
'*) ' vocalization of ai in said (sed); the difference is generally regulated by
the accent or emphasis wdth which they are pronounced:
Compare C« ^| taisin, minister, with t^j y^j tUsin, on behalf of;
/M ^ sairo, newly, with T^l ^ tUro, according to.
^1 ei. This diphthong has the sound of the English e in get, met, etc.,
but at times is found prolonged, so as to correspond with the ei in eight i
Compare j^ 6^1 chycnei, before, with Ai^ seit, three.
^1 yd. In this diphthong we have the y somid prefixed to 6^1 ei, as in yes, yea.
^1 m ^ ^Cl- yeijyihsita, I prepare.
^ oi. (1) As a general rule, in closed syllables this diphthong approximates
closely to the English oi in soil :
. * ^ >A| C4- moisita,^ I serve.
(2) but in open monosyllables it resembles the German modified o:
4^1 sc'i — so, iron ;
.^^ 'j/joi— cbo, crime ;
^ poi — po, linen ;
"^ XX-l become, may be read either toita or t'ota, but has more
often the latter sound.
16 COKEAN MANUAL.
^1 ouL (1) This diphthong, in an open syllable and not preceded by a
consonant, is fairly represented both in sound and spelling by the
French oui, or English we:
^* rt ^"^^'''^ — weoni, dignit}' ;
(2) but when preceded by a consonant, tiie sound of the two
vowels -^'yj* and 6j i further coalesces and approximates nearly to tlie
German ii:
^1 tout — til, behind;
^
(3) in many words, especially after an initial j), the vowel sound on
disappears, leaving only a long i somid as in the English fatigue :
^I poui — pi, a broom ;
^I Wrpouinpang — pin pang, empty room.
TfJ youi. This diphthong, which appears only in a few words — all derived
from Chinese and all commencing with the aspirated check ^ — has the
sound* of oui with y prefixed: but, instead of being clearly pronounced,
the y has merely the effect of prolonging the quantity of the original oui:
^1 -5* C|- ch' yoidhdfa — chouihata, I am drunk.
eui. This sound is one of considerable difficulty to explain, for, as the
two vowels do not distinctly coalesce, it cannot be regarded as a diphthong
proper- In open syllables it may be defined as a short u — with the
regular sound of ii, not like the English w — joined to the vowel i.
But when preceded by a consonant, the tl sound tends to disappear,
leaving only the vowel i to be clearly enunciated, with a sound much
like that of i in wick :
Compare $1 ^ ewmw— iiisim, doubt, with ;pl -^ keuiho — kiho, flag%
oa. The value and quantity of the 0 in oa here corresponds with the
vowel u, which, when joined to the open a (as in father), produces
a sound represented by the English ua in quaff, or wa in waft:
I ^ $l'iri oa — iri wa, come here:
^^ hoal — hwal, a bow ;
jU. ^^koapou — kwapou, a widow.
4
PEOXU^*ClAiiU-N U-L i^iPHTHONGS. 17
S^ oai. In this diphthong, which rarely occurs in Ooreac words, we have
the vowel ^ o and the diphthong 6h ai coalescing, so as to produce
the sound of the Enghsh icai in wait, — the o ha^^ng the force of 76
as in the case of the preceding diphthong:
oai — wai, Japanese;
hoai — hvrai, torch;
^ ^ oaip'oung — waip'oung, typhoon.
_^ Guc. The phonetic value of the .S-^ou here is a lo sound vdl'ii a quantity
somewhat more prolonged than the it or ic in. the two previous cases,
while the (A sound corresponds tathe short v. As a general rule, the
i^ronunciation of the English 2f;o in icon may be accepted as giving
., *■,.;,; rendering of the sound of this diphthong:
^A x3\"^'(-'n^-!^'inq — woumanfr. discontent;
\L 6
rdji ,,;^,>/. Here we have the vowel -2*0 « and the diphthong 6^1 coalescing
so as to produce a sound approaching to the English uc in quell or in icell
>^^| kouei, box;
^1 oiici, why?;
;^| ^y hQueipa?ig, slander.
18 COREAN MANUAL.
IS0UN8.
SYSTEM OF DECLENSION.
The chief feature in the declension of Corean nouns is the regtlcir
system of agglutination employed to express case relation. The noun-root
remains unchanged throughout the declension, or is at most only slightly
modified so as to meet the requirements of Corean principles of euphony, viz :
ease in enunciation of consonants and harmonic affinity in vowel sounds.
Every Corean noun has normally, in addition to the root-form, nine
different formal agglutinations expressive of case relation. But it should
be observed at the outset that, while these case endings appear regularly in
vernacular writing, there is in conversation a constant tendency to dispense
with their use, in consequence of their somewhat cumbersome character. This
is especially marked in the case of the Nominative, the Genitive and the Accusative,
the root-form of the Noun being constantly employed in their stead without
any loss in perspicuity of meaning. The terminations for the Instrumental ^
the Locative and Ablative cases are more regularly retained in Corean colloquial;
and, though the noun-root may at times be loosely employed in the plr.ce of
the Dative, Coreans desiring to be accurately understood are careful to add one
of the case-endings or post-positions expressive of this case relation.
PABADIGM OF CASE SUFFIXES.
1. Boot Form: may be used in the place of almost any case, remaining
unchanged.
2. Nominative: (subject of sentence), i, si, ch'i, ka or hi.
3. Instrumental: by, with, for, through, to, towards, etc., euro, no, sixro,
chiiro, TO or heuro.
4. Genitive: of (possessive), eui, sni ov heui.
5. Dative: to, unto, etc., eiiikei, saikei, heuikei, or in the contracted forms
kei, kkei, kkeui.
6. Accusative: (object of sentence) euI, seid, clieid, reiil or heul.
7. Vocative : oh ! a or ya.
8. Locative: in, on, at, to, into etc., ei, sai or hei.
9. Ablative: from, since, at, etc., eisye, siiisj/c or hcisije.
10. Oppositivc: as for, with reference to, etc., cun, seun, cJieun, neiui
or hciui.
DECLEN8I0X OF NOUNS. 19
In the Accusative and Oppositive cases dl, an etc. are frequently-
substituted for eul, eun etc. The two vowel sounds a and en appear to be
interchangeable in this position, the form of the Corean a — a small dot — being
better adapted for speed in writing than eu, which is represented b j* a long
horizontal stroke. In pronunciation, however, the sound of a in this position
approximates more nearly to the sound of ew than to its strictly proper sound of d short.
The eu of the Genitive eui and the Dative euikei is generally dropped
when preceded by an open vowel at the end of the noun -root, the i being
furthur modified and coalescing with the final vowel of the root, so as to form
a distinct diphthong sound. Thus soichyet is regularly used for socui chyet,
cow's milk, and the Dative soeuikei is also contracted into soikci, the value
of oi in both instances being that of a pure diphthong, in which the o and i
coalesce and give a sound indistinguishable from o in German.
In the Dative case, the eui of euikei is frequently dropped, leaving
only kei as the distinctive Dative ending, and this is generally further modified
into kkei or kkeui for euphony. Thus
malldvei sirera hanalnim kkeui pilta
to horse load to heaven I pray
(Load the horse.) (I pray to heaven.)
This last form is generally used as an honorific, implying respect on
the part of the speaker.
ON THE FORM AND USE OF THE CASE SUFFIXES.
For words closed by a consonant the Nominative ends in i, which is
in some cases aspirated or modified into si or ch'i, so as to bring the case-
ending into euplionic accordance with the final consonant of the noun-root.
In nouns terminating with an open vowel, however, the Nominative appears
in the form of ka, or hi where an aspirate is required.
For the Accusative case eul is the distinctive ending, and for the
Genitive, eui', but both these forms are subject to the various modifications
enumerated in the Paradigm of case suffixes.
The nonnal form of the Dative case ending is eidkei. Tliis appears,
however, like the post-positions 61. ^| , ^ ^ and "Oi ^ , which arc frequently
substituted for it, to be properly restricted to persons and animate objects. It
is moreover frequently subject to modifications and contractions, as specified
in the Paradigm above given.
20 COEEAN MANUAL.
The Ijistnnnental case ends noimally in ro, but assumes the modified
iform of no, in accordance with principles of Corean euphony, when the case-ending
is immediately precefled by an I at the end of the noun-root. This case, in
• addition .to its -striclly Instrumental sense of bv, ivith, etc., very frequently
bears a final sense, being used to express purpose for, and dirction through or
towards — ideas obviously consequent open or evolv&d from the idea of instrumental-
ity. We thus find it constantly used with nouns of place and names of places
instead of; the locative ending, e.g.
^ 6 _^ y\ Pi- is equivalent to "^ 6^1 J7f ^l-I go home.
There are, however, two proper forms expressive of local case-relation :
(1) the Locative agglutination ei, normally used where rest in or on or
direction towai'ds As implied;
(2) the Ablative agglutination eisye normally used where direction from
has to ba expressed. -.But^'at times these two forms appear to be. interchanged,
the sye of eisye being regarded as a merely enclitic particle added for the sake
of euphony ; and Ahe Ablative form thus sometimes bears a purely locative sense,
especially in the case of nouns denoting inanimate objects.
The commonest form of the Vocative is that which ends in a; but
this case suffix is often dispensed with entirely, its place being frequently
filled by one of the exclamatory interjections with which the language abounds.
In addition to these case-endings, theCoreans possess a. form pe-
culiar to their language, to which has been assigned the name of the Oppos-
itive c&se. Ending normally in eun or an, this case has a meaning and use
precisely equivalent to the English prepositional phrase as for, .ivith reference
to etc. .It occurs constantly in both colloquial and written Corean ; it is sometimes
even added to the noun root and used as subject instead of the Nominative
case. Its use is always to mark the* contradistinction of two opposing ideas
oc propositions, and from this circumstance it has derived its name, of Oppos-
itive. It is not restricted to nouns alone, for nearly every part of speech
may receive the suffix, where two ideas are contrasted as placed in opposition.
Tha suffix has no independent use or meaning as a Corean word,
but being chiefly employed with nouns the form has been included among
the case endings for convenience of reference and explanation.
. Similar case-ending.s are likewise found in the declension of the pro-
nouns; only in the Genitive >...case eui is contracted into i for sake of euphony
after the open. vowel sounds of the root forms VW my, andy^j your, appearing
for instance, instead of VL ^X and vn ^\ . And a similar contraction also
occurs frequently in the Dative case. The pronouns in fvict follow on this
point the rule already given for nouns proper, where root form ends in an open
vowel.
LECLEXSION OF NOUNS. 21
METHODS OF DENOTING NUMBEB, GENDER, dc.
The Corean noun possesses no regular inflexion for Number — the suffix
teiil, which is occasionally utilized for this purpose, taking all the case termin-
ations of a regular noun in the singular. But this teul is not properly an
agglutination for the plural; for in Corean, nouns must be rendered either
singular or plural according to the context or meaning of the spealver as may
be best gathered by the listener. \\Taen teul is affixed to a noun, it is chiefly
employed to indicate or express an indefinite number. Thus Jidn sardm oatta,
one man came ; tou sardm oatta, two men came ; but sardtn teul oatta, men
came, imph'ing an indefinite number.
No distinction for Gender exists in Corean as an inflexional form.
When sex has to be specially indicated, independent names are employed to
designate the object and its sex, or where such names or nouns are wanting in
the language, resort is had to the two prefixes am (female) and sout (male) placed
immediately before the noun.
In Corean there are no Articles properly so-called. The demonstrative
pronouns are however employed w^ith a meaning and use, corresponding to the
definite article in English ; and the Corean numeralhdn (one) used as an adjective,
qualifying and prefixed to the noun, may legitimately be translated a or an
for our Enjjlish indefinite article.
N.B. — With regard to the following declension tables, it should be
observed that, though all the case endings have for the sake of completeness been
given with each of the nouns, they are not by any means all equally used
thus in every day speech. And in particular it should be noted that the
Dative ending in euikei appears strictly to be hardly, if ever, used except with
personal nouns.
22
COREAN MANUAL.
TABLE OF DECLENSIONS.
Nouns may be declined as follows.
(1) where the Eo-.;t ends in k, m, w, ng and p : —
Boot
^
son
hand.
Nominative
^«>1
son-i
the hand.
Instrumental
^A-5.
son-euro
by the hand.
Genitive
^^
son-eui
of the hand.
Dative
^^>»)
son-euikei
to the hand.
Accusative
^1
son-eul
the hand.
Vocative
^o\
son-a
oh ! the hand.
Locative
^^1
son-ei
in the hand.
Ablative
^<^]^
son-3isye
from the hand.
Oppositive
son-eun
as for the hand,
(2) Where the Root ends
in I: —
Boot
t
pal
foot.
Nominative
t^]
pari
the foot.
Instrumental
^^Jt
pallo
by the foot.
Genitive
t'A
pareui
of the foot.
Dative
t^A
pareuikei
to the foot.
Accusative
t-l
pareui
the foot.
Vocative
>y.6|.
para
oh! the foot.
Locative
t^l
parei
in the foot.
Ablative
^1^1^
pareisye
from the foot.
Oppositive
^i-$-
pareun
as for the foot.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
23
(3) When the Eoot ends in t (sometimes in p) by adding si,
etc. for certain words, and cA'i etc. for others: —
Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
Vocative
Locative
Ablative
Oppositive
Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
Vocative
Locative
Ablative
Oppositive
7>
>;
J. I-
3^
kat
kassi
kassjiro
kassai
kassaikei
kasseul
kata
kassai
kassaisye
kasseun
pat
patch'i
patch' arc
patheui
patheuikei
patheui
patch' eul
pata
pathei
patheisye
patheun
patch 'eun
hat.
the hat.
by the ha^t.
of the hat.
to the hat.
the hat.
oh ! the hat.
in the hat.
from the hat.
as for the hat.
field,
the field,
by the field,
of the field,
to the field.
J
the field.
oh ! the field,
in the field,
from the field.
1
Sas for the field.
J
24
COESAN MANUAL.
(4) When the root ends in a vowel, by adding ka etc. for
certain words, and hi etc. for others : —
Root
-fe
so
bull.
Nominative
^ 7\
soka
the bull.
Instrumental
& 3.
soro
by the bull.
Genitive
±^
sosui
of the bull.
Dative
>k$|7i]
soeuikei
to the bull.
Accusative
^■1
soreul
the bull.
Vocative
r
soj^a
oh! the bull.
Locative
>L^]
soei
in the bull.
Ablative
<ii^\^
soeisye
from the bull.
Oppositive
^^
soneun
as for the bull.
Boot
v)-4
nara
kingdom.
Nominative
vfe).^]
narahi
the kingdom.
Instrumental
^43.5.
naraheuro
by the kingdom.
Genitive
H-4^
naraheui
of the kingdom.
Dative
^4^^1
naraheuikei
to the kingdom.
Accusative
vfeft
naraheui
the kingdom.
Vocative
V^?j- 6j:
naraya
oh ! the kingdom.
Locative
vj.5f-Sfl
narahei
in the kingdom.
Ablative
vj-ej-^i >^
naraheisye
from the kingdom
Oppositive
^4^
naraheun
as for the kingdom,
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 25
1.
6.
7.
Exercise L
-s
<^n
moun yere
door open
Open the door.
-5 ^^
moun tate
door shut
Shut the door.
1^1
nahi
age
What
elma
how much
is your age?
ch'aik pouineuikei kachye ka
book to the lady having taken go
Take the book to the lady.
yengkoukeisye kat oasso
from England just come
I have just come from Egland.
^i^ ^3. 4-^ t^_^
saneun nopko kireun hemhao
as for hill it is high and as for road it is dangerous
The hills are high and the road dangerous.
poussaro sseuo
by pen write
Write with a pen.
fit f, ^ ^
pallo palpera
by foot tread
Stamp with the foot.
26 COEEAN MANUAL.
2.
5.
Exercise TI.
kapseul
price
I have given
chouetta
have given
the price.
^]3.
4t5^ 4
pomro
by broom
Sweep it witt
sseurera
sweep
I a brocm.
soeuikei
to bullock
Load the
sirera
load
bullock.
keu nyang paneui pouin
that of gentleman wife
That gentleman's wife.
chipeul chal chiesso.
house well has built
He has built the house well.
onaleun nimkouneui t'anil io
as for to-day of the king birthday it is
To-day is the king's birthday.
chipeisye oatta
from house have come.
I came from home.
«.] 5. 7> 7| 4
pairo kakera
by boat go
Go by boat.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 27
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Exercise III.
pari mopsi apha
foot bad sore
My foot is exceedingly sore.
tari apha mot kao
leg sore not go
My leg is sore and I can't go.
eumsik massi epso
food relish has not
I have no appetite.
^^i ^^1 ^^
pamei nounr oatta
in night snow has come
Snow fell dm.'iug the night.
kang moul eresso
river water has frozen
The river has frozen.
kil kaki eryepso
road to go is difficult
It is difdcult travelling.
pika ol tteut hao
rain coming intention makes
It looks Hke rain.
t ^3. 7f ^ Pf
mal t'a-ko kakeitta
horse ride-and will go
I will go on horse back.
28 COEEAN MANUAL.
4.
Exercise TV.
nari ch'ipta poul ttaiyera
day is cold fire kindle
The weather is cold ; light a fire.
ot elleun nipera
clothes quickly dress
Dress yourself quickly.
pap kachye onera
rice having taken come
Bring dinner,
^'d t'^ ^^
sonnim hana oasso
guest one has come
A guest has arrived.
^}% "vl^l ^^
saram manhi onta
men many come
There are several men coming.
pangei teurye nohara
in room having entered put
Put it into the room.
^ ^ ^ i ^
kyokoun-koun poulle
chair-coolies call
Send for the chair-coolies.
mal anchang chiouera
horse saddle saddle
Saddle the pony.
PRONOUNS.
29
PRONOTJISS.
(1) PERSONAL.
Root
H-
na
I.
Nominative
nai
naika
I.
Instrumental
"i^
nallo
by me.
Genitive
^
nai
my, mine.
Dative
vflT^l
naikei
to me.
Accusative
^4
nai
nareul
■ me.
Oppositive
nanan
as for me.
Root
ouri
we.
Nominative
^^
ouri
■ we.
^^^}
ourika
J
Instrumental
-^■e)^
ouriro
by us.
Genitive
^^
ouri
our.
Dative
-^^^1
ourikei
to us.
Accusative
^^
ourireul
us.
Oppositive
-T-^
1^
ourinan
as for us.
30
COREAN MANUAL.
Eoot
^
Nominative
^]
^]^y
Instrumental
t^
Genitive
^1
Dative
»^i^i
Accusative
v|4
Oppositive
vis:
ne
neika
nello
nei
neikei
nereul
nenan
thou.
thou.
by thee.
thy, thine.
to thee.
thee.
as for thee.
Eoot
^^
neheui
you.
Nominative
neheui
neheuika
- you.
Instrumental
y^^3.
neheuiro
by you.
Genitive
^^
neheui
your.
Dative
v^^^l
neheuikei
to you.
Accusative
v|^]-|
neheuireul
you.
Oppositive
vi^lS
neheuinan
as for you
PEONOUNS. 31
(2) DEMONSTBATIVE.
XA chye He, she, it, they, that, (implying distance).
^ keu that
6| i this (impljdng nearness).
These demonstrative pronomis are all capable of declension on the usual
model. Thus we find —
Eoot
*•]
i
this.
Nominative
'\y\
ika
this.
Instrumental
t^
illo
by, or with this
Accusative
^!4
ireul
this.
Oppositive
o\^
inan
as for this.
But with the exception of the nominative, even these cases are but little
used ; the root forms being most commonly employed in conjunction with sub-
stantives hke Tj for things, or>^W ^ for persons, which bear the inflexions in-
stead of the pronouns, the latter (like adjectives) remaining indeclinable in
this position, e.g.
^
411
4vi 4
chye
sarameul
poulle oa
that
man
having called come
Go and
call him.
(3) POSSESSIVE.
Strictly speaking, there are no possessive pronouns in Corean. Their
place is taken by the Genitive cases of the personal and demonstrative pronouns,
thus,
ouri nara
Our country.
nai
atal
My
son.
32
COREAN MANUAL.
(4) INTEBBOGATIVE.
T
T3
a 61
nou
noukou
ena
etten
mousam
mouet
who ? (oi persons)
which ? whft ? (of persons and things)
which ? what ? (of persons and things)
what ? (of persons and things)
what ? (of things)
^ \^ ^ ^ and ^^ ^ ^^^ rarely, if ever, dechned.
But -^ or -^ -^ and ^ ^ are capable of regular declension, as
follows : —
Boot
Nominative
Instrumental
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
Oppositive
-Ti- 1
\- >-r \—
nou
noukou
noulca
noui
nouika
nouiro
noui
nouikei
noural
noukoural
nouinan
noukounan
who.
who.
I
by whom,
of whom,
to whom.
whom.
as to whom.
PEONOUNS.
33
Eoot
Nominative
Instrumental
Accusa tive
Locative
Oppositive
^5!
-r
a 6^4
mouet
mouesi
mouello
mouesaro
mouesal
mouesai
mouesan
what,
what.
by what.
what,
in what.
as for what.
(.5) REFLEXIVE.
chakeui
che
chei
cheika
chyello
seusaro
sero
pich'a
ch'inhi
soncho
sonsyou
himself, herself, itself, oneself.
[himself, of himself, itself, of itself, &c.,&c.
J {i.e. instinctively, of its own accord).
one another, each other (reciprocal).
1
-one self, himself, &c., &c. {i.e. in person).
34
CORE AN MANUAL
(6) INDEFINITE.
All
^
ta.
iS.
moto.
^
on (prefix).
Any
o\y.
amo.
Any whatever
4i«d>)
amotenchi.
Each, every
n
kak.
--1
sik.
^1
mai (prefix).
-}^
mata (suffix).
Many
«i^]
manhi.
Other, another
^t
taran.
Several
<^^
yere.
Such
*M
iren.
^^
chyeren.
^^
keujcen.
Whatever
5I^€>1
ettet'enchi.
*i-i
amman.
"Whoever
^i-'d^l
noukoutenchi.
^4
mouron (prefix).
PEONOUNS. 35
Note 1. — "Each" and ''Every" are frequently expressed by repeating the
noun itself without any pronoun prefixed, thus: — ta-tari for tal-tari
(monthly), na-nari for nal-nari (daily) &c.
Note 2. — In addition to the use o^ tenchi or t'enchi as an enclitic particle
to signify ever, the suffix na is frequently eraployed but with a more
restrictive sense, meaning "any at least", "although", "no matter
what," "any whatever" &c.
Note 3. — The indefinite pronouns sovie, any, somebody, anybody, etc., are
constantly rendered by the use of the interrogatives v* j-r
^ p) and ^ >4 Thus— T F '
Who will ^o
may mean either Who tcill go ? or Someone will go ;
which man thus do
ma§^ mean either What sort of men act th**^? or tJiere are men
who act thv4 ;
^^4 ^ ^^
what about to see work is
may mean either What toork is there to be done ? or tJiere is some
work to be done.
And, in precisely the same way, the interrogativa adverbs ^/^I
when'fxA kow m<2ny?and 6^ "C.| tc^(?re? are frequently used with the
indefinite sense of sometitnes or by and by, several, and somewhere,
respectively.
(7) BELATIVE.
Relative pronouns as such are unknown in the Corean language,
but Relative clauses are rendered by means of Relative Participles,
joined as an Adjective to the antecedent Noun — present, past or
future, according to the nature of the time required in the Relative
clause.
36 COKEAN MANUAL.
8.
Exercise V.
ourika enchei kakeisso
we when will go
When will we go ?
^ ^ *1 '^l 7f V >t
neheui etai kanaiiya
you where go
Where ara you going ?
nanan ton ep so
as for me money have not
I have no money.
nenan pouchya toiyetta
as for you rich have become
You have grown rich.
^t ^4 ^^
nareul ch'acha oasso
me seek have come
Are you looking for me ?
ouri chipi katkapso
our house near
Our house is near.
I cheika chal mot hayesso
oneself well not have done
6
I beg to apologize.
keu iri nom t'assio
that work whose fault is
Whose fault is this?
1 "cheika" is used for the sake of hicmility and means "I myself."
PEONOUNS. 37
3.
Exercise VI.
noukoureul ch'asso
whom seek
For whom are you looking ?
2. t ^ ^' ^-S^
han nyang sik chouo
one nyang each give
Give them a hundred cash each.
kak ch'yeei ta isso
each in place all are
There are some everywhere.
^ °f^ ^5J TJt
nal mata mouet hao
day each what make
"^^at do you do daily?
amo pyel il epso
any special work is not
I do nothing in particular.
v>re kachi ta popsyeita
:''Vtral kinds all let us see
Let us examine the whole lot.
nan-natch'i chipe tamera
one by one nip fill
Take and pack them one by one.
illo hangsyang nyemnye toio
by this continually anxiety become
I am always anxious about this.
10
38 COBEAN MANUAL.
1.
4.
Exercise YII.
moulken nioto ta sa oasso
articles all all buy have come
Have you bought the whole of the articles?
amotenchi oasye kachye kakera
any whatever having come take go
Whoever comes let him take it away.
etaitenchi naika ttarakanta
wherever I follow
Wherever you go I will follow.
amo
any
iri-na chosimhao
work-ever careful
Whatever you do be careful.
6
amo kesi-na tteut tairo sseuo
any thing-ever intention according use
Use any article you like.
-a 41 -i^ T^i 4^1 ^5J-^
keu saram onan kesal ch'inhi poasbo
that man coming thing myself saw
I myself saw the man coming.
*>] ^J-l ^.4 ^^ ^I5i<^
i chipeul naika soncho chiesso
this house I personally made
I built this house myself.
end saram-inchi nailca molla
what man may-be I do not know
I cannot tell which man it is.
PEONOUKS. 39
1.
2.
4.
5.
6-
Exercise VIIT.
(Belatives) .
6];^] 3.^ 4>tl "l^ ^e^j,
ecbei ponaiii p'yenclii illie paryesso
yesterday sent letter lost
Tlie letter I sent yesierday is lost.
chikemu meknaii yaK massi sseita
now eating medicine taste bit er
The medicine that I am now taking tastes bitter.
ouri sa-on ch'dik etai innanya
we buy-came book where are
Where are the books that we bought ?
ouri kireisye mannatten keu eui ouen oasso
we on the road met that doctor came
The Doctor we met on the road has arrived.
na marhan ket ta toiyenna
I said thing all have become
Have you done what I told you?
chye mokoun kachye kal chim moukepta
that coolie taken going load is heavy
That is a heavy load the coolie is going to take.
ouri kenne-kal mouri kipta
we across-about-to-go water deep
The river we have to cross is deep.
4^1 1 ^ ^ -^ f ^H 'i^
c,[v\ luoknaa niuul oumoureisye nanta
we drinking water from well issues
The water we drink comes from the well.
40 COEEAN MANUAL
PRONOMINAL SUBSTITUTES.
Jnstea i of employing the regular personal pronouns, Coreans constantly
resort to substitutes of an honorific character, indicative of the speakers'
relative rank &c., and mostly derived from Chinese. Among those most commonly
used are the following: —
^1
^1
^}
5.^
Ol.
chyei
chyeika
chanai
tangsin ^^
taik ^
nohyeng ^^
>
sisamg
saine
4
taikam "J^^,
nyengkam "^^
tai-in pi^A*
^ a.
Chyei and cJiyeika, when used in the first person or of a third person
not pre5':)nt, have a depreciatory or humble sense, but for the second person
it is employed familiarly among friends in speaking to one another or in
addressing immediate dependants.
Chanai is generally restricted to familiar intercourse among friends and
relations or is used in addressing aged retainers and inferiors, where one desire^
to be very courteous and considerate.
Tangsin is derived from two Chinese words, meaning "representing
body". It is an honorific for addressing superiors, — "Sir".
Taik is a word of Chinese origin, meaning "house" or "mansion," though
its use as a pronominal substitute is a purely Corean idiom. It is used respectfully
for"7/ow" among equals in rank, being a less formal term than tangsin and
less familiar than chanai.
PRONOUNS. 41
Nohyeng, or "elder brother," is a word of Chinese origin in constant
use among Coreans, as a substitute for the pronoun "you" in conversation
between equals.
Syoin, or "small man," is derived from the Chinese, and is employed
by the common people, when speaking of themselves before their superiors,
or by persons of military rank before civil officers.
Sisaing, or "attendant born," is derived from the Chinese, and is
used by inferiors in official rank in speaking of themselves to their superiors,
and also, for the sake of courtesy and politeness, among equals in rank.
Suing, which is derived from the Chinese and means "born," is the
form employed by members of the educated classes, who have no official rank»
when speaking of themselves before their superiors.
Taikam, is derived from two Chinese words and means "Great superin-
tendent." It is restricted to High Mmisters of state, and may very accm^ately
be translated "excellency.
Byeng ham, from two Chinese words meaning "command superintendent"
is the correct form for addressing officials of less exalted rank, though it may also
be used of very subordinate officers, when the speaker wishes to be very polite.
Kong and Tai-in are two terms introduced into Corea from Japan and
China respectively, consequent on the opening of the country to foreign trade
and intercourse:
Ko7ig is strictly a Chinese word of polite signification and may properly
be held to correspond with our English "Jlfr.," while as an honorific it has much
the same force and use as the Corean term tailc ;
Tai-in is derived from the two Chinese words "Great man", and is
now constantly used in speaking of, or to foreign officials.
N. B. — No attempt will be made on subsequent pages to distinguish by
a diacritical mark the tico sounds 6l.and 6 in the transliteration of En Moun-
11
42
COEEAN MANUAL.
:^UMi:RALS.
CARDINAL.
Chinese.
COREAN.
1
*a
il
-f vf.
hana
2
']
i
toul
3
^i
sam
^
seit
4
>fe
sa
^\
neit
5
J.
0
^±
tasat
6
ryouk
^±
yesat
7
^l
ch'il
t^
nilkop
8
'4
p'al
*la
yetalp
9
"t
kou
r d
ahop
10
4
sip
t
yel
11
4t
sipil
^■t^
yel hana
12
40]
sipi, etc.
t^
yel toul, etc.
20
"^4
i sip
^t
seumoul
21
*) 4 t
i sipil
^t-ti-
seumoul hana
22
*| 4 1
i sipi, etc.
^^t
seumoul toul, etc
30
^^>3
sam sip
4^
syerheun
40
-^4
sa sip
«f :|.
maheun
60
^4
0 sip
4
souin
60
^4
ryouk sip
*^)t
yeisyoun
70
^14
ch'il sip
^^
nilheun
80
^4
p'al sip
*^-&
yeteun
90
^4
kou sip
4:^
aheun
NUMERALS.
43
100
200
1000
2000
10,000
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Firstly
Secondly
Thirdly
Fourthly
Fifthly
Sixthly
Seventhly
Eighthly
Ninthly
Tenthly
il paik
i paik, etc.
il ch'yen
i ch'yen, etc
il man, etc. >
OBDINAL
- Chinese Numerals for which there are no
pure Corean equivalents.
COREAK.
chetchai
toulchai
seitchai
neitchai, etc.
■f^^
ORDINAL ADVERBS.
hanaheun ^ ,^
'"^ ^^ tourheun
seiseun
^1^
V^l ^^ neiheun
"W* -^ ,^Sl tasasseun
CT -^ ,;^ yesasseun
^ ^ ^ nilkopeun
^ ^ ^yetalpeun
6! J^ J^L ahopeun
^ ,IS1 yeiheun, etc.
Chinese.
chyei il
chyei i
chyei sam
chyei sa, etc.
ilheun
inan
sameun
sanan
onan
ryoukeun
ch'ireun
p'areun
kounan
sipeun, etc.
Most of the Corean numerals are thus drawn from Chinese, and before words
of Chinese origin such numerals are generally used ; while the Corean numerals
proper, which only extend from one to ninety-nine, are conjoined with words of
Corean origin or with such Chinese derivatives as are thoroughly assimilated into
current colloquial ; thus sei nal, three days, are both purely Corean words but sam
il, three days, are Chinese.
44
COKEAN MANUAL.
ABBBEVIATEB FOBMS OF NUMEBALS.
The first eight Corean numerals constantly occur in abbreviated forms,
which are most frequently used in reckoning money, weight, measures, time
etc. And these variations, in accordance with the requirements of Corean
euphony, depend for their exact form on the initial consonant of the noun which
they qualify. Thus we find —
^1
ban
tou
se
sei
sek
ne
nei
nek
tat
tai
yet
ye
nil
yet
for
for
for
^"^
1
for
for
for
for
for
^
^
hana, one.
toul, two.
seit, three.
>*•
>«•
neit, four.
tasat, five.
yesat, six.
nilkop, seven,
yetalp, eight.
To give the idea of approximation, conveyed by our English idiom
*'two or three," etc., the full or abbreviated forms of the Corean numerals are
used in pairs, without any conjunetion; and in this position even the abbrevi-
ated forms are sometimes still further shortened. Thus —
t ^
han tou
tou
'}
^1
saram
^1
sei
kachi
or
toue kachi
One or two men.
Two or three kinds.
NUMERALS.
45
sei nei nal
tasat
^4
nei
><ij| P^l '^ or >4^ v^ 1^
sene nal
chip netet chip
keim tait keun
keurat
pyeng
syem
^1
lei
tai
ye
nil
yet
yesat
^^
nilkop
^
yetalp
ahop
Three or four days.
Four or five houses.
Five or six pounds.
Six or seven basins.
Seven or eight bottles.
Eisht or nine bags.
FRACTIONS AND MULTIPLES.
^y pan or J^ ^L chyelpan is the Corean equivalent for one half.
Other fi'actions are reckoned in the Chinese numerals, conjoined with the Chinese
words poun, division, and chi, of, the possessive postposition : —
>^ J^ ^1 ^ sam poun chi il, i.e one of three divisions, or ^
^ ^ >t j v^ sa poun chi sam, i.e. three of four divisions, or |
Multiples are rendered by "91 pai,^^ ^ kopchyel or yjt ^ kapchyel,
^^^-^^kop, of which the last is generally used with pure Corean numerals, and
the two first more usually with those of Chinese origin. Thus —
>y- ^1 sampai or y<fl -2. s2zA;op= triple.
^ nj sapai, ^ -^^ sakop or|^] -2» ?jeiA:o2)= quadruple.
*3 7r >^ yel kap chyel=ten times.
NUMEBATIVES.
Just as in English we speak of a Jiock of sheep, a sheet of paper, so
many head of cattle, a suit of clothes, etc., so in Corean we find similar terms
constantly employed as numeratives, or classifiers, as they have been termed,
for different classes of objects. Subjoined is a hst of those numerative terms
12
46
COKEAN MANUAL.
which are most commonly in use : —
1. VI
13^ myeng
2Xm 7iom, (impolite)
2. "Oi ^ meri, head
a. ^ p'ii
4. ^p'il, bale
5. -^ kouen, volume
6. jMSc%aw^, sheet
■^ ^oi/ew, quire
^ ch'youk, ream
8. ^}j /i;ai
5. X^nat
10. "^i^eZ, suit
"^ wow^, bundle
XX'tan, sheaf
12. '^ m^
13. ;;i ^charo handle,
14. J^ ch'yeJc,
15. ^S^chchalc, for one of
-for persons.
for animals generally.
for horses and cattle generally
for pack horses, etc, loaded and loads.
for cloth, piece goods, etc.
for books, rolls of paper, etc.
for paper.
for boots, stockings, etc.
for articles generally,
for small articles, grain, etc.
for clothes.
-for straw, firewood, etc.
for hats, mats, bags, money, etc.
for pens, fans, etc.
for boats, and ships.
a pair of articles, e.g. shoes, loads, leaves
of a door, etc.
NUMERALS. 47
1.
2.
4.
Exercise IX.
(Numerals and Numeratives)
t ^}| ^^
han saram oasso.
one man came.
One person came.
saram hana poasso.
man one I saw
I saw one man.
ton nyep'yennei han chipei sao
two women one in house hve
Two ladies occupy one dwelling.
^1 -&*) 44 -f-^ 4 ^ "i ^*14
se toni pouchyok hao sek nyang man chouera
three ton * insufficient three 7iyang I only give
There are thirty cash short : give only three hundred cash.
^ 1 ^'A i ^l ^ 4^^
sek tal houei sei chip ta sakeisso
three moon after three house all will buy
Wait three months and I will buy all the three houses.
^^ ''I ^ ^ ^i- ^^^
ssal nek syem ne mal namasso
rice four pecul four pecks remain
There are four pecul and four pecks of rice remaining.
namou tat mout kapsi -elmana toio
wood 5 bundle price how much become
What is the price of five bundles of wood.
tai yesat chim man onal sa onera
5 6 load only today buy come
Buy some five or six loads only today.
* 1 ton, 10 cash. t 1 nyang, 100 cash.
48
COKE AN MANUAL.
Exercise X.
{Numerals and Numeratives)
1.
ie| ^ -^ 4 >g ^ ^
t
pori yet mal koa chip yet mout mal mekiesso
barley 6 pecks and straw 6 bundles horse fed
The horse had 6 pecks of barley and 6 bundles of straw.
2. 6
1
this
moulken ye nilkop kachi
article 6 7 kinds
Bring some 6 or 7 kinds of this article
kachye
having taken
_ft.vi?|.
onera
come
3.
3.^
mokoun
cooUe
i. H
ea
nil
7
^Vl
i^
yetalp saram poulle
8 men called
Get some seven or eight coolies.
jLi^ef
onera
come
4.
a tz^
r vJ
^^ 45!-^
keu
that
^-1 ^
ttai soreul yet ahop mori chapasso
time ox 8 9 head slaughtered
Some 8 or 9 oxen were slaughtered at that time.
5.
^
JL
kounsa
soldiers
kyokoun-koun
chair-bearers
^ Pl| ^ -f^ ^
-r
tou niyeng maireul machyetta
two names whips met
Two soldiers have been flogged.
*ia
^
^-^
yetalp nom poulle
eight individual called
Get eight chair coolies.
J^ v^ ef
onera
come
7,
cheumsaing
animals
yere mari chapasso
several head seized
He killed several animals.
^ 1 «1 ^ "J: ^H 4
talk hau meri man chichyera
fowl one head only fry
Cook one fowl only.
NUMERALS. 49
Exercise XI.
(Numerals and Numeratives).
1 I ^1 € 4 ^ '^l^ ^1 "fl ^ Jt ^ sf
mal sei p'il koa so nei p'il sak-naiye onera
horse three {7ium) and ox four (num) hired come
Hire three ponies and four bullocks,
so tou pari-myen chyokhi sitkeitta
ox two loads-ifbe enough will load
Two bullocks can easily carry this.
yang mok myet p'iri-na* isso
cotton goods how many bales- ever are
How many bales of piece goods are there?
4. Jl 4) ^ 6^ ^ ^^>fc
keu ch'aik tou-e kouen nilkesso
that book two-or-three volumes have read
I have read a few volumes of that book.
3ifc>a ^^ ^^ ^i=^l t^i '^iJ!.
chyosyen chyoheui seumou chyangi han kouen io
Corean paper twenty sheet one quire is
Twenty sheets of Corean paper make one quire.
« >a t ^^ 4 ^^ -T ^^ ^"^^
sin han k'yeri oa pesyen tou k'yeri ponaio
shoe one pair and stockings two pairs ^ send.
Send a pair of shoes and two pair of stockings.
^ t )t 5: Mi«^ 4^^1 4^
ssal han nat to naiye-parichi mara
rice one {mc7n) also throw away ^ avoid
Don't throw away even one grain of the rice.
pyektol paik kai kapsi elmanya
bricks 100 num price how much
How much will one hundred bricks cost?
*See foot note on page 50,
rs
50 COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise XII.
{Numerals and Numeratives)
chyang sokei ot han pel isso
press within clothes one suit is
There is a suit of clothes inside the press.
2^J t jc 4 ^^ t 5 ^1- -^^^
chip han mout koa namou han mout sa onera
straw one bundle and wood one bundle bought come
Buy one bundle of straw and one bundle of wood.
kat han nip chari ton nip ta it-na * poara
hat one (/mw) mat two (nufn) all is-whether see
See if you have got one hat and two mats.
4^ S. ^ ^J ^J:
pout han charo to sseul ket epso
pen one handle even about to use thing not is
Not even a single pen is of any use.
keu moulken pai han ch'yekei mot ta sitkeitta
that article boat one iiium.) not all will load
One boat cannot carry all those goods.
chim han chchak man chye-ta f touera
load one {mim) only carried place
Carry only one load there.
* Na and ina are euphonic enclitic particles, signifying ever, at least,
whether, though, may be, etc.
t Ta is merely an enclitic particle placed after chye, the perfect par-
ticiple of chita (I carry), for the sake of euphony. It appears constantly in Corean
colloquial. With kanta (I go) the participle ka is used but tta (not ta) is
added: katta touera, "having gone, place (it)," meaning "go and put (it)."
NUMERALS.
51
Exercise XIII.
{Fractions arid Multiples).
i^
4
chan
'i
syoul pan en an man
wine half cup only give
Give half a glass of wine only.
chouo
1
this
ssal
rice
4t
4
chyelpan man chi-ko kakera
half only carry-and go
Carry only half of this rice away.
3, 6] ^] J. «] JL cj. >j- «| vj. ^ c^
1
this
pai
ship
keu pai pota sampai-na k'euta
that ship-in comparison triple-at least large
This ship is three times larger than that one.
chikeum
^M ^1 3l4J^
now
sisyei-nan kapchyel te
market price as for double more
The market price is now twice as dear.
pis-ssao
dear
^)^ i^d ^^ "d ^1 7H -^^4
n-en moulken kopchyel man te kachye
such article double only more bring
Bring double the quantity of these articles.
on era
come
7.
J- ^J 6| ;g ^ C|. ^ -3. 6] Vf ^ ^ T^
keu chnn i chim pota sa kop-i-na moukepta
that load this load in comparison quadruple-at least heavy
That load is four times as heavy as this one.
4
X3
moureun
as for water
syoul pota neikapchyereul
wine in comparison quadruple
Mix four of water with one of wine.
"pouera
pour
8. J.
keu
that
moulken p'al-ttaiei rika sakop-i-na namasso
article in selling-time profit quadruple-ever remained
The sale of that article left a profit of 400 per cent.
52 COEEAN MANUAL
METHODS OF BECKONING TIME, SEASONS, ETC.
The following are the names for the chief divisions of time —
Core AN. Chinese.
Year
11
hai (i.e. sun)
^
nyen
Month
1
tal (i.e. moon)
^l
ouel
Day
^
nal
t
il
The Coreans borrow their Calendar and their methods of reckoning times
and seasons almost wholesale from the Chinese : and for detailed information
on these points the studeut is referred to the Grainmaire Coreenn of the French
Missionaries.
For the computation of years the Coreans lack the convenient system
of an era, like the Anno Domini of Christian Nations or the Anno Urbis Con-
ditcB of ancient Eome. They use instead the Chinese cycle system, which pro-
vides a series of sixty proper year-names used in regular rotation for sixty con-
secutive years. When the 60 years are completed the cycle, which is known as
the ^> 71 '^youk kap, commences again. Thus the year of the publication of
this work (1893) is knov/n as^j ^ , a name which belonged also to the years
1833, 1773, etc. and which will recur again in 1953, 2013 etc. This system
obviously lends itself to the creation of the wildest confusion in matters of chrono-
logy, historical records, etc. — a confusion for which a remedy has been sought in
the addition of the reigning Chinese Emperor's name to the cyclic name of the
year.
In the computation of the years of a man's age, Coreans use either
,/A syel (familiar and impolite) or/i^j syei (respectful) rather than '51 hai or v^}
7iyen.
The year is divided normally into 12 months, of which the first (roughly
speaking) coincides with the Western February : and these are distinguished
by the Chinese numerals, with the exception of the first and the two last which
are known as Chyeng-ouel, Tong chi tal, and Set-tal, respectively. Thus we have —
First month ^A -ij Chyeng-ouel.
Second month 6| ^ I ouel.
Third month >M- ^ Sam ouel.
Fourth month, etc. >^ ^\ Sa ouel, etc.
METHOD OF RECKONING TIME. 53
Tenth month
4^1
Sip ouel.
Eleventh month
4^11
Tong chi tal.
Twelfth month
41
Set tal.
The purpose of the European Leap-year is served by the insertion every
third or fourth year of a leap month, known as^^ ^ i/oim taJ, or^ ^
youn ouel.
The months contain either 29 or 30 daijs apiece, and are known as
"great" or "small" months accordingly. Both the Chinese and Corean numerals
are used in reckoning the days of the month, with the exception of the 15th
day and the last day of each month, which are known respectively as ijoram
nal and keiimeum nal. Thus we find —
Corean.
Chinese.
1st day
^
T^
ch'o haro
^*a
ch'o il
2ad „
-•
A "e
ch'o itheul
a^!
ch'o i
3rd ,,
X y- 31
ch'o saheul
^4
cli'o sam
4th ,,
_^
^ft
cli'o naheul
-S.^
ch'o sa
5th „
J.
^^1
ch'o tassai
^J-
ch'o 0
KJ..LX ,,
^_
^^1
ch'o yessai
^#
ch'o ryouk
7th „
=i
m
ch'o nilhei
al
ch'o chil
8th „
^
•H^.^)
ch'o yeteurai
a^
ch'o p'al
9th „
^
6|. J^ Hj
ch'o aheurai
a-t
ch'o kou
10th „
J.
tt
ch'o yerheul
^4
ch'o sip
11th „
't
-f ^
yel haro
4t
sip il
12th ,, etc
t
5!^
yel itheul, etc
>J^|
sip, i etc.
loth ,,
JL
S^
poram nal
4^
sip 0
16th ,, etc
t
^^1
yel yessai, etc.
^i^
sip ryouk, etc
Last „
1/1
J3L
4^
keumeum nal
^'i
hoi il.
54
COKEAN MANUAL.
The word clVo nsecT with the first ten numerals in the above table is
deriveu from the OhineoO aid signifies the "first decade" of the month. Haro,
itheul, etc. may also be iisecT Vvithout this prefix to indicate the first ten days
of the month ; but more generally, when thus standing alone, these words express
a period of time, — of one day, two days etc. And in this latter case they may-
appear either with the locative case-ending ei, or joined as adjectives to the
word tsL ^1 , 7nanei, a period.
In the same way porajn, when used apart from nal, generally means
a period of 14 or 15 days, or, as we should say, a fortnight.
Appended is a list of some of the words most frequently used in the
computation of times, seasons etc. which have not yet been noticed.
COREAN.
Chinese.
Today
-S.1
onal
^'l
keum il
>>
^%
tang il
Tomorrow
%] %
nai il
>>
^''l
myeng il
Day after tomorrow
3.^
morel
Two days after)
tomorrow J
^^
keulp'i
•
Three days after )
tomorrow j
a^3|
keukeulp'i
Any future day
^%
hou il
Yesterday
H^l
echei
^1*1
chak il
>>
H^^^
echekkeui
Day before yesterday j^. >t| yj\
keuchekkeui
^pi*a
chaichak il
This year
*HI
i hai
keum nyen
tang iiyen
Next year
-s-s:^)
onan hai
nai nyen
myeng nyen
Any future year
hou nyen
nai hou nyen
METHOD OF KECKONING TIME.
r,n
Last year
7.HI
Year before last JX ^ ^
kan hai „^ v^ cbyen nyen
>y- \A chak nyen
^ ^ syang nyen
7J Vg^ke nyen
keuretkeui^j >^ v^ chaichak nyen
This month
*1t
i tal -^ -^ keum ouel
Next month
J.)Lt
onan tal Hi -^ nai ouel
Last month
^It
kan tal ^j -g ke ouel
New Year's Day
New Year Tide >^>| -gj
New Year, 1st ten days
Every day, day \ 1^ ol pL
sai hai
by day
vf v^
Every other day '^ ^^ ^
All day
-^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ch'o haro
>"! jt;^ .il sin kou syei (new old
•jiT'^l year)
"5l./^( hoan syei (change year)
/Ml >^| syei si (year season)
j^ J^ chyeng ch'o
nal mata ^ ^ il i^
nanari v^ ^ nyen il
^ ^ ch'youk il
^] ^ mai il
\^ haro kenne^l" ^ kan il
^ ^ chyong il
All night
^ 61: chyong ya
Spring
4
pom
-^ ch'j^oun
Summer
. ^t
nyeram
"SLha
Autumn
y}^
kaeul
^ch'you
AVinter
Til
kyeoul
J^ tong
All the year
round
5L ^1 3J, X^ ch'youn ha
^ ^f Tf ^ch'you tong
56 COKE AN MANUAL.
Exercise XIV.
cli'o haro nal oasso kireisye itheul memeuresso
first day came on road two days waited
He arrived on the 1st having stopped two days on the road.
yekeuisye luyetcb'irei kasso naheurei kasso
here from how many days in f::one four days in gone
How long have you taken to go ? Four days.
3.
4.
a,ina tai yessai manei* toraokeisso
perhaps five six period will come back
I shall return perhaps in some 5 or G days.
poram houei oasso poram nal poasso
fortnight after came fifteenth day saw
He came after a fortnight and I saw }jim on the 15th.
kyeourei ch'ipko nyeramei tepta
winter-in cold-and summer-in is hot
It is cold in winter and hot in summer.
4*^1 ^JajI yl-k^] 7]-f4
pomei simeuko kaeurei ketv)unta
spring-in sow and autumn-in reap
You sow in spring and reap in autumn.
H| 7). <^:t] cj. ^ ^1 ^ 3.^-k
naika yekeui tasat hai memeuresso
I here five years have stayed
I have lived here five years.
. H i ^*1 t^ i-^ 7f4
toue nal houei han pen kou kyeng kacha
two-three days after one time sight seeing let us go
Let us go for a picnic in a few days.
* This would he equally well expressed by the use of 5l ^ ^t
a participial form of^ 'C\-to accomplish. Thus, aw « tai yessai toiyeya torao-
keisso.
METHOD OF RECKONING TIME 57
Exercise XY.
1 ^^ 7H ^Pl ^^Jl^ ^
onal kasye nai-il tora onera
to day ha\'ing gone to morrow come back
Go to day and come back to morrow.
keu ch'aik echyekkeui poasso
that book yesterday saw
I read that book yesterday.
3. ^^1 v} ^ oj. 6| -^A] J. or 3} M] ^ i-4 >t
hoan-syeina p'yen ani hasio koa-syei c'ual hasyesso
exchange-year may-be weU make past-year well have made?
A Happy New Year to you!
sin-kou-syeiei keuiouni ettesio
new-old-year-in strength how is
May all health and happiness be yours!
nohyengfcui erousinnei nyensyei myetch'isio
elder brother's father year-year how much is?
How old is your father?
^ 4 J. ^]_ 5|4^
ryouk sip o sj'ei toisyesso
sixty five years has accomplished
He is sixty five years of age.
keu aheui myet syel * inya yetalp syel mekesso
that boy how-many cakes is? eight cakes has eaten
How old is that boy? He is eight years old.
i tari k'eunya chyekeunya
this month is great? is small?
Are there 29 or 30 days in this month ?
5.
>9 is the name of a special form of cake eaten on New Year's Day. It has
passed into a famiHar formula for reckoning the age of inferiors or equals.
15
58
COKEAN MANUAL.
ADJECTIYES.
Adjectives are of two kinds : —
(i) Words that undergo no inflexion or modification. These are either
primarily nouns used adjectivally to qualify another noun, or true adjectives
derived from the Chinese. Thus —
4^a
soi keurat
An iron bason.
*1-
syang mal
Common speech.
(2) Words in which verb and adjective are combined and which are
conjugated exactly like ordinary verbs' — in fact which are true verbs. Thus
chyot'a means "I am good, thou art good, etc" for all persons, singular and
plural. The participial forms, however, supply the true adjective, and as such
always precede the nouns they qualify, whereas the predicate forms follow the
subject and close the phrase or sentence, as in the case of the verb. Thus —
chyoheun saram
A good man.
sarami chyot'a
The man is good.
Adjectives of this second class are capable of assuming all the modi-
fications, expressive of tense, mood, etc., proper to a regularly conjugated verb.
And of these some of the most important will be found in the appended tables
of conjugation : while other modifications, such as the conditional in myen, the
causal in nikka, etc., which are in constant use may be readily formed on the
model of the ordinary verb.
The two participles — known as the "verbal" and "adjective" participles —
are the ruling forms of the adjectival conjugation : and of these, as it is difficult
to give any rule of anything like universal application for their formation, a
selection of specimens is here given —
Present.
44
Verbal Participle. Adjective Participle.
kilta
7]^
chareuta ,^r VL
nelpta ^ (A
chopta ,^. 6l*
kire p^
challa ^L J^-
kin (long)
chareun (short)
nelpe ^ J^ nelpeun (broad)
chopa ,;^ ,^ chopeun (narrow)
ADJECTIVES.
59
Present.
Verbal Participle. Adjective Participle.
^^^
kipta
^J^
kiphe
y^t
kipbeim
(deep)
^^n
chyekta
^H
chyeke
^U
chyekeun
(small)
^^
neullcta
^H
neulke
^-gr
neulkeun
(old)
4^
ch'ata
4
ch'a
4
ch'an
(cold)
^^
tepta
t]4j
teoue
^1-S:
teoun
(hot)
^^
natta
v4
nacha
Vl
nachan
(low)
To the verbal participle we constantly find the enclitic particle sye
added in Corean colloquial — mainly for purposes of euphony. The sense- of the
simple participle remains practically unaltered, but there appears to be a certain
force in this enclitic corresponding to some extent with the English conjunctions,
since, as, etc. And when followed by the Postposition JsL ^n pout'e, from, the
Verbal Participle with the euphonic suffix sye is employed idiomatically to denote
the period from which a certain event or course of events dates — when we in
English should use a noun.
In common with ordinary verbs, these conjugated adjectives possess, in
addition to the regular adjective participle ending in n (e.g. ch'yoheun, k'eun, etc.),
a future adjective participle, which is formed by changing this final n into I
(e.g. ch'yoheul, k'eul, etc.) This form is generally, though not invariably, used
where a comparative sense is required, and then gives a meaning corresponding
to the Enghsh idiom "could there be" (if interrogative), or (if affirmative) "there
could not be".
60
COEEAN MANUAL.
CONJUGATION OF ADJECTIVES.
Present
:£4
chyot'a
I am good, thou art good,
„ (polite)
s>fe
chyoso
he is good, we are good, etc.
Pa3t
j&f
^
chyohatta
I was good etc.
Future
S^l^
chyok'eitta
I shall be good etc.
Interrogative
^^
^
chyobeunya
„ (polite)
^a:
ff
chyoso
■am I good etc.
Participle verbal
Je4
chyoha
good
„ adjective
s.t
chyobeun
good
„ adverb
cbyohi
chyok'ei j
■good, well
Substantive
chyok'i
chyobeum
-goodness
Present
„ (polit«)
k'euta
k'euo
[ am great, etc.
Past
H^
k'etta
I was great, etc.
Future
3Lf>l
-^
k'eukeitta
I shall be great, etc.
Interrogative
„ (polite)
3L^
k'eunya
k'euo
.am I great, etc.
Participle verbal
^
k'e
great
„ adjective
^
k'eun
great
„ adverb
^»]
k'eukei |
^eatly
Substantive
^7j
k'euki {
greatness
ADJEC
TIYEQ.
61
^^
nopta
>I amhigb, etc.
....,
^^
nopso
)
Past
^IW
nopbatta
I was bigh, etc.
Future
^el'^
nopkeitta
I sball be higb, etc.
Interrogative
^si^
nopheunya
'am I high, etc.
„ (polite)
^^
nopso
Participle verbal
^4
nopha
high
,, adjective
^^
nopbeun
high
„ adverb
^^1
nophi
[high
)) j>
^^1
nopkei
)
Substantive
^7]
nopki
height
Present
^^^
nerata
■ I am broad, etc.
„ (polite)
^ %^
nerao
,
Past
ii^
nelletta
I was broad, etc.
Future
vjeTgof
nerakeitta
I shall be broad, etc.
Interrogative
V|S V|:
neranya
^am I broad, etc.
,, (polite)
^ 2-S.
nerao
.
Participle verbal
i^
nelle
broad
,, adjective
v| t
neran
broad
,, adverb
^ ^^)
nerakei
broadly
Substantive
•171
nelki
(breadth (but generally
neljiki from nelpta)
16
G2
COEEAN MANUAL.
Present
„ (polite)
cb'ipta
ch'ipso
-I am cold, etc.
Past
Future
cb'iouetta
ch'ipkeitta
I was cold, etc.
I shall be cold, etc.
Interrogative
„ (polite)
ch'iounya
ch'ipso
•am I cold, etc.
Participle verbal
-1^
ch'ioue
cold
,, adjective
^1^
ch'ioun
cold
,, adverb
^J^]
ch'ipkei
coldly
Substantive
-J 71
ch'ipki
ch'ioum
V coldness
Present
„ (polite)
:a44
chyoch'ant'a
chyoch'anso
J am bad, etc.
j
Past
:s41K
chyoch'anhatta I was bad, etc.
Future
ja^^'^-
chyoch'ank'eitta I shall be bad etc.
Interrogative
„ (polite)
chyoch'anheunya
chyoch'anso
■am I bad etc.
Participle verbal
ic^^f
chyoch'anha
bad
,, adjective
5:4^
chyoch'anheun bad
,, adverb
Substantive
s4^1
chyoch'ank'ei
chyoch'anhi
chyoch'ank'i
^
badly
badness
ADJECTIVES.
63
Present
„ (polite)
Past
Future
Interrogative
„ (polite)
Part, verbal
,, adjective
,, adverb
) > >>
Substantive
2L
^7]
aramtapta
aramtapso
)-I am lovely, etc.
aramtaoatta I was lovely, etc.
aramtapkeitta I shall be lovely, etc.
aramtaounya | tit i.
•' ^am I lovely, etc
^l-l'^-^
aramtapso
aramtaoa
aramtaon
aramtapki
aramtai
aramtapki
aramtaom
J
lovely
lovely
V lovely
loveliness
Present ^ ^ ^^^
„ (polite) >^ ij 4: ^ ^
sarangseurepta
sarangseurepso
1 am amiable, etc.
Past ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
Future >^ ^ 4- ^ ^
Interrogative ^ i2}- >^ "^ J5-
„ (polite) >^ ^ >ii ^ J:
Part, verbal >t ^ ^ ^ 4]
„ adjective^ ^^ ^ -^
„ adverb >^ ^ ^ ^ ^|
Substantive >t ^ ^ ^ 7]
I „ , >t f ^ ^ -I-
^ sarangseureouetta I was amiable, etc.
rt sarangseurepkeitta I shall be amiable.
V^ sarangseureounya 1 ^ j amiable, etc.
sarangseurepso J
sarangseureoue
sarangseureon
amiable
amiable
sarangseurei Umiably
sarangseurepkei J
sarangseurepki I. ^^^i^^nity
sarangseureom
64 COEEAN MANUAL.
2.
8.
Exercise XYI.
7a ^y-h 317^ 7lx^
kin nokkeun nokkeun kilta
A long string. The string is long.
^14 v^oi y]z] ^1 ^^^^
nelp'an nenie kire chal mos-sseukeitta
board too long well not-will use
The board is too long and won't do.
chareuQ ch'amtai ch'anita,i chareuta
A short bamboo. The bamboo is short.
totchari challa mot kkalkeitta
mat short not will spread
The mat is too short to cover (the floor).
nelpeun pat patch'i nelpta
A broad field. The field is broad.
kiri nelpe tanniki ciiyot'a
road broad travelling is good
The road is broad and good for walking.
chopeun pa^ig pangi chopta
A narrow room. The room is narrow.
^,| ^o\5l 4 °1^| >3?£t>|.
pai chopato chim manhi sitnanta
boat narrow though load many load
The boat though narrow can carry a large load.
ADJECTIVES.
65
3.
4.
5.
Exercise XYII.
kipheun moul
Deep water.
^ ^1 7J t^
mouri kipta
The water is deep.
kaug mouri kiphe pai dial kakeitta
river water deep boat well will go
The river is deep and the boat can easily go.
neulkeun kyeichip
An old woman.
kyeichipi neulkta
The woman is old.
keu sarami neulke
that man old
hangsyang alnanta
always sick
That man is old and always ailing,
kipheumyen haingsyenhaki souipta
mouri
water if deep navigation is easy
If the water be deep the navigation is easy.
nari
day
ch'ioumyen chyangchak kapsi pis-ssata
if cold firewood price is dear
If the weather be cold firewood is dear.
^
^^
^^t
I*)
nyerami neme teoumyen
summer too if hot
If the summer be too hot sickness will be prevalent.
,^6|
pyengi
sickness
°I4
mant'a
is many
keu namou chyekeumyen taran ket patkoa onera
that wood if small other thing changed come
If that wood be too small exchange it for another piece.
17
66 COEEAN MANUAL.
2.
Exercise XYIII.
^6| t^^^^ 7f7] ^n^
nari teoue-sye kaki eryepta
day hot going is difficult
travelling is difficult in this warm weather.
keu moul kiphe-sye chal mot kenne ka
that water deep well not across go
The water is too deep for crossing.
keu saram erye-sye-pout'e kongpou hayesso
that man young-from work has made
He has been a student from his earliest years.
keu neulkeun-i * chyelme-sye-pout'e pyeng teuresso
that aged young-from sickness entered
That old man has been ailing from his youth.
nal teoue-sye-pout'e momi chom natta
day hot-(euph) from body little is convalescent
I am in better health since the warm weather.
echei etoue-sye-pout'e pi sichakhayesso
yesterday dark-from rain began
It began to rain at dusk yesterday.
te chyoheul pepi innanya te chyoheul pepi epso
more good (future) law is ? more good (future) law is not
Could there be a better law? There could not be a better law.
^ ^ ^J^l ^vt t:^ vj.^ ^
te k'eul chipi epso pyello naheul ket epso
more high (future) house is not specially superior (future) thing is not
There could not be a bigger house. There could be nothing better.
6.
* The i converts the adjective participle into a noun, being in fact
the nominative case inflexion.
ADJECTR^S. 67
COMPABISON OF ADJECTIVES.
The Comparative degree is rendered by —
(1) ^ ^r°^ jL ^poi(i or potem, than, placed as a suffix directly after
the object with which comparison is made. These suffixes are some-
times used in conjunction with the particles te and tel.
(-•) "Ol ^c, niore, or ^ tcl less, which are placed immediately preceding the
adjective. In negative sentences constructed with these particles, the
object v/itli which comparison is made generally appears in the ablative
case (ending in eisye) , — more however for the sake of euphony than from
any requirements of Corean syntax.
(3) t^ _5uor ^ ,5^toroli or t'orok, more, joined as a suffix to the stem
of the verb, which is formed by dropping the final ta of the present
tense. Where the present tense has the aspirated termination t'a, t'orok
is used. It should be noted that these suffixes are also used as post-posi-
tions with the sense of iintiL
(4) ^ S^sarol:, more, is used as a suffix in conjunction with the future
participle (ending in I) of both verbs and adjectives, and is not unfrequently
followed by the comparative particle te or teok.
The Sitperljtive degree is rendered by prefixing to the adjective adverbs of
inteusity such as the following —
HJ .^??iaiou, very;
Oi. ^achou, entirely;
jO. ^1 koahi, excessively;
^ ^kachang, greatly;
neme
and paiticularly and most emphatically by the use of the Chinese ordinal
numeral t^l ^\ chyei il, first.
68 COEEAN MANUAL.
2.
3.
4.
Exercise XIX.
6] >i a >^}^^ ^^
i san keu san pota nopta
this hill that hill than is high
This hill is higher than that.
*] 4) JX 4)JL^ ^^
i ch'aik keu ch'aik potem natta
this book that book than is superior
This book is better than that
keu kyeichipi te myohata
that woman more is beautiful
That woman is prettier.
keu mar-eun tel saonapta
that horse-as-for less is fierce
That horse is not so vicious.
i moureun syeoul moul potem te chyot'a
this water-as-for Syeoul water than more is good
This is better than the water in Seoul.
6.
i syouri keu syour-eisye te chyoheun ket epta
this wine that wine-from more good thing is not
This wine is no better than the other.
6) ^J; a t^H ^ ^^ ^ ^ "^^
i k'al keu k'ar-eisye te chal teul ket epta
this knife that knife-from more sharp thing is not
This knife is no sharper than the other.
i kiri chye kil potem te katkaon kirinya
this road that road than more near road is ?
Is this road shorter than that one?
ADJECTIVES. 69
1.
0.
6.
Exercise XX.
man-t'orok chyot'a manheul-sarok chyot'a
many-more is good many-more is good
The more the better.
kapsi nouk-torok mitchinta noukeul-sarok mitcbinta
price cheap-more lose money cheap-more lose money
The cheaper the price the more I lose.
kil kal-sarok te hemhata
road going-more more is precipitous
The more (we) go, the worse the road.
chaimoul mohol-sarok t'amhata
money collecting-more covet
The more he gets, the more he wants.
po-torok sarangsenrepta
see-more is lovable
The more I see him, the more I love him.
chou-torok tallftnta choul-sarok tallanta
give-more he demands gi\'ing-more he demands
The more I give the more he wants.
neulk-torok ken pereussi itta
aged-mitil that habit is
He maintains that habit all his life.
4IJ.4 t 1*1
ch'youi-t'orok syoul meke
dmnk-until wine drinks
He drinks until he is drunk.
18
70
COREAN MANUAL.
2.
1
this
6.
7.
a
Exercise XXI.
1
this
keu
that
eumsik-eun f
food-as-for
This food
3-^] ^]-^ :£4
13
>;
massi
taste
has the best
6
maiou
very
flavour.
chyot'a
is good
^^
chip jekeni-sye ch'yaksiri melta
house here-from truly is far
That house is a good distance from here.
6^ ;«) 7> c4] %
echei-ka chyei-il ch'ioun
yesterday first cold
Yesterday was the coldest day.
^]^ t *l Ji.
nari-o
daj'-is
4^1 ^^ ^<&^y}
koahi k'e-sye mos-sseukeitta
exceedingly big not will use
it won't do if it is too big.
tarn te nopk'ei ssamyen ton manhi mekkeitnanya
wall more highly if build money much will eat?
If I build this wall higher will it cost much?
ton
money
haika
sun
^
^51 T^V^
4^1 ot^l «]^)oJ.J:
koahi manhi mek-chianso
excessively much eat-not
It will not cost so very much.
chi torok mouet hayetnanya
set until what have done ?
What have you been doing all day ?
chyongil kongpou * hayesso
all day labour have made
I have been studying all day.
f etm, the oppositive case ending has a restrictive force and indicates
one kind of food out of many supposed to be present before the eyes of the speaker,
* Jcong pou is a word derived from the Chinese, meaning labour generally:
but in Corean the meaning has become restricted to study, as being the only
kind of labour to which a native gentleman would condescend to devote himself.
VEKBS. 71
YEBBS.
The most characteristic feature of the Corean language is the complex
mass of inflection and agghitination whereby the verb is modified to express
time, mood, condition, co-ordination and subordina,tion, interrogation, official
rank, etc. — in short almost every var^nng shade of thought or action. Elnow-
ledge of the verb — and in this has to be included the adjective, which in Corean
combines (as we have seen) the adjective proper with the verb "to be" — implies
a thorough acquaintance with all the intricacies of the Corean language both
in etjTnologj' and s}Titax.
Even the ordinary Conjunction constitutes part of the verb inflexion,
modifying and appended as a suffix to the different tenses. Many of these
socalled Conjunctions are used merely as marks to indicate the breaks or divisions
in the sentence — a function fulfilled in English by our system of pimctuation.
Their correct employment presents one chief difficulty of the Corean language
and involves a close study of the colloquial, especially as these "punctuation
conjunctions" are frequently meaningless in themselves and are only inserted
for euphony as connecimg hnks between the different parts of a sentence.
Verb modifications may be divided into two categories : —
(1) Simple inflexions — i.e. agglutinations v/hose original meanings as
such have early disappeared and which are now found only incorporated into
and forming part of, the verb itself, as aids to the expression of differences of
tense, mood, etc. ;
(2) Agglutinations properly socalled, i.e. words expressing independent
ideas and added as suffixes to the verb stem while retaining their original meaning,
to supply deficiencies in the Corean vocabulary.
In the present, past, and future tenses the inflexions are regular and
simple. An equal regularity marks the participial formations so much used in
Corean colloquial. The verbal participle is always foimd ending in a or c in
accordance with the requirements of euphony ; and the law is that with the
two long and strong vowels a and o in the stem, the strong a closes the parti-
ciple ; while with other vowels and diphthongs and also with a short o in the
stem, the weak vowel e marks the participle ending. This verbal participle is
an ever recurring form of the verb inflexion, ha\-ing in addition to its orioinal
signification and use as a participle, the Vvddest possible range both in meaning'
and in application. It appears as an imperative, is fi-equently substituted for
the present, past and other tenses ; and can as a general rule supply every
requirement of Corean colloquial, being at all times and in all connexions clear
and easily understood.
72 COEEAN MANUAL.
All division of the Corean verb into tense, mood, participle or voiee
is purely arbitrary and conventional. On the part of native scholars and students
no attempt has ever been made to reduce their vernacular to any grammatical
system or to formulate any vocabulary of the language beyond the Ok P'yen —
a coinpilation intended to facilitate the correct pronunciation, and to expound
the meanings, of the Chinese characters.
Grouping the verbal terminations for inflexion and agglutination under
their allied and cognate forms, four diifsrent conjugations may be evolved : — •
(1) A series of endings in ta, which may be legitimately termed
the "ordinary" conjugation, presenting as it does the primary form from which
the principal modifications may be constructed. In colloquial use this conjuga-
tion is employed in addressing inferiors in rank, or informally in current con-
versation amongst equals.
(2) A series of endings in nya which constitute the interrogative form
corresponding with the "ordinary" conjugation.
(3) A series of endings in o and so which Coreans employ when they
address equals or superiors and which may be designated the "polite" conjugation.
(4) A series of agglutinations added to the verb stem of the various
tense inflexions to express condition, time, manner, co-ordination, subordination,
etc. i.e. agglutinations which have very often the force and use of mere con-
junctions. This may be aptly termed the "conjunction conjugation". And it
is this conj ugation in particular the acquisition of which will require the serious
attention of the student of the language.
The present tense of the "ordinary" conjugation shows two forms ; —
(1) The ending in ta (or t'a where the verbaJ participle is aspirated) ;
(2) The ending in nta. This latter ia the correct inflexion with a noun
or pronoun as subject to the verb, either expressed or understood. On the
other hand ta (or fa) is employed in a general sense irrespective of any definite
subject and much in the same way as we resort to the infinitive ("to make" etc.)
where we wish to refer to the verb generally. In short ta (or t'a) implies general,
while nta implies specific predication of the verb's action. But under the Corean
verb there falls to be included the part of speech known in English as the adjective,
and with these "adjective verbs," as they may very properly be designated, the
use of ta and nta is reversed. Thus ta is the regular inflexion for predication
in the present tense while the form nto, which is found only in certain words,
produces a new sense and meaning. For instance in the phrase "7ial palkta"
we have the signification "the day is clear," but in "nal palknanta, "the day is
clearing up".
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS,
73
The past tense is formed by adding tia to the verbal participle; while the
future is made by substituting keitta {Jc'eitta in the case of aspirated stems) for
ta of the first form of the present tense. This becomes Jckeitta in the few verbg
where this present tense end in tta.
Inflected to express time, mood, condition and endless shades of meaning
as regards action, the Corean verb possesses no distinction for person or number
and one form stands for the singular and plural including all persons, first,
second and third. Coreans as a rule avoid having recourse to pronouns, and
the person and number must consequently be inferred from the context especially
in the colloquial.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS,
Section l.—OBDINABY CONJUGATION.
'S ^\ hata, I make (I speak).
Indicative Present
t> >>
Past
„ Future
Imperative
Belative Participle
Present
il make, thou makest,
he makes, we make, etc.
^ X "^^^y^^^^ I made, etc.
"^ TJj PJL hakeitta I shall make, etc.
^ ^ ^hayera make.
t4
hacha let us make.
^
%
^
^
^
hanan m*king.
ban made.
h&l about to make,
haten made.
Past
,, Future
,, Imperfect -^ C^
„ Perfect 'S' ^ ^1 ^ayetten made.
Verbal Participle -g^ e)^ "" haye \
^ ti M hayesye fbaving made.
* haija is c(,n irregular form occasionally heard in Coreaia colloquial.
19
14:
COKEAIn
[ MANU^
lL.
yy Cl kata, I go.
Indicative Present
y}^
kata
■ I go, thou goest, etc.
»> »>
^'i^
kanta
„ Past
yJt^
katta
I went, etc.
„ Future
7I7JI Clkakeitta
I shall go, etc.
Imperative
7>
ka
• go.
))
y\ i] ?|-kakera
>>
7)-4
kacha
let us go.
Eel. Part. Present
yy's.
kanan
going.
„ Past
^i
kan
gone.
„ Future
t
kal
about to go.
,, Imperfect
7f^
katen
gone.
,, Perfect
^'i
katten
gone.
Verbal Participle
:^>
ka
. having gone.
•» >>
7H
kasye
^
0 Cl Ota, I come.
Indicative Present
±t\
ota
' I come, thou comest, etc.
»i »»
^^
onta
Past
^^
oatta
'J. came, etc.
„ Future
i^ ^ 'Clokeitta
I shall come etc.
Imperative
4
oa
'Come.
ft
J, ^ jl^onera
it
^4
ocha
let us come.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
75
Rel. Part. Present ^ ^
„ Past J^
„ Future •§•
„ Imperfect JJL p)
., Perfect ^ t^
Verbal Participle $, ,
onan coming.
on come.
ol about to «ome.
oten come.
oatten come.
> having come,
oasye j
6| 'Cl itta, I am, I
Indicative Present
Past
,, Future
Imperative
have.
Bel. Part. Present
„ Past
„ Future
„ Imperfect
„ Perfect
Verbal Participle
*I4
itta I am or have, thou art or hast, etc.
6| >M Cl- issetta I was, or had, etc.
6^ 7?| Cl itkeitta I shall be, or shall have, etc,
be, or have.
r ^1 ^issera
6
5!4
5!4
itcha
innan
issan
issal
6| ^ itten
<i\ jA ^ issetten
2^1
isse
6) Xl /A issesye
let us be or let us have,
being or having,
been or had.
about to be or to have,
been or had.
been or had.
having been.
7G
COEEAN MANUAL.
CH pL epta, I am not, or I have not.
Indicative Present
^ XX epta
I have or am not, etc.
„ Past
6j a] Clepsetta
I had or was not, etc.
,, Future
(A 7^1 pLepkeitta
I shall not have or be, etc
Imperative
(not in use).
Bel. Part. Present
(A y^ emnan
not having or being.
„ Past
^ >^ epsan
not had or been.
,, Future
,, Imperfect
6* >^ epsal
61 xA epten
about not to have or be.
not had or been.
,, Perfect
Verbal Participle
6* >A"i ^ epsetten
^ ><-! epse )
6j /A /^ epsesye
not had or been.
not having been or
not ha\nng had.
^ pL pota, I see.
Indicative Present
Past
„ Future
^ tl pota )
\jf ^ Clpokeitta
I see etc.
I saw etc.
I shall see etc
Imperative
see.
let us see.
CONJUGATION OF \T^RBS.
77
Eel. Part. Present
^ ^ ponan
seeing.
Past
^ pon
seen.
„ Puture
4 p°'
about to see.
„ Imperfect
3- ^ poteu
seen.
„ Perfect
>j. 6^ pi poatten
seen.
Verbal Participle
i 6V>^ poasye ]
having seen.
>^ Ci* sseuta, I use, or I write.
Indicative Present
Past
„ Future
Imperative
Eel. Part. Present ^«^ Jr
„ Past <^
Future <^
Imperfect ^«^ p|
Perfect >^ p|
Verbal Participle ■^"j
>^ Pi. sseuta
ti^ Cl- sseunta
'^^.'f "Cl ssetta
>«^ 7^1 "W- sseukeitta
^H ^1. seera
sseucha
sseunan
sseun
sseul
sseuten
ssetten
sse
ssesye j
I use or write, etc.
I used or wrote, etc.
I shall use or write, etc.
use, or write,
let us use or write,
using or writing.
used or written,
about to use or write,
used or written,
used or written.
having used or written,
20
78
COKEAN MANUAIi.
Jcl ^ ch'ita, I strike.
Indicative Present
>14
cli'ita
- I strike, etc.
>> >>
>d^
ch'inta
-
„ Past
^'^
ch'yetta
y I struck, etc.
J, Future
3^1 ;?0 Clch'ikeitta I shall strike, etc.
Imperative
^^
ch'yera
strike.
»>
^14
ch'ioha
let us strike.
Rel. Part. Present
^]^
ch'inan
striking.
„ Paat
-1
ch'in
struck.
„ Future
4
ch'il
about to strike.
„ Imperfeet ^1 C^
ch'iten
struck.
,, Perfect
^^
ch'yetton struck.
Terbal Participle
-^
ch'ye
' having struck.
t*
^^
ch'yesye
yk XX. chouta, I give.
Indicative Present ^ t^ chouta. I j ^-^^^ ^^^
^X\ chounta)
P t ^ ^ 'Clchouetta I gave, etc.
Future ^ ^ r^choukeitta I shall give, etc.
Imperative ^ ^ ^.houera give.
^4
choucha let us give.
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
Eel. Part. Present ^ JT
ciaoiinan
giving.
Past ^
choun
given.
„ Future -^
choul
about to give.
„ Imperfect ^. C^
chouten
given.
Perfect ^ ^ t
^ chouetten
given.
Verbal Participle ,^ 6-J
choue
' having given.
^ 64 yj chouesye
nj 4
mekta, I eat.
Indicative Present ^ Pi- mekta
„ „ tsj ^ X;|.meknanta
^, Past tJj 64 -ctmeketta
„ Future Vi J^ CLmekkeitta
Imperative
«j 6^Sf
mekora
1 4
Eel. Part. Present
Past
„ Future
„ Imperfect X^j p|
Perfect Vl ^ t^ meketten
Verbal Participle Vi 6l meke
mekesye
P?
n ^
^^4
^^4
mekcha
meknan
raekeun
mekeul
mekten
^6^/^
I eat, etc.
I ate, etc.
I shall eat, etc.
eat.
let us eat.
eating.
eaten.
about to eat.
eaten.
eaten.
having eaten.
08
COEEAN MANUAL.
yX pL chapta, I catch.
Indicative Present >^ ' Cj. cliapta j
" ' II catch, etc.
Past
Future
^' }T X\ chamnanta j
■^ ' jt ^r chapatta
^ • 7j| ^ chapkeitta
V* ^r iM-chapara
chapcha
Imperative
Eel. Part. Present >^ JT
„ Past 4 4
„ Future ;^ ^
.,, Imperfect >^ Pl
,, Perfect ^^ 6|. p| chapatten
Verbal Participle >^ 61. chapa
charanan
chapeun
chapeul
chapten
I caught, etc.
I shall catch, etc.
catch.
let us catch.
catching.
caught.
about to catch.
caught.
caught.
having caught.
'-§• "Cl- oulta, I WBex) er cry.
lufdicative Present
j> >>
Past
,, Future
-^ "Ci. oulta
w- "Ci- ounta
,S- t^ "Ci. ouretta
-$• tA "Cl oulkeitta
- I weep or cry, etc.
I wept or cried, etc.
I shall weep or cry, etc
Imperative
>>
^^ 1/ ^om-era
-$• ^L oulcha
weep or cry.
let us weep or cry.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
81
Bel. Part. Present
Past
„ Future
,, Imperfect
„ Perfect
Verbal Participle
^^ xX' nott'a, I release.
Indicative Present
Past
Future
Imperative
Bel. Part, Present
Past
„ Future
,, Imperfect
„ Perfect
Verbal Participle
^^
ounan
weeping.
^
oun
wept.
^
oul
about to weep
"k^
oulten
wept.
^t^
ouretten
wept.
^'A
^^^
oure
ouresye
} having wept.
2Xm x^ nott'a
^X' ^ Cl-nonnanta
JC "^r Clnohatta
^tA ^notk'eitta
nohara
notch'a
nonnan
noheun
noheul
nott'en
^^
J^ "61. Cl nohatten
Vf^ "51. noha
Jjl 'Si^^ nohasye
I release, etc.
I released, etc.
I shall release.
release.
let us release.
releasing.
released.
about to release.
released.
released.
"having released.
21
82
COREAN MANUAL.
.^fl Cl ssitta, I v/ash.
Indicative Present
Past
Future
Imperative
.^M 'C\' ssitta
^1 V i^^ssinnanta
-^ /^ Cvesissetta
>^ tA T^saitkeitta
>^ Xt ^Lssisse»a
^J j^L ssitcha
Eel. Part. Present
,, Past
Future
ssmnan
ssissan
ssissal
^^
,, Imperfect .^« p| ssitteu washed
,, Perfect >^ >^ C?] ssissetten washed
Verbal Participle ^^A >^"j ssisse
„ „ aA /A JA ssissesye j
I wash, etc.
I washed, etc.
I shall wash, etc.
wash.
let us wash.
washincf.
washed,
about to v/ash.
having washed.
7I ^ 1^ "rt kitarita, I wait.
Indicative
e Present
>>
)>
>i
Past
>>
Future
Imperative
kitarita
kitarinta
1
{-I wait, etc.
J
'll ^ 54 X\ kitaryetta I waited, etc.
'yl "O Si ^I C-i. kitarikeitta I shall wait, etc.
7l ^ ^ ^f kitaryera wait.
■7I tS 3| ^\ kitaricha let us wait.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
83
Rel. Part. Present y] "O 21 ^ kitarinan
Past 71 ^ ^ kitarin
,, Future y\ ^ ^ kitaril
,, Imperfect 7| '^ ^ ^ kitariten
Perfect 7] ^ ^ ^ kitaryetten
Verbal Participle -^l XS ^ kitarye
waiting,
waited.
about to wait,
waited,
waited.
havinc: waited.
CCL antta, I sit.
Indicative Present
<i«l-
antta
.- I sit, etc.
>> >>
it^^
annanta
J
„ Past
^i^^
ancbyetta
I sat, etc.
„ Future
0^77]]^
ankkeitta
I sball sit, etc,
Imperative
1i^^
ancbyera
sit.
>>
'd^
anchcba
let us sit.
E^l. Part. Present
<»ife
annan
sitting.
Past
<i^
ancbeun
sat.
,, Future
'i^
ancheul
about to sit.
,, Imperfect
6|.«j
antten
sat.
Perfect
'it^'a
anchyetten
sat.
Verbal Participle
'^J:^
ancbye
■baving sat.
>> >'
^J:^^
ancbyegye
'
84
COEEAN MANUAL.
^ "Ci- alta, I know.
Indicative Present
»» >>
alta
anta
•
I know, etc.
„ Past
^3^^^
aratta
I knew, etc.
„ Future
"i^^
alkeitta
I shall know, etc,
Imperative
t*K
arara
know.
>>
t4
alcha
let us know.
Kel. Part. Present
4^
an an
knowing.
„ Past
'i
an
known.
Future
t
al
about to know.
„ Imperfect
U'd
alten
known.
,, Perfect
"l^^'d
aratten
know.
Verbal Participle
6J.0V
ara *
1
having known.
>> »>
t**H
arasye
J
■O ^ Vl morota, I know not.
Indicative Present JL 5. ^ '»<"^<"* 1 i know not, etc.
a ^ -CJ. moronta )
>» >»
Past -§• vj- "Cl mollatta I knew not, etc.
Future ^ "^ 7^] "Cl morokeitta I shall not know, etc.
Imperative (not in use).
* ara is also used colloquially for "J know" and *'do you knoto", etc.
1
CONJUGATION OF \T:RBS.
85
Eel. Part. Present
,2. ^ Jf moronan
knowing not.
,, Past
^ ^ moron
unknown.
„ Future
J3. ^ morol
about to know not.
„ Imperfect
,, Perfect
^ ^ p| moroten
J^ xX- t^ mollatten
unknown,
unknown.
Verbal Participle
-2* vL molla *
not ha\ing known.
Section 2.— POLITE CONJUGATION.
Tbis conjugation is that most in use imperatively, affirmatively and
interrogatively, ^\^len used interrogatively the sound of the final o is prolonged
and emphasised.
hao
hayesso
hakeisso
kao
kasso
kakeisso
o
oasso
okeisso
make {imperative) ; I make, do I make?
I have made, have I made ?
I shall make, shall I make ?
go ; I go, do I go ?
I have gone, have I gone ?
I shall go, shall I go ?
come ; I come, do I come ?
I have come, have I come ?
I shall come, shall I come ?
* molla is also used colloquially for "IJinotc not" ''do you hnoio not" etc.
Note. — The future, alJceitta and morolieitta (as also the forms alkeisso
and morokeisso of the polite conjugation) are frequently used for the present tense,
I know and / do not know.
22
86
COKE AN MANUAL.
5! 4^
ISSO
issesso
itkeisso
epso
epsesso
epkcisso
poo
poasso
pokeisso
cli'io
ch'yesso
ch'ikeisso
chouo
chouesso
choukeisso
mekso
mekesso
mekkeisso
chap so
chapasso
chapkeisso
nosso
iiobasso
nok'cisso
be ; I am or have, am or have I ?
I was or had, was or had I ?
I shall be or have, shall I be or have ?
I am or have not, am or have I not ?
I v/as or had not, was or had I not ?
I shall not be or have, shall I not be
or have ?
look ; I look, do I look ?
I have looked, have I looked ?
I shall look, shall I look ?
strike ; I strike, do I strike ?
I have struck, have I struck ?
I shall strike, shall I strike ?
give; I give, do I give?
I have given, have I given ?
I shall give, shall I give ?
eat ; I eat, do I eat ?
I have eaten, have I eaten ?
I shall eat, shall I eat ?
seize, I seize, do I seize ?
I have seized, have I seized ?
I shall seize, shall I seize ?
release ; I release, do I release ?
I have released, have I released ?
I shall release, shall I release ?
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
87
^>fc
ssisso
wash ; I wash, do I wash ?
4S4^
ssissesso
I have washed, have I washed ?
^^^
ssitkeisso
I shall wash, shall I wash ?
y] ^^
^
kitario
wait ; I wait, do I wait ?
7] ^5
di
kitaryesso
I have waited, have I waited ?
7]^^ ^^
kitarikeisso
I shall wait, shall I wait ?
ansso
ancheuo
sit ; I sit, do I sit'?
<i^^
anchyesso
I have sat, have I sat ?
^i^U
ankkeisso
I shall sit, shall I sit ?
ao
alchio
'know ; I know, do I know?
arasso
I have known, have I known ?
1:5!^
t
alkeisso
I shall know, shall I know ?
The "polite" Imperative, first person plural, is formed by substituting
psyeita for the final n of the Past Eelative Participle, thus —
hata
t
han
hapsyeita
Let us make
kata
7i
kan
y}^\ ^
kapsyeita
Let us go
JL4
pota
4
pon
popyseita
Let us see
mekta
mckemi
makeup syeita
Let us eat
COEEAN MANUAL.
6J.W}.
antta
ssitta
ancheuii
ancbeupsyeita
ssissan ssissapsyeita
Let us sit
Let us wash
A very common and more markedly courteous form of the PoHte
Conjugation is that which ends in sio in the Present Indicative. This is formed
from the Past Eelative Participle by substituting the termination sio for the
final n, and may be used affirmatively, interrogatively, or imperatively in speaking
of or to ones superiors in rank. Where used as an Imperative, the force of
sio corresponds exactly to our English word "please": —
hata
pota
^^
chouta
antta
han
pon
choun
ancheun
hasio
Please make, do you
make ? He makes, etc.
I) a] 6 Please see, do you see ?
,^•^1 ,Ju He sees, etc.
posio
^^ » 1 A Please give, do you give ?
■^ ""^l "-^ He gives, etc.
chousio
iX — — I J» He sits, etc.
ancheusio
This form of the Polite Conjugation extends through nearly all moods
and tenses. Thus we find posesso, posikeisso, posimyen, posin, etc., for poasso,
pokeisso, pomyen, pon, etc.
Another "polite" form of the present Indicative is that which ends in
cfiio, this termination being substituted for the final ta of the present tense in
the "ordinary" Conjugation. When used with the first or third person it has
an affirmative, with the second person always an interrogative, sense : —
hata
kata
hachio
kachio
I make, he makes, we make,
they make, do you make ?
I go, he goes, we go, they
go, do you go?
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 89
Ota ochio
I come, he comes, we come,
they come, do you come ?
2^ ^1 2X, 5tl A ■'- release, he releases, we release,
^^ r y^ I -J^ they release, do you release?
nott'a notch'io
N.B. — The termination is aspirated thus — ch'io, in the case of verbs ending
in aspirated t'a in the present tense of the Ordinary Conjugation.
Inferiors, addressing their superiors and wishing to be exceedingly polite,
use the conjugation ending in pnaita, opnaita, sapnaita, saopnaita, for the first
or third person singular or plural. This is read mnaita, etc., according to the
requirements of Corean euphony, and is formed —
either (1) by substituting pnaita for the final n of the
Past Relative Participle: —
hata
ban
-g- ^1 pi i maKe, ne maKes, we
^ '•) }" make, they make,
hamnaita
7}^
kata
kan
^4 ^1 r they go.
kamnaita
mekta
mekeun
mekeumnaita I eat, etc.
4^
chapta
chapeun
chapeumnaita I seize, etc.
^14
antta
6L^
ancheuu
ancheumnaita I sit, etc.
or (2) by substitutinc
I opnaita for the final ta of the Present In-
dicative where
the termination is immediately preceded by a
vowel : —
bata
haomnaita I make, etc.
kata
kaomnaita I go, etc.
23
90 COIIEAN MANUAL.
or (8) by substituting sapnaita or saopnaita for the final ta of tbe
Present Indicative where a consonant, k, I, in, n, p ort closes
the syllable immediately preceding the termination : —
luckta meksamnaita meksaomnaita
^J el ^1 ^ ^ Zt 6» >- JL U t+ Ilose,welose,heloses,
en* 4 tJ N M e ^ U "I I they lose,
ilt'a ilsamnaita ilsaomnaita
^4 t^^l4 ^^^"-^^
tamla tamsamnaita tamsaomnaita
I fill, we fill, he fills,
they fill.
dXxX 6iy^ U Cl 6l->t -^V-l Cl I embrace, we embrace
\L \ U. tl ^1 r U. ^ U /*! r he embraces, etc.
anta ansamnaita ansaomnaita
vf r ^ t3 i r ^ ^ H N V seizes, they seize.
chapi a chapsamnaita chapsaomnaita
A tl J^ ^ xA Ct Jl} J^ JL yJ Cl I, l^f^cl, we load, he
Oi *^r ^< \i ^1 *^r Oi "^ « "I r loads, they load,
sitta sissamnaita sissaomnaita
Similarly sapnaita and saopnaita are substituted for the final ta of the
Indicative Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation. Thus —
hayetta hayessamnaita hayessaomnaita
■t ^ '^ ^ ^1/%^]^ -f >3 .>^ 1.^1 4' et" "''"•
hakeitta hakeissamnaita hakeissaomnaita
'^ 51 4 '^ 5J ^ ^1 4 '^ 5! >* -i- ^1 -^^ ^'«' «'-
mol.etta mekessamnaita mekessaomnaita
^ ^ ^ ^ 7j| >§ V| t^ "^ ^^ ^^"^^ shall eat, etc.
mekkeitta mekkeissamnaita • mekkeissaomnaita
^4 ^ ^- V) 4 ^^ ^ v) 4 I came, etc.
oatta oassamnaita oassaomnaita
JL794 -^^^^)4 J:^>*4v)'^etc*^"^°""''
okeitta okcissamnaita okeissaomnaita
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
91
Section S.—INTEEEOGATIVE CONJUGATION.
In addition to the Interrogative of the Pohte Conjugation ending in o
and so, which is used betv>"een equals in social and official rank, or towards
superiors, in ordinary conversation, the Corean verb possesses a separate conjugation
for addressing questions to inferiors, which is formed by substituting nanya or
tenya for the final ta of the present, past and future tenses of the Ordinary
Conjugation. The suffix nanya may be considered the regular interrogative available
generally ; whereas the form in tenya is specially employed where the enquiry
is made regarding action not immediately under the eye of the speaker. Further,
ha-tenya, for example, has not a Present tense meaning but is properly an
Imperfect ; hananya, being the interrogative for time strictly present. Again,
hayettenya refers to a past even further remote than the form hayennanya. In
hakeittenya, the Future, the enquiry contains an appeal for the opinion of the
person addressed, and that particularly where the enquiry is made with reference
to a third party not present to the speakers; hakeintianya on tha other hand
refers to the future merely. Such at least are the leading principles governing
the application and use of the two interrogative suffixes.
"t ^1 *t
hananya do I make ? dost thou make ? etc.
hayennanya have I made? etc.
hakeinnanya will T make ? etc.
hatenya was I making? etc.
hayettenya did I make ? etc.
hakeittenya shall I make ? etc.
kananya do I go ? dost thou go ? does he go ? etc.
kannanya have I gone? etc.
Mi kakeinnanya will I go? etc.
katenya was I going? etc.
kattenya did I go? etc.
r kakeittenya shall I go? etc.
9-2
COKEAN MANUAL.
-IV »1=
onanya
do I come '? etc.
^VH=
oannanya
have I come? etc.
^Tj) V »i=
okeinnanya
will I come ? etc.
S.^ V:
otenya
was I coming? etc.
^^1^
oattenya
did I come ?
Jft.7llt^v|:
okeittenya
shall I come ? etc.
^^^
innanya
have I ? {or am I ?) etc.
5!4v'^f^
issennanj'a
have I had ? etc.
5l^ V'F
itkeinnanya
will I have ? etc.
5l'>i''l=
ittenya
was I having? etc.
514^ ^
issettenya
did I have ? etc.
5i^''1'^
itkeittenya
shall I have ? etc.
'SJ V »^
emnanya
have I not ? etc. {or am
I not ? etc)
*34 v^
epsennanya
have I not had? etc.
^ ^iv'l^
epkeinnanya
will I not have ? etc.
^^1*1=
eptenya
was I not having? etc.
^3 4^^
epsettenya
did I not have ? etc.
';3eil^''l=
epkeittenya
shall I not have? etc.
oj-V ">
ananya
know I? etc.
t^vH=
arannanya
have I known ? etc.
-^7!iV Vj:
alkeinnanya
will I know ? etc.
*1^ v>
altenya
was I knowing? etc.
CJ-CJ.^^ V):
arattenya
knew I? etc.
-^^^^
alkeittenya
shall I know? etc.
CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.
93
J?_ ?■_ ^ ^r moronanya
"h!" yi ^ \ mollannanya
3- ^ -^ ^ ^ inorokeinnanys
JjlL ,S. ^ ^ morotenya
H. >4 f I mollatteDya
'-J- '^ >[; '^ ^ morokeittenya
ponanya
poannanya
pokeinnanya
potenya
poattenya
pokeittenya
know I not ? etc.
have I not known ? etc,
will I not know? etc.
was I not knowing ? etc.
knew I not ? etc.
shall I not know? etc.
do I see? etc.
have I seen ? etc.
will I see ? etc. .
was I seeing? etc.
did I see ? etc.
shall I see? etc.
Sbction a.— conjunction CONJUGATION.
Under this conjugation are included the various agglutinations and
suffixes, which are employed to express condition, time, reason, conjunctions —
copulative and disjunctive — and even punctuation. But inasmuch as the presenta-
tion of a complete paradigm of these varying modifications with all their niceties
of distinction would necessitate a volume to itself and only encumber and perplex
the student, it has been considered advisable to give here only the more
important modifications — such at least as occur most frequently in current collo-
quial. These embody the leading principles governing this verb inflexion and
will enable the student to work out, as he becomes more and more familiarized
with the language, the system of word-building and aggutination peculiar to
Corean. Many of the particles used in connecting sentences — subordinate and
co-ordinate — are meaningless in themselves but are required for euphony, either
replacing our English conjuctions or merely indicating the punctuation. It may
be well said indeed that a mastery of the Corean verb implies a full knowledge
of the Corean language.
24
94
COEEAN MANUAL.
I. — CONDITIONAL SUFFIXB8.
Tho suffixes X3^ myen and "H .5^ keteun express condition with a force
corresponding to our word "if" in connecting a subordinate clause with the
principal clause of a sentence. Myen, with or without the conjugation tiL o|
manil, can be used generally, but where the idea of uncertainty or of time is
connoted and especially where the principal and subordinate clauses contain
different subjects to their respective predicates, keteun is the suffix employed.
The present tense is formed by substituting myen for the final I of the
Future Relatire Participle, thus —
hata, I make
pota, I see
mekta, I eat
t
T "?!
hal {Fut. Part) . hamyen, if I make.
4
pol
{Fut Part). pomyen, if I see.
mekeul {Fut Part), mekeumyen, if I eat.
The other tenses are formed from the Ordinary Conjugation by substituting
simyen, keteun and temyen for the ordinary terminations of the present, past,
future, imperfect and pluperfect tenses.
Present
Past
Future
Imperfect
Pluperfect
hamyen
haketeun
If I make, if thou makest, if he
make, if we make, etc.
■f 5^ ^1 "d hayessimyen L^ j ^^^^^ ^^^
-5^ M -J xZ_ hayetketeun j
'^ ^ -^1 "Jl^akeissimyen^j^ j ^^^^jj ^^^^j.^.^ ^tc.
^ -ji ^ -^ hakeitketeun )
"St 'd ^ hatemyen If I was making, etc
«g» 6:^ pi td hayettemyen If I had made, etc.
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.
95
Present
>i
Past
Future
>»
Imperfect
Pluperfect
Present
»>
Past
>>
Future
ji
Imperfect
Pluperfect
Present
j»
Past
Future
>>
Imperfect
Pluperfect
If I shall come, etc.
If I was coming, etc.
If I had come, etc.
-Jx* ti }If I came, etc.
A -t) -^ oketeun
51.^1 ^ oassimyen ,
ZZ } \l yif I come, etc.
5m. "T" -^ oatketeun
JJL ^ ^1 Da okeissimyen
^ :^ ^ ^okeitketeun
^ "Cl "l^ otemyen
5l '^ ^ oattemyen
tJJ ^t^ mekeumyen L^ j ^^^^ ^^^_
pj — J ^ mekketeun )
^ 5J ^1 ^ mekessimyen U^ j ^^^^ ^^^^
|0 ^ ««l ^ meketketeun )
13? 7?] Xl Q^ mekkeissimyen I
T >i r ll llf I shall eat, etc
^ 7?l '7^ ^ mekkeitketeun
^ "Ol ^ mektemyen If I was eating, etc.
t^ 64 -^ a^ mekettemyen If I had eaten, etc.
\^ 13a pomyen
ijf ^ J^ poketeun
JL ^>^] '^ poassimyen |j^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^^
o ^1 ^ tS poatketeun J
JL ^ ^] ^ pokeissimyen | j^ j ^^^^j^ ^^^^ ^^^
^ ^1 -J tS pokeitketeun J
^ ^ 13^ potemyen If I was seeing, etc.
^ 61. X?| ^ poattemyen If I had seen, etc.
.If I see, etc.
9G
COKEAN MANUAL.
EXEKCISE XXII.
% ^k
^1^
il dial hamyen S3'angkeup choukeitta
work well if you make gratuity I will give
If you do the work well I will give you a gratuity.
pohaing koun oketeun naikei cheuksi mal hayera
courier if come to me instantly speech make
Let me know at once when the courier comes.
t
r> --t
^^^1-^ ^^) 44
tarn mounhechyessimyen tasi ssara
wall if fell into ruins again build
Build up the wall again if it has fallen down.
^ "^ ^ ^^W S^)'^
nenan
as for you
keu yak
that medicine
mekkeissimyen
if you will eat
You will do right to take that medicine
chyok'eitta
it will be good
ch'aik pokeitketeun kachye-kakera
book if you will see taken-go
Should you see this book you can take it away.
1
this
naika keu killo otemyen mannatkeisso *
I that . by road if was coming would have met
If I came by that road I would have met him.
7. :x
^
}
keu sarameul poattemyen ton chouetkeisso *
that man if I had seen money would have given
If I had seen the man I would have given him the money.
* Future Perfect tense. The construction and meaning of this tense
form arc explained in a separate section on a subsequent page.
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 9T
II. — CAUSAL SUFFIXES.
As, since, because, etc. are rendered by the suffixes Vl ni, Vj yn, nihJca,
Vl 771* "CI ^^ nikJcanteuro. The suffix ni has two distinct uses : (1) First, it
is used as a purely causal conjunction, connecting the parts of a sentence which
stand to one another in the relation of cause and effect. Under such conditions
it is restricted to the regular tenses, present, past and fature. The two encHtic
particles kka and khanteuro are frequently found added to ni both for purposes
of euphony and especially for the purpose of emphasizing its causal force, when
connecting the subordinate with the principal part of a sentence. At the same
time 7ii and its enclitics also appear in phrases where their meaning and
application may best be indicated by punctuation marks in English and where
the relation of cause and effect between different parts of the sentence can be
clearly understood without being particularized by any conjunction.
keul chal hani koake hakeisso
letters well as he makes examination will make
As he is a good scholar, he will get his degree.
^^] y}^ J.^ jtH 14 jL-t
echyei kasye onal oni pounchyou hao
yesterday having gone today as I come I am busy
Gone yesterday, here today ; 1 am busy.
%t>] ^\^:^} 5 7} J.
nari ch'anikka mot kao
day as is cold not go
I cannot go, it is chilly.
moksyou onikka 11 toikeitta
carpenter as is coming work will become
As the carpenter is coming, the work will be done.
param pounikkanteuro silkoa tterechyesso
wind as is blowing fruit has fallen
The fruit fell down with the wind.
(2) The suffix 7ii, as found in the agglutination teni, has a purely disjunctive
force. It indicates a break in the sequence of the ideas of the speaker —
something unexpected, as it were — which can be best rendered by means of
an adversative conjunction such as but. The agglutination teni occurs in the
Imperfect, the Pluperfect and the Past Intentional {was about to do) tenses.
25
98
COKEAN MANUAL,
^^1 ^^^ ^^^ >^)»9-
nongsa
hao
chyenei chyangsa hateni sipang
before trade he was making now he farms
He was once a merchant but now he is a farmer.
onal okeitteni iri issesye mot oasso
today I was about to come work having been not I come
I was coming today but was detained on business.
hani
hayessini
hakeissini
hateni
hayetteni
hakeitteni
oni
oassini
okeissini
oteni
oatteni
okeitteni
kani
kassini
kakeissini
kateni
katteni
kakeitteni
I make, so ... etc.
I have made, so ... etc.
I will make, bo ... etc.
I was making, but ... etc.
I had made, but ... etc.
I was about to make, but ... etc.
I come, so ... etc.
I come, so ... etc.
I will come, so ... etc.
I was coming, but ... etc.
I had come, but ... etc.
I was abou-t to come, but ... etc.
I go, so ... etc.
I went, so ... etc.
I will go, 80 ... etc.
I was going, but ... etc.
I had gone, but ... etc.
I was about to go, but ... etc.
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
99
chouni
chouessini
choukeissini
chouteni
chouetteni
choukeitteni
I give, so ... etc.
I give, so ... etc.
I will give, so ... etc.
I was giving, but ... etc.
I had given, but ... etc.
I was about to give, but .
etc.
Exercise XXTIL
1.
sonnim
guesc
■^^ JlH 4^^
hana
3.
^1 ^1 i* ^ ^
o-ni eumsik yeipihayera
one comes-as food prepare
There is a guest coming so get dinner ready.
taikeun chyangsa chal ha-ni pouchya toikeisso
as for you sir trade well makes-as rich will become
You are an able merchant, sir, and so will be rich.
p'okyoka tochekeul chapassini syangkeup patkeisso
police thief has-taken-as gratuity will receive
As the poHce have caught the thief they will be rewarded.
3.^7} 5:^4 4 ^^o\^ ^k ^ ^^^
p'okyoka tochekeul chapasye syangkeup patasso
police thief having caught gratuity rewarded
The police having caught the thief got the reward.
echeinan syoulkap chouteni onareun sak man chouo
as for yesterday reward was giving as for today wages only give
Yesterday he gave a gratuity but today he gives only wages.
a>>| 6]^ jLt^v) ^^1^ 7^^^) -|v|.
keu saram iri oteni etairo kannanchi molla
that man here was coming where to go I know not
He was coming here but I can't tell where he has gone.
'&
100 COEEAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXIII (cojitinued).
chim ta kachye-oatteni toro ta kachye-kasso
load all taken-came back all taken-gone
He brought all the baggage but he took it all away again.
mourei ppachye chonkkeitteni ettensarami kenchyesso
in water fallen he was about to die some-body saved
He fell into the water but somebody saved him from drowning.
ni. — ADVERSATIVE SUFFIXES.
The suffix OL ^ vianan is the regular adversative conjunction corres-
ponding to the English huty yet, etc., and is added as an agglutinative particle
to the regular tenses, present, past and future, of the Ordinary Conjugation without
any modification or euphonic change. The conjugation ending in chi, formed by
the substitution of clii for the final ta of the Ordinary Conjugation, is very
commonly used where respect or courtesy is intended towards superiors or equals ;
and to this chi the suffix manan is regularly added, to express a disjunctive
'break in the sentence. At the same time this form of the conjugation in
chi is likewise used to convey the idea of uncertamty or doubt together with
a sense of deliberation on the part of the speaker. The forms hata-manan,
etc. {i. e. the conjugation in ta), are properly confined to addressing one's in-
feriors in rank. These conjugations are regular and simple, and present no
difi&culty to the student as regards either their acquisition or explanation.
In using manan as an adversative suffix to any verb, Corean syntax
frequently requires that the verbal noun of this same verb — in the oppositive
case — shall immediately precede the verb with the adversative suffix, thereby
emphasizing and helping out the meaning. At times a certain restrictive sense is
conveyed by this construction corresponding more or less to the English phrases
"of course," "somewhat," "I allow, " etc. This idiom constantly occurs in
Corean colloquial, with various other suffixes such as to, tax, kenioa, etc.,
attached to the predicate, and forms one of the principal uses for which the
verbal noun (in the oppositive case) appears in the Corean language.
Further, manan is employed as a disjunctive agglutination, with the verb
in the Polite Conjugation, being merely added as a suffix to its endings in o.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
101
^
^
hata-manan
hachi-manan
hayetta-maman
hayetchi-manan
hakeitta-manan
hakeitchi-manan
onta-manan
ochi-manan
oatta-manan
oatchi-manan
okeitta-manan
okeitchi-manan
ponta-manan
pochi-majian
poatta-manan
poatchi-manan
pokeitta-manan
pokeitchi-maiian
meknanta-manan
mekchi-manan
meketta-manan
meketchi-manan
mekkeitta-manan
mekkeitchi-manan
'I make, but ... etc.
I made, but ... etc.
I shall make, but ...
I come, but ... etc.
etc.
I came, but ... etc.
■I will come, but ... etc.
I,
see, but
etc.
I saw, but ... etc.
I shall see, but
etc.
J
•I eat, but ... etc.
■I ate, but ... etc.
.1 shall eat, but
etc.
102 CORE AN MANUAL.
Exercise XXIY.
3.
echei oatchi-manan taikeul mot poasso
yesterday I came-but (you) sir not saw
I came yesterday but I did not see you.
^^ ^1^ 4^ «pf -I ^ -t^
onal kanta-manan pika ol-teut hata
today I go-but rain coming-likely makes
I am going today but it looks like rain.
i ton choukeitta-manan houei ettek'ei kapkeinnanya
this money I will give-but after how will repay
I will give you this money but how will you repay me.
4. *]= ol^l »j 5J >t] u^^ J^^ 6) c^^
yak manhi meketchi-manan hyohemi epso
medicine many I have eaten-but advantage is not
I have taken ever so much medicine but am no better.
alki-nan anta-manan p'oulkinan eryepta
knowing-as-for I know-but explanation-as-for it is difficult
I understand the meaning but it is difficult to explain.
'■ y} y]^y}t ^1 °f ii ^^1 ^i >d^1 j^ 5. ^ cf
kaki-nan kakeitchi-manan enchei kal-nenchi morokeitta
going-as for I will go-but when to be about to go I will not know
Of course I will go but I cannot tell when I will go.
natki-nan natta-manan acho natchi mot hata
recovery-as for I recover- but entirely to recover not I make
I am somewhat better in health but I cannot recover entirely.
8. J. ^J; 4t 7] fe: ^^°}^ ^^ 0^ ^^
keu k'al sseuki-nan sseunta-manan chal an teulta
that knife using-as for I use-but well not enter
I can use the knife of course but it is not at all sharp.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 103
IV. — CONCESSIVE SUFFIXES.
Though, although, etc. are rendered by the suffixes vL;2a, cl tai,
S^to,y^ VJ $JLke7iioa and^l '^ ^chirato.
With na and tai the present tense is formed by substituting these suffixes for I
final of the future relative participle. The past and future tenses are formed by
substituting si, as a euphonic connecting parciciple, for ta final of these tenses
in the Ordinary Conjugation and then adding ?ia or tai as the case may be.
In the case of to, the present tense, is invariably formed by adding the
concessive suffix to the first form of the verbal participle, i. e. the form without
the euphonic ending in sye. For the past and future tenses, se is substituted
for ta final of these tenses in the Ordinary Conjugation and then to is appended
as the conjunctional agglutination.
With kenioa, the present and past tenses are formed by substituting the
suffix for the final ta of the Ordinary Conjugation. But for the future tense an
entirely new form is constructed. The final I of the futm-e relative participle is
modified into rye {iiye where the verbal stem is distinguished by J) signifying
''about to," ''intending to," etc., while kenioa is likewise modified and becomes
nioa, so that we get the termination ryenioa or nyenioa.
The suffixes na, tai and to are at times practically interchangeable in
meaning and use; but while tai and to are strong concessive conjunctions
equivalent to though, although, etc., na is frequently found to fairly represent
our English "whether" and that especially with such verbs as "to tell," "to know,"
and "to see," etc. Kenioa is concessive as regards the subordinate clause, being
equivalent to "admitting that," "allowing that," "even though," etc., but in
introducing the principal clause it marks a break in the sequence of ideas correspond-
ing to yet, still, or hut, etc., the principal clause being generally in the interroga-
tive or imperative mood. Kenioa may well be translated "notwithstanding" .
With tai, to, and kenioa, the verbal substantive in the oppositive case
is constantly found associated, preceding the verb to which these suffixes are
attached. It is an idiomatic construction peculiar to the Corean language but
extremely useful in helping out the meaning of the sentence, emphasizing and
modifying the action of the predicate. Thus kakinan kato, "as for going
though I go" , meaning "even tJwiigh I go, of course, or "admitting that I go,"
etc.
The suffix chirato is confined to the future and pluperfect relative parti-
ciples and followed respectively by the future and future perfect in the principal
clause.
104
COEEAN MANUAL.
liana hatai hayeto
Though I make, etc.
hayerfsiiia hayessitai hayesseto
Though I made, etc.
hakeissina hakeissitai hakeisseto
Though I shall make, etc.
"9 J^l ijl Si. halchirato Though I may make, etc.
haj'essilchirato Though I had made, etc.
hakenioa
hayetkenioa
haryenioa
t ^ ^a ^1 ^ S
^f^
7] ^] 7)- S
^\i\^^
kana
katai kato
Though I go, etc.
kakenioa
^^)4
^^1 '^l ^^1 ^
^7]H4
kassina
kassitai kasseto
Though I went, etc.
katkenioa
7} yjl^] vf
yM^]"^] 7f7j|xis
y}^^^
kakeissina
kakeissitai kakeisseto
Though I shall go etc.
karyenioa
t^l ^-s.
kal chirato Though I may go etc.
yjt^l^\^s.
kassil chirato Though
•> — •
I had gone, etc.
t^^v^ oj^c] ^^(^^ ^7]H4
mekeuna mekeutai meketo mekkenioa
Though I eat, etc.
^5!^K l^l^l.'^l ^^^Is. 15!71H4
mekessina mekessitai mekesseto meketkenioa
Though I ate, etc.
I^^]"!- ^^n^)"^] '^^a^l^ "^^^^^
mekkeissina mekkeissitai mekkeisseto mekeuryenioa
Though I shall eat, etc.
mekeulchirato Though I may eat, etc.
mekessilchirato Though I had eaten, etc.
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 105
^Av^ ^}±<\ ^j-oj-S ^J-7|v]4
chapeuua chapeutai chapato chapkenioa
Though I take, etc.
chapassina chapassitai chapasseto chapatkenioa
Though I took, etc.
4^2^)1^ ^^^A^]<\ ^J-^HS ^j-A3lv|4
chapkeissina chapkeissitai chapkeisseto chapeuryenioa
Though I shall take, etc.
>^ a" ^1 ^ j£ chapeulchirato Though I may take, etc.
'm' jt ^ ^1 ^ S- chapassilchirato Though I had taken, etc.
5! A H- 5! A 'J] ^, *^ 5: 5! 7] v^ 4
eteuna eteutai eteto etkenioa
Though I get, etc.
5I5J/^IH- 5!5!^H1 5! 51^1-^ ^ 5J t] v] 4
etessina etessitai etesseto etetkenioa
Though I got, etc.
^^:^K 5!^/^l'^l ^^^1S 5!a^H4
etkeissina etkeissitai etkeisseti) etauryenioa
Though I shall get, etc.
^ 'S- ^1 ^ £ eteulchirato Though I may get, etc.
j1 ^ ^ ^ ^ £. etessilchirato Though I had got, etc.
Sana satai sarato salkenioa
Though I live, etc.
^i^A]x^ ^i^A]^] ^i^^^Si ^151-7] H4
Barassina sarassitai sarasseto saratkenioa
Though I lived, etc.
^^^^IM- >^^a^l'^] ^^^^15: ^^v^H^
salkeissina salkeissitai salkeisseto sallyenioa
Though I shall live, etc.
'^d I ^ J5c» salchirato Though 1 may live, etc-
^^» ^^ -^1 ^.ii. sarassilchirato Though I had hved, etc.
27
106 COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise XXV.
'^^^^ ^^^^] -f^ ^y} ^^
chyangsanan pouchareni hana rika epso
as for trade diligently though I make profit is not
Though I attend well to business, I never make any profit.
2.
JLI
"i^o] ^^iS ^^] ^4
onal
ilcheuki oasseto sseul-tai epso
today
early though you came about-to-use-place is not
Though you came early today, it is useless.
mal keurek'ei hakinan hayeto heuni ani sseuo
speech thus as for saying though I say commonly not use
Though such an expression may be used, it is not common.
4.6^ H^ ^f^l 151^1^1- St ^ J.^^
yak yere kachi mekessina hyohem mot poasso
medicine several kinds though he ate advantage not has seen
Though he has tried all kinds of medicine, he is no better.
5.
tochekeul chapeulcihrato moulkeneun ch'atki eryepta
thief though you may take as for articles finding is difficult
Even though you catch the thief, it will be difficult to find the booty.
echei oassilchirato taikeul mot mannatkeisso
yesterday though I had come you (sir) not I would have met
Though I had come yesterday I would not have met you.
7 7^:^1 y}y]^ y}^^^\ ^] -?■ ^'S -f «i 4
kekeui kakinan karyenioa maiou chosim hayera
there as for going though will go very careful make
Though you may go there of course, still be very careful.
nanan
chipei kakenioa nenan etai kakeinnanya
as for me to home though go as for you where will go ?
Though I go home, where are you going to ?
i
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS.
107
V. — DELIBERATIVE AND ALTEEXATIVE SUFFIXES.
Whether, or, etc. are rendered by the suffixes VL7^a, y^ V\^Jce7ia,
^ yV nanha, }^ ^1 nanchi, Cq >^i te7ichi,jM chi, and v^ ^j jienchi.
{a) Na and ^g?i3^. The suffix na, in addition to its use as a concessive
conjunction (though), has an alHed meaning {whether), when employed to mark
alternatives, especially where the verb is repeated or otherwise placed in opposi-
tion. Under these conditions the original force of na as a concessive conjunc-
tion {though) can still be evolved ; but the use of the alternatives whether and
whether ... or, more correctly conveys the sense of the Corean idiom in this
connection. This conjugation is simply formed by the substitution of 7ia for
the final ta of the Present, Past and Future tenses of the Ordinary Conjugation.
From the Future Relative Participle (ending in sal, eul, etc.) of certain
verbs, yet another "alternative" tense, ending in na is derived, by the substitu-
tion of na for the final I of the participle. This appears constantly in the language,
being well suited to the euphonic requirements of Corean speech. It is restricted
to the present tense and, as a strong alternative, has the same force as the
termination in kena.
This form in ite^ia appears only in the Present and Psist tenses. It has
a strong "alternative" sense (whether ... or), and is much used by Coreans in
ordinary conversation. Where however the idea of future action is understood,
recourse is had to the gerundive ending in rye, etc., the verb ^a^o. being utilized
as an auxiliary and becoming hakena for the Future simple and hayetkena for
Future Perfect. Thus kal, the Future Eelative Participle of kanta, I go),
becomes karye, (about to go or intending to go) ; and we thus get harye-
hakena (though I intend to go — though I will go, etc).
^4
hana
-f 7l ^
hakena
Whether I do, etc.
^^H-
hayenna
-3" ^ T) ^tiayetkena
„ I did, etc.
^^^
hakeinna
„ I will do, etc.
j.^
ona
-6.71 ^
okena
Whether I come, etc.
^^
oanna
^Tjv^
oatkena
,, I came, etc.
j.^"}
okeinna
„ I will come, etc.
7}"}
kana
^}y]^
kakena
Whether I go, etc.
^4
kanna
^7] ^f
katkena
,, I went, etc.
^l-^'f
kakeinna
,, I shall go, etc.
10€
\
COEEAN MANUAL.
51^
inna
51 >t 4
51 7)4
issana
itkena
► Whether lam, etc.
^4^
issenna
5!47]^
issetkena
„ I was, etc.
51 ^H-
itkeinna
„ I shall be,
etc.
'a^
emna
*J>*v^
epsana 1
epkena J
Whether I am not, etc.
*a7]vf
'iJ^^
epsenna
^3471 1
epsetkena
„ I was not, etc.
*3^ll^
epkeinna
„ I shall not be
etc.
^J-^
chamna
chapeuna
chapkena
-Whether I take, etc.
451:'^
chapanna
^^^y]"^
chapatkena
,, I took, etc.
4 51H-
chapkeinni
l
,, I shall take,
etc.
^vf.
mekua
mekeuna
mekkena
■Whether I eat, etc.
tt
51^
mekenna
-J5l7|v}
meketkena
,, I ate, etc.
x>
1^3 »+
mekkeinna
I
:xvi.
„ I shall eat,
etc.
Exercise 3
-£ ^>t4 <3>^^ ^^ 'i^
ton issana epsana kekchyeng
money whether is whether is not anxiety
I don't care whether there is any money or not.
epso
is not
chana kkaina nicheul sou
whether I sleep whether I wake forgetting means
Sleeping or waking I will never forget (this).
epso
are not
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 109
EXEBCISE XXVI {continued).
ona kana il pan io
whether he comes whether he goes one sort is
It is all the same whether he comes or goes.
k'euna chyekeuna kapseun match'ihankachi
whether large whether small as for price much the same
Large or small, the price is much the same.
5 ^ v|. 6). v) ^i\ 7> -f e| ^- 6). ?f
oanna ani oanna ka moure-poara.
whether he has come not whether he has come having gone enquire-Ee*^
Go and ascertain whether he has come or not.
6.
I
pai enchei ttenakeinna ka al-ko onera
ship when will depart go know-and come
Go and find out when the ship will sail,
7. a % V) 0^ ^ 5| /J! vf ^ 5|^vf.
keu il nai-il ta toikeinna mot toikeinna
that work tomorrow all v, ill become not will become
"Will that work be finished tomorrow or not.
8. -f 7^ ^ °^ 7] »| ^J 7| «j] X -f jt.
hakena malkena saingkak tairo hao
whether you do whether you don't thought according to make
Please yourself whether you do this or not.
chonkkena salken naiye parye touera
whetlier he dies whether he lives having thrown awaj'' put
Leave him alone to live or die.
28
110
COEEAN MANUAL.
(6) Nanka,nancJii, tenclii, cJii and nenchi. These five suffixes are also
employed to express whether and whether ... or, but under distinct conditions.
Nanka is confined to verbs of "enquiry" etc, either expressed or understood,
and in the latter case it has the force of an interrogative, indicating doubt, hesitation
or deliberation on the part of the speaker. The various sufl&xes ending in chi
appear chiefly in connection with the verb vioronta (I know not). But the
ending in nanchi can also be utilized as an interrogative of doubt or hesitation
in informal conversation with equals or inferiors. Tenchi, in addition to its use
in connection with verbs, appears frequently as a sufSx joined to nouns placed
in opposition to one another. It is connected with the noun by the uniper-
sonal verb ilta (is) and corresponds to our English sufiix ever, but with the additional
sense of whether ... or. Chi and nenchi appear only suffixed to the Future Relative
Participle in I, Corean euphony requiring that the initial t of tenchi should pass
into 71 (0 in order to coalesce with the I final of this participle form. SiUenchi,
as in hayessiUe7ichi, is an ever recurring form in Corean, and is found substituted
for ta final of the past tense of the Ordinary Conjugation. It has a dubitative
meaning at times, equivalent to whether I would have, etc, and by some has accord-
ingly been termed a Future Perfect.
With the intricacies and anomalies of Corean colloquial, it is practically
impossible to lay down hard rules to explain idiomatic construction ; but with the
leading principles here enunciated, it is hoped that the student may at least obtain
a clue amid the vagaries and perplexities of the language.
Whether I make, etc.
,, I made, etc.
,, I will make, etc.
^^^}
hananka
^^^y]
hayennanka
-^ ^^y
hakeinnanka
t fe^l
hananchi
^^si^i
hayennanchi
-f 'd^l
hatenchi
-f^^^i
1 hayettenchi
t^]
halchi
t^^l
hallenchi
-t^^^
1 jXl hayessillenchi
Whether I make, etc.
,, I made, etc.
Whether I make, etc.
,, I had made, etc.
r Whether I shall make, etc.
,, I have made, etc.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
Ill
^^y}
innanka
Whether I am, etc.
^'i^^y
issennanka
„ I were, etc.
^^^^}
itkeinnanka
,, I shall be, etc.
^2^^]
innanchi
Whether I am, etc.
514^^1
issennanchi
,, I were, etc.
51 'a ^]
ittenchi
Whether I am, etc.
^^-d^l
issettenchi
,, I had been, etc.
issalchi
issallenchi
" Whether I shall be, etc.
^d^l^^]
issessillenchi
,, I have been, etc.
^^yy
onanka
Whether I come, etc.
^^yy
oannanka
„ I came, etc.
j-d^^y
okeinnanka
,, I shall come, etc.
-^^^]
oiianchi
^Miether I come, etc.
^^^]
oannanchi
„ I came, etc.
-^^^1
otenchi
Whether I come, etc.
^^d^l
oattenchi
„ I had come, etc.
-1^1
olchi
^Whether I shall come, et(
-l>d^l
ollenchi
)
^^a>d^l
oassillenchi
„ I have come, etc.
112
COEEAN MANUAL.
7) Til {r ^V
toinanka
toiyennanka
toikeinnanka
toitenchi
toiyettenchi
toilchi
toillenchi
toiyessillenchi
kapnanchi
kaphannanchi
kaptenchi
kaphattenchi
kapheulchi
kapheuUencbi
kaphassillenchi
Whether I become, etc.
,, I became, etc
„ I shall become, etc.
toinanchi Whether I become, etc.
toiyennanchi „ I became, etc.
Whether I become, etc.
„ I had become, etc.
Whether I shall become, etc,
,, I have become, etc.
kapnanka Whether I pay, etc.
kaphannanka „ I paid, etc.
kapkeinnanka ,, I shall pay, etc.
Whether I pay, etc.
,, I paid, etc.
Whether I pay, etc.
,, I had paid, etc.
Whether I shall pay, etc.
,, I have paid, etc.
mekettenchi „ I had eaten, etc.
/"Whether I shall eat, etc.
mekeulchi
raekeullenchi )
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 113
^ ^ yX meknanka Whether I eat, etc.
^ ^ \^ ^r mekennanka „ I ate, etc.
T^ 7?| }C "^H mekkeinnanka „ I shall eat, etc.
^ JC >!t| meknanchi Whether I eat, etc.
1^ ^ ^ ^j mekennanchi „ I ate, etc.
1^ ^ >^| mektenchi Whether I eat, etc.
oj 6^ >y V^ yl| mekessillenchi ,, I have eaten, etc.
Exercise XXVTI.
mokoun-teul ireul hananka am hananka moure-po
cooUe's work whether make not whether make enqmre-see
Ascertain whether the coohes are working or not.
p'yenchi oannanka chikeum ka poara
letter whether has come now go see
Go now and see if the letters are come.
pai enchei ttenakeinnanka chom ara posio
boat when whether will depart httle know see please
Please find out when the boat will leave.
patkeui nouka oannanchi kai cheunnanta
outside who whether came dog barks
There is somebody outside— the dog is barking.
keu saram etten-saram-incbi nenan ananya
that man what-man-Hoever as for you do you know ?
Do you know who that man is?
•29
114 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise XXYIII.
3.
keu saram chipei innanchi emnanchi ananya
that man at house whether is whether not is do you know ?
Do you know whether that man is at home or not ?
6) «i| n^] ^j /^l 5l i£ ^1 JL 5. ?II -fc
i ttai kkachi chipei innanchi morokeisso
this time until in house whether is I will not know
I do not know whether he is at home as yet.
pohaingkoun kannanchi ani kannanchi al sou epso
courier whether has gone not whether has gone know means are not
I cannot tell whether the courier has gone or not.
4.$! 7)ta>] *^H ^M^] ^51 44 «f4
pit kaptenchi ani kaptenchi nenan syangkoan mara
debt whether pay not whether pay as for you concern avoid
It is no business of yours whether he pays or not.
choukettenchi sarattenchi chapa onera
whether he died whether he lived seize come
Apprehend him dead or alive. '
' j.% -£ ^^1 *fH -f^y '^K^
onal ton choulchi ani choulchi ananya
today money whether will give not whether will give do you know ?
Do you know whether he will give the money today?
^l«d^1 *i ^M^] *H ^'i ^3^
kallenchi an kallenchi achik chakchyeng epso
whether I will go not whether I will go as yet decide not is
It has not as yet been decided whether I go or not.
ta toiyessillenchi chasyeihi morokeisso
all whether has become accurately I will not know
I cannot exactly tell whether it has been finished or not.
7.
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 115
Exercise XXIX.
syoul-kap choutenchi an cboutenchi nai kyeikoanchi ani hao
wine-price whether give not whether give I to concern not make
I don't care whether he gives a gratuity or not.
2. °t J. *^ ^ A ^ 5l ol 'J] 5: 4i e^ife
manheuna chyekeuna innan-tairo sseukeisso
whether many whether few being-according to will use
Whether few or many, use what you have.
kina chareuna ta kachye-onera
whether long whether short all bring-come
Bring them all whether long or short.
toungkoulkena monakena sseuki-nan match'ankachi
whether round whether square as for using much the same
It will do equally well whether round or square.
kem-tenchi heui-tenchi kapsi ban kachio
black-whether white-whether price one sort is
Whether black or white the price is the same.
6|e^ ^vf t^^ -fv^ f 4 6) J.
iri hana chyeri ban a il pan io
here though make there though make one sort is
It is all the same whether you do it this way or that way.
pis-ssatenchi nouktenchi cbikeumeun ton epsye mot sao
whether dear whether cheap now as for money not being not buy
Whether dear or cheap, I have no money and cannot buy it.
encbei katenchi keu ttai pout'akhakeisso
when whether go that time I will appeal
I will appeal to him whenever he is going.
5.
7.
116
COREAN MANUAL.
VI. — RESTRICTIVE CONDITIONAL SUFFIX.
The suffix ya occurs in connection with the first form of the Perfect
Participle and produces a sense corresponding to if only, unless, only after ...
must, not unless, etc. i.e. a restrictive conditional in the Present Tense followed
by the Future in the principal clause. The Past Tense is formed by substitu-
ting se-ya for ta final in the Ordinary Conjugation ; it must be followed by the
Future Perfect in the principal clause. The Future is similarly formed by substitu-
ting se-ya for ta final of the Future of the Ordinary Conjugation ; but in Corean
its place is generally taken by the present in ya, which as a Conditional Present
naturally implies a contingent future — sufficiently at least to meet the require-
ments of a Future Tense in Corean.
-g- 6^ 61
'6|.
^1^
hayeya
hayesseya
hakeisseya
51^1*1=
51 7)1 X^ 6):
isseya
issesseya
itkeisseya
oaya
oasseya
okeisseya
kaya
kasseya
kakeisseya
6):
poaya
poasseya
pokeisseya
If I only make, etc.
If I only made, etc.
If I only will make, etc.
If I only be, etc.
If 1 only were, etc.
If I only will be, etc.
If I only come, etc.
If I only came, etc.
If I only will come, etc.
If I only go, etc.
If I only went, etc.
If 1 only will go, etc.
If I only see, etc.
If I only saw, etc.
If I only will see, etc.
CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 117
Xrl 5J 61; mekeya If I only eat, etc.
^ ^ Xt 6fc mekesseya If I only ate, etc.
Hi 7|| >^"l ^p mekkeisseya If I only will eat, etc.
.^T 6u 6t chapaya If I only take, etc.
>^ ^-^1 ^F chapasseya If I only took, etc.
-^r 7|| >^"| ^p chapkeisseya If I only will take, et<!.
-^ 6i 6t choneya If I only give, etc.
-^ 91 "^1 ^p chouesseya If I only gave, etc.
«^ ^ '^ j ^'p choukeisseya If I only will give, etc.
Exercise XXX.
JL ^4= ^ 6^ 6): vj 7l[ i
keu yak mekeya natkeisso
that medicine if only eat will recover
If you only take that medicine, you will recover.
moksyouka oaya iri toikeitta
carpenter if only come work will become
If only the carpenter comes, the work will be finished.
miri nille-chouesseya naika katkeisso
beforehand spoken if only have given I would have gone
If you had only told me beforehand, I would have gone.
moulken ch'atkeisseya syoul-kap choukeitta
article if only you will find wine-price I will ^ve
I will give you a reward if you will only find the article.
30
US COKEAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXX {contiimed) .
taiki poulkapoul yekeui isseya hai-sou patkeui epso
you (sir) necessity here if only be resource beyond is not
You must be here, sir, — there is no other resource,
kekeuireui keu ttai kassej^a kcu sarameul mannatkeisso
there (ace : case) that time if only had gone that man would have met
You would have met him had you only gone there then.
■'■ ^^\ -t^d^l 7)^51 Ji<^l-*|: "k^^
p'yenchi oUenchi kitarye poaya alkeisso
letter whether will come having waited if only see will know
If he will only wait and tee, ha will know if the letter will come.
cLnn ta oassillenchi ka poaya alkeisso
load all whether has come go if only see will know
If you only go and see, you will know if the baggage has all come.
VII. — TEMPORAL SUFFIXE3
The two suffixes X^ 7r taha and O^ /^ myensye express time, whe7i
or while, — but with this difference, that the former implies interrux)ted or unexpect-
ed action, and the latter simultaneous action, more or less continuous between
the predicates of the different clauses of the sentence. Taha is united with the
Present and Past Tenses by substitution for ta final of the Ordinary Conjuga-
tion ; myensye is united with the Present Tense only. For the Future with taka or
myensye, the gerundive in rye or rya (derived from the Future Eelative Parti-
ciple) is employed, especially in conjunction with the auxiliary verb hata (I do),
thus producing the termi -wtions rye-hataJca and rye-hamyensye,—oiien contracted
into rya-taka and rya-mye7isyc, —yvhere hataka and hamyejisye are strictly Present
Tenses regularly formed from hata, and attached to the gerundive of the verb to
be conjugated.
As regards the meaning of these two agglutinations taka and myensye,
Coreans use them very loosely and irregularly in ordinary colloquial — apparently
more for euphony than as a definite grammatical construction expressive of time.
Accordingly hut will frequently be found to give a correct rendering of taka,
thereby implying interrupted or unexpected action, while and will give the
nearest approach to myseyisye in conveying the idea of simultaneous action. The
English participle, as a general rule, gives an exact rendering of these agglutina-
tive forms especially as regards time or tense, which depends on the time or
tanse of the predicate of the principal clause.
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS.
119
Other temporal suffixes are composed of the locative case of such words as
^1 ^ ^ ^^^- suffixed to the Future Relative Participle o'f the verb, as de-
scribed on a subsequent page.
•t^7
\
hataka
When I make, etc.
•f^^^}
hayettaka
„ ,, made, etc.
^^^y}
haryetaka
,, „ intend to make, etc.
'A^y\
ittaka
When I have, etc.
5!^^7f
issettaka
„ ,, had, etc.
ii^^^yy
issaryetaka
,, „ intend to have, etc.
x^y\
otaka
When I come, etc.
^^\^}
oattaka
„ „ came, etc.
J^^t\7)-
oryetaka
,, ,, intend to come, etc.
i\^7y
kataka
When I go, etc.
yX^i\
-
kattaka
„ „ went, etc.
y}A^
\'J}
karyetaka
„ „ intend to go, etc.
:^^'^\
potaka
When I see, etc.
^^''X'^^}
poattaka
,, ,, saw, etc.
±^"^1}
poryetaka
,, „ intend to see, etc.
t ^^
hamyensye
Wlu4|>j I am making, etc.
^A ^^
haryemensye
„ „ intend to make, etc
±^^
omyensye
While I am coming, etc.
3.^^^
oryemyensye
„ „ intend to come, etc.
^f-d^
kamyensye
While I am going, etc.
i}A '^^
karyemyensye
„ ,, intend to go, etc.
^s-^^
kapheumyensye
WTiile I am paying, etc.
7]-3:^
W^
kapheuryemyensye
„ ,, intend to pay, etc.
120 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise XXXL
1. ^^ :5,ft:}7|- s^4l -i^^
aeuikol kattaka tochekeul mannasso
eountry when I went thieves I met
When going to the country I was attacked by thieves.
syeoul kataka pireul mannasso
capital when I go rain I met
It came on to rain when I was going to Soul.
Syeoul kamyensye pireul machyetta
capital while I go rain flogged
It was raining while I went to Soul.
seuikol kattaka yere nal manei toraoasso
country when I went several days period I returned
I went to the country but returned after several days.
chipei karyetaka iri issesye mot kasso
to house I intend to go work been not I went
I intended going home but was detained by business.
6. 5.^44 -f^^l- ^^H f53^
tochekchil hataka chaphiye choukesso
stealing action while he makes taken he died
He was caught stealing and killed.
7. j^/^l -gj A 5J:T^ 7f i 47f °^ ^ t^ sf
chasyeihi poattaka toraka mal hayera
accurately when yoii have seen return speech make
When you have seen (this) clearly go back and tell him.
8.
ton kkouiye chouettaka nanpong nasso
money lent when I gave spend thrift arose
I gavo him the loan of the money but never got repaid.
s.
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS. 1-21
Exercise XXXII.
ch'aik potaka nat houei nakapsyeita
book when I see noon after let us go out
Let us read the book now but go out in the afternoon.
keu ttai oryetaka momi apha mot oasso
that time while I intend to come body sore not came
I was coming then but was ill and could not come.
0.
7.
8.
chikeum karyemyensye taikeui chom porye-hao
now while he intends to go you (sir) little he intends to see
He intends to go now and wants to see you a little.
keu killo kamyensye keu moulken sakeitta
that by road while I go that article I will buy
I will buy that article as I am going that way.
^ 'l^^ >^l/f ^"^
pyet namyensye pika onta
sunshine while proceeds rain comes
It rains while the sun is shining.
yjit kapheuryemyensye ouei ton keurek'ei sseunanya
debt while you intend to pay why money thus do you use ?
Why do you spend money in that way if you intend to pay your debts ?
ouri kamyensye niaki hapsyeita
we while go story let us make
Let us chat together as we are going along.
keu yak mekeumyensye kot pyengi te hayesso
that medicine while he eats directly sickness more has made
Directly he took that medicine he got worse.
SI
122 COKE AN MANUAL.
VIII. — SUFFIX U?;ED WITH VERBS OF FEARINO, ETC,
The suffix ^l-A;^, added to the Future Eelative Participle, occurs
regularly in connection with verbs expressive of "'fear", like mousy epta and touryepta,
or with nounrf expressive of "anxiety" like nyemmje, or Jcekchyeng. Its meaning
and use approach nearest to our English conjunction "lest".
Exercise XXXTIL
1.
v] 6^ ^] 7f 4^). ^v^ 5)JL
naiil pika olka nyemnye toio
tomorrow rain coming anxiety becomes
lam anxious lose it rain tomorrow.
•^I^l- ^ ^ 5 -|7f ^^ -s^j,
neika keu ttai mot olka kekchyeng hayesso
you that time not coming anxiety I made
I was anxious lest you could not come then.
keu aheui mourei ppachilka toiirycone-hao
that child in water falling , afraid-makes
The child is afraid of falling into the water.
param poulka mousyeouesye haingsven mot hao
wind blowing being, afraid navigation not make
I cannot sail beintf afraid of the wind blowing.
FUTUBE PEBFECT TENSE.
A compound tense occurs frequently in Corean which in force and use
corresponds practically to our English Future Perfect, "will have" or "would
have". It is formed by substituting the agglutinative suffix distinctive of the
Future Tense, Jceitta (or k'eitta for aspirated verb stems) for ta final of the Past
Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation, and thus presents. a combination of the Past
and Future Tenses. It takes various suffixes to express interrogation, condition,
etc. in common with the regular tense modifications. The Future Perfect Eela-
tive Participle, ending in sil, is generally found joined to choiU (the participle
noun ending), ket, thing, etc. in dependence on the verb alia (I know) ; while
the termination sillenchi (vide p. 110) most often appears associated with the
verb moronta (I know not), and at times has a purely Pluperfect sense:
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 123
'^ 6^ 7?] "CI- hayetkeitta j I will have done, etc.
- ^ ^1 >. hayetkeisso f^^ I would have done, etc.
^ ^ -^ ^ r hayetkeinnanya | "Would I have done, etc.
-g. ^ ^1 > hayetkeisso i^r will I have done, etc.
"S" ^ >fl >^| ^ hayetkeissini As I would have done, etc.
"t ^ 5! ^ °1- 5^ hayetkeittamau \ ^.^^j^ j^^^^ 3„„^_ .jc.
_^ *jj ^» ^1 ^y V* hayetkeitchimanan ]
^ ^ ^ hayessil Would have done {Bel: Part:)
•g- 6^ >y V^ ^1 hayessillenchi Whether 1 would have done.
Exercise XXXIV.
yak mekettemyen pyengi nahatkeisso
medicine if had eaten sickness will have recovered
Had he taken medicine, he would have recovered.
2 J. ^j t\ ^] 51 ^ V 'f
keu chip ta chietkeinnanya
that house all will have built?
Will he have finished building the house ?
moksyou oattemyen il ta hayetkeitta
carpenter if had come work all ^ will have made
Had the carpenter come he would have finished the work.
chikeum toraoatkeissini elp'it ka poara
now as he will have returned quickly go see
He will have returned by now ; go c[uickly and see.
124 COREAN MANUAL.
EXEBCISE XXXJV {continued).
echei katkeitchimanan iri isse mot kasso
yesterday would have gone but work been not went
1 would have gone yesterday but was detained by business.
hoitap oassilcboul aiko arapora oasso
answer would have come know-and to ascertain came
I thought the reply would have come and came to inquire.
keu saram pit ta kaphassillenchi nai morokeisso
that man debt all whether would have paid I will not know
I cannot tell whether he would have paid all the debt.
ot ta toiyessilchoul alko nipeura oatta
clothes all would have become know-and to dress came
I thought the clothes would have been finished and came to put them on.
GEBUNDIVE.
The Corean verb possesses two allied Gerundives, derived from iHm Future
Belative Participle respectively by changing the I final into (1) ra or re or (2)
rya or rye.
(1) The gerundive in ra or re appears principally in conjunction with
the verbs kanta (I go), onta (I come) ^onai^a (I send) and other verbs of motion ;
and indicates merely the object for which one comes or goes.
With a few verbs, and especially with those marked by Zin the stem,
the gerundive is irregularly formed in Ine or Ina, pronounced lie or lla for tlie sake oi
euphony.
7]"^^ kachille from kachita (1 fetch).
/^ ^ sill© M sitta (I load).
kalla „ kalta (I cultiratf).
p'alla ,r P'alfca (I sell).
CONJUGATION OF \^RBS. 125
Exercise XXXV.
1.
sai chapeure kasso ton kapheure oasso
birds to seize be went money to pay he has come
He has gone shooting. He has come to pay the money.
t -fi ^>4 ^^
k'al hana sara oasso
knife one to buy has come
He came to buy a knife.
mal sak naire kasso
horse wages to take out he has gone
Ha has gone to hire a pony.
taikeul chom pora oasso
you sir little to see I came
I came to see you a little.
«^^ ^53 -t^f ^v^
yekeui mouet hara oannanya
here what to do have you come ?
What have you come here to do?
ch'aik sara ponaiyesso
book to buy I sent
I have sent to buy the book.
moulken kacbille ponaiyesso
article to fetch he has sent
He has sent for the article.
yelsoi kachille kasso
key to fetch has gone
He has gone for the key.
32
126 COREAN MANUAL.
6,
Exercise XXXYI.
chim chire oasso
load to load has ooma
He has come for the packages.
Bonnim macheure nakasso
guests to meet he has gone out
He has gone out to meet the guests.
ton kachille ponaiyesso
money to fetch I have sent
I have sent for the money.
pat kalla kasso
field to cultivate has gone
He has gone to plough the fields.
mal kachi-ko ssal sille oasso
horse take-and rice to load has come
He has come with a pony to load the rice.
seuikollo k'ong palla kasso
to country beans to buy * has gone
He has gone to the country to buy beans.
chyangei ssal ton-sara kasso
to market rice money-to buy he went
He is gone to the market to sell the rice.
^i y}^\^ i;d 't^ ^^
chyeoul kachi-ko moulken talla oasso
scales bring-and article to weigh came
He brought the scales to weigh the articles.
«
p'alta ordinarily means tx) sell but with grain, rice, etc. it always meanj
to buy.
CONJUGATION OF VKEBS. 127
(2) The gerundive in rija or rye appears in conjunction with the verb
hata (I make), or with the copulative ho (and) generally connecting two inde-
pendent clauses. This gerundive always expresses intention or purpos*.
3.
Exercise XXXVIL
^7f ^^ ^Ma ^J^j^ ^e|^
naika seuikol karye-ko haingchyang ch'ario
I country intend to go-and baggage arrange
I am going to the country and am arranging my baggage.
onal mouet harye-ko oasso
today what intend to do-aud have come ?
What have you come for today ?
onaremi kongpou chom harya-ko oasso
as for today study little intend to do-and have come
I came to study a little today.
'd^^l ^l^] y}^ -fy^^
euchei chipei karye hananya
when to house intend to go make you ?
WTien do you intend to go home?
echei chouten ch'aik porya hananya
yesterday given book intend to see do you make
Do you intend reading the book I gave you yesterday ?
i ket mouesai sseurye-ko mantaresso
this thing for what intend to use-and have made
What do you intend to use this thing for that you have made?
nari chyemoure-to karya hananya
day late-though intend to go do you make ?
Do you mean to go even though it is late ?
kapsi pis-ssa-to sarya hao
price dear-though intend to buy I make
I intend to buy it even though the price is dear.
128
COREAN MANUAL.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
I. Ota, I come, \ are frequently used in conjunction with the verbal participles
Kata, I go, ) of other verbs, to give definiteness and exactness to the
meaning.
^^^ ^ J2L Ci-teure-ota
M- yr ^^\ na-kata
y\yA ^Clkachye-ota
7 ' jd 7 r ^\ kachye-kata
^ Vl ^l C^olla-kata
1^ ^ ^ C4-narye-ota
>AL A ^1- sa-ota
^W* 6U ^l* "CI- chapa-kata
le-ota
1 enter.
I go out.
I bring.
I take away.
I ascend.
I descend.
I buy.
I seize.
I summon.
II —vota, I see, (a) Joined to the verbal participle of another verb pota conveys
the meaning "to try," etc.
tl d.i Cltara-pota
1^ 6^ \3f_ "Ci* meke-pota
,£L ^ _2- t^ moure-pota
'-g' ti _5. "Cl haye-pota
^ Cl- til Oj- ara-pota
^V^ JL Clch'achye-pota
Hun g-see — I weigh .
Eaten-see — I taste.
Enquired-see — I ask
Made-see — I try.
Known-see — I enquire.
Sought-see — I look-for.
(6) preceded by the enchtic particles na and nanka,
(substituted for ta final of the Present, Past and
Future Tenses, Indicative, of the Ordinary Conjuga-
tion) pota expresses probabihty ; Thus—
CONJUGATION 0? VERBS. 139
■ — - — ■ — ■■I'll * —
^ p JS. ^ ha-na pota 1 1 probably do, etc.
•S* ^ yV }) w* ha-nanka pota I or I think I do, etc.
^ 5 V --*• > hayen-na pota ( I probably did, etc.
-gr ^ Jr 7l- jL 'Cl hayen-nanka pota ) or I think I did, etc.
"^ ^ I I haken-na pota 1 1 will probably do, etc.
^ ^^) fe yV _4 ^ hakein-nanka pota ) or I think I will do, etc.
(c) With the Future Relative Participle followed by ka,
pota is also used to convey the meaning of * "probabil-
ity," etc. in the future — "I think I will," etc.
S.^ «] -17)- ^^
onal pi ol-ka pota
today rain about to come-probable I see
I think it will rain today.
^ %1: ^]% ty} Ji^
ken ireul nai-il hal-ka pota
that work tomorrow about to do-probable I sea
I think 1 will do that work tomorrow.
III. — Chouta, I give, is frequently found as an auxiliary joined to the
verbal participle of another verb as a complement to its meaning.
IV. — Hata, I make, is constantly used as an auxiliary, and especially
with such suffixes as teut {tat), likely, man, able, pen, time, etc., when joined
to the Futnre Relative Participle of another verb.
S3
130 COIIEAN MANUAL.
Exercise XXXVTII.
4.
'■ ^ 41 ^1 y]t "i^ -^5!4r
keu saram choukeul kesal sallye-chouesso
that man about to die thing saved life-given
I saved that man's Hfe,
iri keupha-ni chom toa-chouo
work pressing as little assisted-give
The work is urgent, so help me a little.
'■ J.^ %^^ «]4 -k^ ^^
onal heuryesye pika ol-teut-hata
today cloudy rain come-likely-makes
It is cloudy today and looks like rain.
iri toil-tat-hateni acho t'eullyesso
work become-likely-make-but entirely differred
The affair looked like succeeding but failed entirely.
syoul massi chyoha mekeul-man-hata
wine taste good eating-able-makes
The wine seems good and quite drinkable.
keu pout sseul-man-hata sa-oner&
that pen using-able-makes buy-come
That pen is quite serviceable ; buy it .
^61] ^\:^ ^ 4 ^ i- ^ '^
mourei ppachye chpukeul-pt^n-hayetta
in water fallen into dying-time-made
I fell into the water and was nearly drowned.
chom te kitaryettemyen mannal-pen-hayesso
little more if I had waited meeting-time-made
I would have met him had I waited a little more.
5.
7.
8.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. l.jl
NEGATION.
To express negation Coreans commonly employ one of the two follov/ing
ivords-
L. 6Lor ^\ Vl an or afii, signifying either mere negation, or «oi with the im-
plied sense of unwillingness.
[I. JSL mot, signifying not, with, the implied sense of inabihty.
[II. Yet a third method of expressing negation consists in dropping the final
ta of the Present Indicative of the Ordinary Conjugation and adding to
the root of the verb one of the following terminations : —
(a) ^1 6L ^^or>X|- ^c/ziawjS'a or chant' a. This termination, which
becomes ^1 6L ^4.or JcU ■B^.c/i'ian^'a or ch'anVa for aspirated roots, is
properly a contraction for-^j or^j chi or ch'i (the negative infinitive
sign) combined vidth the words 61. V| "^ "C^anihata, not make. It
is used chiefly with verbal adjectives, Thus —
Jg. e|.cVra,good: ja^l <>}^^.,uy,,j,^,^,,t^^] ,,ot good,
^ ^L ^\, chyoch'ant'a j i.e. bad.
y^ v^ F y ■ yy >^| J- "C^ kipchiant'a { not deep,
TI >^I- ^4» kipchant'a \ i.e. shallow,
(b) ^1 ^ ^ Cl — chi viot hata-, expressive of inabihty (cannot).
J ^ r H '^ ^ — c/iianiAa^a, expressive of unwilhngness (will not).
(c) ^] ^^ JL —chimalko
^\ _^i ^1 expressing prohibition (do not).
>| ol ^ _^^^ ^^^ ) ^
182
COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise XXXIX.
^ 6]. t^ 41
Rvoul an mekso
wine not I drink
I do not drink wine.
3.
pyello chyoba am
in particular good not
1 do not care much for it
oj-v) -f^
hao
make
.) «^
1
this
ttai
time
kkachi pobaingkoun ani teure-oasso
until courier not entered-came
The courier has not arrived as vet.
1
syoiil mot mekso
wine not I drink
I cannot drink wine.
"^ ± 5:4 *H
chyoha
good
am
not
hao
make
I do not care for it.
tampai
tobacco
onal
today
pika
5V
^ I'i" *i
1 ^«f
5
mat koiakhaye mot mekkeitta
taste being wicked not will eat
The tobacco is bad and I cannot smoke it.
t"] 51^1^
7M) 5
iri issesye ka-chi mot
work having been to go not
I am busy today and cannot go.
ram
ol-teut-haye ka-chi ani
coming-likely-made to go not
It looks like rain and I will not go.
hao
make
hao
make
Hl^f ^ ^^15: ^^1 *)-H -f^
naika ton isse-to chou-chi ani hao
I money having-though to go not make
Even though I have money I will not give you any.
naiil
tomorrow
6^61
m manheu-ni neutkei o-chi
work many-as late to come
We will be busy tomorrow so do not be late.
mara
avoid
CONJUGATION OF \^RBS.
133
THE DEMONSTRATIVE VERB.
The English verb "to be" is represented in Corean by two distinct
words, each with a use and meaning essentially its own.
The Corean verb ^f "Cv itta (root 6| U) implies "possession", and
corresponds to "have"; whereas ^ Ci-^V^a (root 6l i or ^ il) has a purely
demonstrative force and appears only in the third person, singular or plural,
appended as a suffix or agglutination to the noun of which it predicates.
Thus k'al itta means "there is a knife", i.e. "I have a knife" ; but k'al iltci
implies that "it is a knife' [not any other article or instrument] . In short,
ilta mav well be defined as the demonstrative verb.
Present, tense.
Imperfect tense.
Interrogative.
ilta
ita
ira
io
yo
iteni
ilteni
illeni
inya
inka
io
yo
rHe, she, it is : they are.
He, she, it is : they are (polite form)-
He, she, it was, : they were.
lis it? etc.
s
1
J
}-Isit? etc (polite).
^i'C^^ iltenya 1
-a v) v^
illenva J
^\N'a8 it? etc.
31
134
COEEAN MANUAL.
Conditional.
^W
imyen
If it be, etc.
irato
ina
1
[-Though it be, etc.
^d^l
inchi
Whether it be, etc.
t^]
ilchi
,, it will be, oto
''U^]
itenchi
„ it was, etc.
Ex
itencbi
illenchi
- Whether it be, etc.
ERCI8E XL.
2.
3.
5.
keu
that
keu
that
chipi nai chip
house my house
That is my house.
o^6|
man
n
ch'am mal
speeck true speech
Is that the truth?
ilta
ift
i o|v>
mva
i^?
7)5
kechat
false
t 11: "] ^
mal an
speech not
It is not a lie.
ita
is
taiki
»>^ ^}
■%
a
anan saram
you (sir) knowing man
Is the man known to you?
1-i
10
ii?
^] ^ ^vla
yei
yes
nai chinko
my friend
Yes he is my friend.
yo
in
2.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 185
EXERCISE XL {continued).
^ ^ ^ ^ ''l^'^
keu cbyeii k'eun chyen ilteriya
that shop big shop was?
Was that a big shop ?
chyenei-uan koiakhai saram iteni
formerly-aB for wicked man was but
Formerly he was a bad man ;
chikcnm-enn keurechi anso *
now-as for thus not is
But he is not so now.
Exercise XLI.
t4 4^ 1- *!. 4s.
mareun orheun mal irato
as for speech right speech though it be
Though what you say is quite correct.
ireun keurek'ei toil sou epso
as for work thus becoming means is not
The affair cannot be arranged in that wav.
k'ong ma ssal ina kapsi match'ankachi
beans -vrhether be rice whether be price much the same
Whether beans or rice, the price is much the same.
i chip inchi chye chip inchi morokeisso
this house whether be that house whether be I will not know
I cannot tell which house it is.
»
thus not IS.
Contracted for keure-chi-an-so, the polite form of keure-chi-an-iia
136
COREAN MANUAL.
6.
EXEBCISE XLI (continued).
noukou-nya
who is ?
Who is there ?
4 a
(/br-inya) f
ch'inko yo
friend it is
It is friend.
t3
mousam kesi-o ifor-io)
what thing is it "?
What is it?
^i'^
namou-lta (/br-ilta)
wood it is
It is wood.
so-tenchi mari-tenchi toiiian tairo chapa onera
ox-whethcr be horse-whether be becoming according to seize come
Get horses or bullocks just as you can.
VERBAL NOUNS.
Verbal nouns are of two categories : —
(I) Those derived from the verb stem by adding m and kl. Nouns in m are
regarded as abstract, like the English words love, play, etc, whereas" those in
ki are participial, equivalent to the English loving, playing, etc. Both forms
are modified for case inflexion. The noun in ki retains its use and force as a
verb in governing an object, and at times it is best rendered by an infinitive,
especially with adjectives like chyot'a (good) souipta (easy) eryepta (diflicult),
etc. Its use in the Oppositive Case appears principally in connection with verbs
modified by the conjunctional agglutinations manan, tc, tai, nioa-^ as explained
on page 100.
1
-f 7|
4
-i7l
ham
haki
pom
poki
action
acting )
From hata (I make).
sight
seeing
From pota (I see).
\ N. B. — For the sake of euphony, the initial i of ilta (and its various
modifications) is regularly dropped when the word to which it is appended as a
suffix ends in an open vowel sound. This is especially the case with the nomina-
tive case ending in t.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
137
^ 13 param
JL7]
>^7]
hope
hoping
•From parata (I hope).
cham
chaki
om
oki
kam
kaki
VFrom ckata (I sleep),
sleeping j
arrival )
SFrom o
coming
ta (I come).
departure )^^^^ ^^^^ ^j
going
(II) Those derived from Relative Participles by adding the suffix choul. This
suffix, modified for the instrumental case into choullo and then best rendered
by the preposition for, is found only with such verbs as alta, I know,, moronta,
I know not, nekita, I think, chimchakhata, I suppose, etc. At times — especially
when found with the Future Participle, — hoto followed by the Infinitive conveys
the nearest approximation to its use and meaning in English.
Exercise XLTI.
1.
2.
4
y}y]
H^^
f
-t7]
^J^
kii
kaki
eryepta
mal
haki
souipta
road
going
is difficult
speech
making
IS easy
The road is difficult to go.
It
is easy to
speak.
>1 JL 7) s 4 t -f 7] ^ "^1 4
san poki chyot'a
hill seeing is good
The hill is pretty to look at.
il haki tetaita
work making is slow
The work is slow in being done.
i
4.
chip
house
echei
yesterday
S.^}^ s44^ ^i^} 3144
chyok'inan chyot'amanan kapsi
as for goodness is good but . price
The house, I admit, is good but the price is dear.
^J-'H] ^} t 4 ^
pamei . cham han cham mot
in night sleep one sleep not
I could not sleep at all last night.
pis-ssata
is dear
chasso
I slept
35
138 COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise XLIII.
1.
il hananchoul molla il halchoul moUa
work making I know not work making I know not
I did not know he was engaged on the work. I do not know how to do the work
keul sseulchoul ara keu saram chyoheunchoullo ara
letter writing know you ? that man for good I know
Do you know how to write. I took him for a good man.
keu pai naiil olchoullo nekio
that boat tomorrow coming I think
I think the ship will come tomorrow.
keuri toilchoureun chimchak mot hayesao
thus as for becoming suppose not I made
I never supposed that it would result in this way.
keu chikeikoun oattenchoul molla
that packmen came I know not
I did not know that the pack coolie had come.
6.
keu kyeichip neulkeunchoullo arasso
that woman for old I know
I took her for an old woman.
choung-nom choukeunchoul arasso
piiest-fellow dead I know
I thought the priest had died.
pyello chyoheuncboul morokeisao
Bpecially good 1 will not know
I do not think it particularly good.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
13D
In addition to those above mentioned, other Verbal Nouns are supplied
by appending the suffixes >y chil and Jj^ ^ iiorat, signifying respectively action
and professioii or business, to the root forms of certain nouns, as seen in the
following e-camples.
Exercise XLIV.
1.
^
tochek-chil hanta
thief-action I make
I steal.
1^4 ^a
yekchek-chil
rebel-action
I rebel.
hanta
I make
2. :^^]^l t^
kcllei-chil hanta
duster-action I make
I dust.
^^l
8ol-chil hanta
brush-action I make
I brush.
4.
pana-chil hanta
needle-action I make
I sew.
>}3.
M i
-^^i
pouch'ai-chil hanta
fan-action I make
I fan.
Jcf
*g>fe
^ 3^ t ^
amo norat to hal ket epso
any business even making thing is not
There is no profession at all open to me.
sakoung-norat orai hayesso
sailor-business long I made
I have long been a sailor.
^^^1
^>fcjcl 5. t^vfe
-fa
p'csyou-norat hako kounsa-norat to
hunter-business and soldier-business also
I have been both hunter and soldier.
hayesso
I mad»
140
COKEAN MANUAL.
. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS AND ADJECTIVES.
Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives are usually formed by
substituting kei for ta (or k'ei for t'a) final of the Present Tense of the Ordinary
Conjugation: —
^y^]
okei
from
^^
onta,
I come.
^yy^]
kakei
»»
^}^
kanta,
I go.
t^)
yelkei
>t
"i^
yelta,
I open.
^^1
hyok'ei
)(
s^
chyot'a
I am good
These Adverbs are generally followed by such verbs as hata, I make, or
toita, I become, and are causative in sense, equivalent to the English so as to,
so that, in order that, with the use and force of a Future Infinitive. Those
derived from Adjectives very frequently end in i, (or hi where the root is marked
by an aspirate).
Exercise XLY.
1.
^
tA
^6^4
5
-t^i]
-t^fsf
moun
yelkei
hayera
mot
hakei
hayera
door
so as .to open
make
not
so as to make
make
Make the door to
open.
See that he does not
do that.
chal hakei hayera
well 80 as to do make
See that you do this well.
eumsik talkei toiyesso
food so as to be sweet has become
The food has been sweetened.
3.
^^ 'i^] 3!-^] 5|^4:
31
pap ipei matkei toiyesso
rice to mouth so as to meet has become
The rice has been cooked to suit my taste.
syoul chyok'ei haye nehera
wine so as to be good having made place
Make the wine good and store it away.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 141
4.
Exercise XLYI.
^ ^^1 3J:7)JL
ton mopsi atkio
money bad cherishes
He is stingy ■:\ith his money.
ton man chyonnghi nekio
money only heavily he thinks
He cares for nothing but money.
-f-t ^J^l 44
oumoul kiphi p'ara
well deeply dig
Dig the well deep.
i p'aimoul kopkei touera
this cmrio neatly place
Put this curio carefully away.
^ ^Vll 44''] '4*1-^
kea sarameul poulsyangi nekio
that man piteously he thinks
He pities that man.
a 7^1/3^ a 4 ^*|^
keu kyeichipeul chyohi nekio
Oman good
He is fond of that woman.
that woman good he thinks
keu kyeichipeul chyohoa * hanta
that woman good he makes
He is fond of that woman.
* chyohoa is a pecuHar Verbal Participle derived from chyot'a I am good,
occuring only in the phrase chyohoa-hanta meaning "I love".
86
142 COKEAN MANUAL.
CAUSATIVE AND PASSIVE VEBBS,
Instead of Active and Passive Voices, the Corean language possesses a
convenient system of word construction producing a causative meaning and hence
aptly termed "causative" construction. It consists in the insertion of the vowel
sounds i, hi and on according to the requirements of Corean euphony, before ta
final of the verb stem as seen in the Present Tense of the Ordinary Conjugation.
The meaning of the verb alone is changed, and the conjugation remains un-
affected, the whole being treated as an iadspsudent verb. Active verbs are thui
rendered passive in sense and vice versa. Thus jnalda (I hinder) becomes mak-
hita (I cause to binder, I am hindered) ; chouhta (I die) becomes ckoukita (I
cause to die, I kill) ; khaita (I am awake) becomes kkaiouta (I cause to wake,
I awaken). Such at least is the general principle pervading the language but
in many words an allied active sense is produced adding to the expressiveness
of the Corean vocabulary. Thus mekta (I eat) passes into viekita (I cause to
eat, I feed) ; Vata (I ride) into t'ahita (I cause to ride, I mount). A great claes
of verbs possessing this "causative" formation, have their verb stem ending in
I and with such words Corean euphony requires ni to be inserted between the
stem and ta final of the Present Tense. Thus salta (I live) becomes 6al-nita,
read sallita (I cause to live, I save life) ; molta (I drive) heGomes inol-nita , read
mollita (I am driven).
Exercise XLVTI.
1. t X^ ^ "^^^^
mal pori chom mekyera
horse barley a little feed
Give the pony a little barley to eat.
tocheknom mok peiye choukyesso
thief Beck having cut he killed
He beheaded the thief.
mal anchang chiouera na etai kakeitta
horse saddle load I where will go
Saddle the pony — I am going out.
kangei ereum ta nokyesso
in river ice all was melted
The ice in the river has all melted-
5.
6.
CONJUGATION OF VEEBS. 143
EXERCISE XL VII {continued).
^4 ^'l *'>-i "l^"'] ^1^4
nareul naiil ach'am ilcheuki kkaiouera
me tomorrow morning early waken
Waken me early tomorrow morning.
chal mot hayesso sallye-chousio
well not I have made saved life give please
I have done wrong ; pray forgive me.
'■ ^^}^] 5] *H -2.4 M| <^ ef
tongsanei toiachi mora naiyera
from garden pig driven expel
Drive tlie pigs out of the garden.
toiachi ta moliye nakasso
pig all been driven have gone out
The pigs have all been driven out.
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMATIC USES OF THE VEBB.
(1) The Relative Participles, Present, Past and Future, are frequently found used
idiomatically with the suffixes Cj '^.tairo, tiL .^'mank'eum, etc., with
a sense equivalent to the English as is the custom, as is proper, as you
like, etc.
(2) One of the commonest idioms of the (!orea,n language is that which consists
in appending to the Present and Future Eelative Participles of the verb
suffixes expressive o^ various forms of action, possibility, probability etc.
Of these forms some of the most important are here given for convenience
of reference, appended exempli gratia to the common verb hata, though
they may of course be used with any other verb.
^ ^ S^ ^ CL hanan-teut-hata
"^S \^ ^ IS" ^H hanan-tat-hata
"1 ^ ^ ^ hal-teut-hata [j ^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^
I am probably doing, etc.
hal-tat-hata
)
|5-t4
^ u|. -gr pL hal-man-hata I am capable of doing, etc.
■^ \rt ^ "Cl hal-pen-hata I am on the point of doing, etc.
-g" V V^ ^ "Clhanan-ch'yei-hata I am pretending to do, etc.
144
COREAN MANUAL.
1^
hal-ch'yei-liata
hal-ppoun-ilta
hanan-tai
hal-tai
hanan-ttai
hal-ttai
hal-sai
hal-chei
hal-chek
hanan-t*e
I will pretend to do, etc.
It is merely this he is doing.
Since I am making.
Since I will make.
Time of doing (present).
Time or period of doing, (future).
J
/The position, duty or power to do.
hal-t'e '
Many of these suffixes likewise occur with the Past Kelative
Participle, but their use and mining can easily be seen from the above
given examples of their use with the Present and Future Participles.
<3) In addition to the use of the gerundive in rya or rye (see page 127) to
express intention, two new combinations are formed by adding kochya-
hata (or kockye-hata) and kosipouta to the verb stem. Thus with the
verb hata for an example again, we get —
I intend to do, etc.
^ "^ y(^ -g* "Cl ha-kochyahata
^ JJ7 y^ "S" ^ ha-kochyehata
- ^ >% l^ ^i ha-kosipouta
1 propose to do, etc.
I desire to do, I would like to do,
etc.
<4) The suffix mcheuh hata expresses the meaning of it is pleasant, worthy,
capable or possible and is joined to the Verbal Participle by a connecting
vowel a or e according to the requirements of euphony. {N. B.—Chak is
found in use at times for cheuk).
«^ 6^: ^ -^ "pL haya-mcheuk hata
J^ 0^ ^ -g" Cl haye-mcheuk hata
\J 6i ^ ^ XX poa-mcheuk hata
t^ 6j -^ '^ "Cl- meke-mcheuk hata
-It is pleasant to do.
It is pleasant to see.
It is pleascnt to eat.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
145
(5) The suflfix chi added to the verb stem produces a variety of meanings: of
which the two most important are —
(a)
"S" ^j hachi
yX. ^] kachi
\jf JM pochi
etc.
etc.
to make
to go
to see
etc.
An Infinitive regularly used in
„ forming negation (g.t?. pages 131,
ri32), and especially with tlie verb
[ mar a, malko.
)
(b)
-S" ^j hachi
^ ^1 ochi
Used both interrogatively and
affirmatively for all persona singular
and plural.
do I make ? etc.
I do make, etc.
do I come ? etc
I come, etc.
etc.
(C) There are two special forms of the Future Tense with which the student
would do well to familiarise himself, occurring frequently aa they do ia
Corean colloquial: —
etc.
(a)
-^ ^ Ct harita
"f ^ ^ Cl haorita
(b)
^U}
hama
\ Used for the first and third persons
singular and plural. They are polite
}- forms used by inferiors to superiora or
by equals towards each other for the
j sake of courtesy.
] Restricted to the first person in connec-
[ tion with the indirect speech {oratio
}obliqua) and generally followed by the
) enclitic ko marking it accordingly.
^ ^ % , , "II made or I said, etc.,
CO "^ 'C^ ^ ^ ^^* h bad made or I had said. etc..
an Imperfect or Pluperfect tense for all persons— used generally in closing
a sentence or with ko in the indirect speech.
(8) ^ ^ ^ hateran
a Relative Participle formation derived from the above— fiawi or woflfe.
37
146
COEEAN MASn^UAL.
Exercise XLYIII.
sakton nam chounan tairo
chouera
wages others giving
Pay the same
r according to give
wages as others give.
sakton
chouten
tairo
chouera
wages
given
Give the
according to
regular wages.
give
4-£
sakton
choul
^]3.
tairo
chouera
wages about to give according to give
Give the proper wages.
4-^
4-^ ^ ua
sakton choul mank'eum
wag23 about to give size give
Give the proper rate of wages.
chouera
h&ten
made according to
Do as you did before.
chyenei
before
tairo
-f *i4
hayera
make
yak
medicine
H^l '^'d '^13. ^H^f
echei mekten tairo mekera
yesterday eaten according to eat
Take the medicine as you did yesterday.
4 y}
kil
road
kanan tairo
going according to
Gro as tax as you like.
4^1 ef
kakera
go
GONJUGATION OF YEBBS. 147
5.
Exercise XLIX.
moksyou pouUe il sikil tairo sikyera
carpenter call work about to order according to order
Call the carpenter and tell him to do what you like.
^ 4i& ^[3. ^ef
ton sseunan tairo SBera
money uaincj according to use
Use the money as required.
ton sseul tairo sseuo
money about to use according to use
Use the money as you like.
ton ne sseul mank'eum kachye-kakexa
money you about to use size taken-go
Take away whatever money you want.
toinan tairo amorik'ena haycra
becoming according to any way whatever make
Do it any way that it c£|.n be done.
chei oma hanta chei omako hanta
himself will come he says himself will come he says
He says he will come himself.
^] ^J= **] -t ^d *H ^1 "4 ^ 1 -f «f 3t -f ^ ef
michyangi haten ireul naiil p'iryek hamako • hatera
mason made work to-morrow finish will make he said
The ra.ason said he would finish the work he was doing, tomorrow.
148
COREIN MANUAL.
ADYERBS.
In addition to the Adverbs derived from Verbs and Adjectives, referred
to on page 140, the Coreau language also possesses a large number of Adverbs
proper, which in common with the others qualify and precede the Verb or Adjective,
and are not subject to inflexion, except occasionally when two ideas are placed
in contrast by means of the Oppositive Case suffix in eun, an, etc. A few
Adverbs appear with the Locative or Instrumental case endings in ei, eisye, euro,
TO, etc, but the sense is purely adverbial and all signification of case inflexion
is practically absent from the mind of the speaker. Some of the more common
Adverbs of time, place, manner, degree, etc. are here appended for convenience
of reference: —
(1) TIME.
JuBt now.
As yet.
Entirely.
Already.
Karly.
By and by.
Long time.
In a short time.
In this year.
Always.
Afterwards
Continually
Directly.
*V4
akka *
6].>)
achik
*U
acho
*JS]
imeui
%^
ilcheuk
51^'^
ittaka *
s.^
oral
XA^\
tX- Vb oraichianya
^^
orei
t^^
hangsyang
^^1
houei
A^
kakkeum
^
kot
y,%
match* am
i^Ml
match 'amnai
J-Finally.
♦ These two Adverbs are only used with reference to past and future
hours on the day of speaking, not to preceding and subsequent days.
ADVERBS.
149
5:5:
^^)
For special adverbs referring to the day,
pp 54, 55. A few others are here appended —
ach'amei
mm
monchye
neutkei
palsye
sipang
soui
taeum
tasi
tora
toro
chamkkan
chacho
chyeptai
chyenei
cheuksi
chikeum
38
») ^ <>\]
it'eunnal
nachai
nathouei
ohouei
pamei
saipyekei
sikchyenei
Beforehaad.
Formerly.
Late.
Already.
At present -
Soon.
Next.
Again.
>Back again.
Moment.
Often.
The other day.
Before.
Instantly.
NoAy.
the month, the. year, etc., see
In the early morning.
Next day.
At noon.
vin the afternoon.
i
At night.
At day break.
In the forenoon.
150
CORE AN MANUAL.
(3) PLACE.
"m
ftiiheui
i
'(Inside.
"1^3.
anheuro
)
1^^
apheui
, In front.
1}J:^
apheuro
)
<»|-?j]
arai
Below.
<^ ^]
etai
■N
H'^U
etairo
1
o]<\^
^taisye
)
^J]
yekeui (statior-arj')
^'Here.
o]z]
iri (motion)
1
^6,)
oiei
Outside.
-^^1
ouei
Above.
^71]
katkai
??ear.
7]^
kekeui
There.
^^
kenne
Across .
°f^
macho
Vis-a-vis, face to face.
^H
melli
Far.
vi«f
neme
Across.
3^^
patkeui
Outside.
^^
pekeum
Secondly.
^6,)
sokei
Inside.
-There.
J
^^
cbyekeui
(stationary)
c^a|
chyen
(motion)
^l"'!
touiei
Beliiiid.
AD^^BBS.
151
(3) MANNEB.
6|.of
ama
Probably.
*> JL effi)
amorak'ei
r In any way whatever.
oj-i^-^^ ^
■ amorik'ena
1
1
1^)5.
ekchiro
Forcibly.
'i^
elleun
)
^Quickly.
H^
esye
)
^^1
etchi
'How.
5!^^l
ettek'ei
^^^3.
imeuiro
Freely.
^M
iri
>In this manner.
«•) ^fi]
irek'ei
!
^]
ouei.
Why?
^'d^]
ouyeni
By chance.
-Together.
1^
hamkkeai
t^f^U
hankachiro
J
t^*^!
hankepei
At once.
-7 °^o]
kamani
Quietly.
katch'i
Similarly.
keurek'ei
-Thus.
a^l
keuri
li^>^]
pantasi
Assuredly.
^^]
patpi
Quickly.
^JC
pyello
Specially.
^"^1
pontai
Originally.
^^1
syokhi
Speedily.
162
COKEAN MANUAL.
^>*5.
seusaro
Naturally.
-£J2.>)
tomochi
Altogether.
^/^pj
chasyeihi
Carefully.
^^0]
ch'yench'yeni
Slowly.
^
dial
Well.
^^'•1
chayeni
Naturally.
^'^l
chyenei
Formerly.
^ic
chyello
Instinctiyely.
4 A5.
ch'ameuro
1
^ Truly.
1
^i^^
chinsillo
rBy degrees.
J^^
ch'ach'a
'i'l
chyem chyem
(4) DEGBEE.
^
y\^}
kacliang
-Exceedingly.
j
4^1
koahi
J
"i
man
Only.
^1-1^
maiou
Very.
manhi
Many.
moto
Altogether.
A^
neme
-Too (much).
v|^
nemou
>t4
sarok
^-%
teok
- More.
^4
torok
t'orok
J:4
choin
^
Little.
a:-^
chokom J
POSTPOSITIONS 153
(5) NEGATION AND AFFIRMATION.
11
an
I
*H
ani
--No.
^
mot
./
^
yei
)
44
olt'a
Yes.
1
4/^1 cf
olsyeita
/
a ^
4
keiiret'a
Yes (it if? so).
ae|
^1 11:4
keurech'iant'a
"No (it is not 8o).
a e^
^1 It 4:
keurech'ianso
J
An, ani and mot are the regular verbal negatives (see page 131). An,
ani express mere negation, but 7not in addition to negation expresses inability.
Yei is the usual affirmative for yes ; oWa is properly a Corean verb it is
correct, right, etc. — olsyeita being its polite or honorific fonn. KeureVa is a
verbal construction derived from keure (thus) ; keurech'iant'a is the negative
combination (see page 135), and is modified into Keurech'ianso as the polite
or honorific form.
POSTPOSITIONS.
In addition to the various inflexions of the Noun to indicate case
relation, the Corean language possesses a series of words performing functions
similar to Prepositions in European languages. In Corean however they appear
after the Noun or Pronoun they govern and hence are properly designated Post-
positions. They do not necessarily modify the Noun they govern as regards
case, with the exception of a very few Postpositions which are found associated
with certain case agglutinations. As a general rule the Postposition may be
treated as an Adverb in its use — the Noun remaining uninflected as in the root.
Some of the more common Postpositions are here appended : —
6L ^^1 ant'ei To : by ; {substitute for dative)
^1 ^ ^c inhaya Because of {fjovems instrumental
^— '' r cusative).
^1 -g' 61; ouihaya For the iiakcoi {(joverns accusative).
164
COREAN MANUAL.
77^]
kkachi
Until.
Jie^
peut'e
From
-44
pota
i Than
JL'^
patem
(
-^MI
taisin
Instead of
•c.^
tar3'e
To
^ Ji^
tepoure
With.
(governs instrumental or ab-
lative) .
(used in comparison of ad-
jectives) .
(substitute for dative).
CONJUNCTIONS.
The Conjunction proper appears in Corean as part of the regular vorb
modification for conjugation — see pages 101, 102. But a few words are likewise
used independently, connecting or introducing the clauses of a sentence, —
chiefly however in the written and but seldom in the spoken language. The
more common of these independent Conjunctions are : —
-^
achik
ochik
ohirye
hameulmye
hok
keurena
manil
pirok
tto
ttehan
Yet.
Bur.
Still.
P'urther.
Perhaps.
Nevertheless.
If.
Although.
' Further.
The conjunction and is variously rendered :—
(I) Between nouns, by oa when the noun to which it is subjoined as
a suffix ends in an open vowel sound, and by koa for a closed consonant. Hako
may be used equally for an open vowel or closed consonant sound.
(II) With verbs and adjectives, and is formed by ko snh.qtituted for
the ta final of the Present Tense in the Ordinary Conjugation.
CONJUNCTIONS.
155
Exercise L.
4 4 44 ^ 3iv^
ch'a oa ch'atcnyong ta innanya
tea and tea-cup all are?
Have you got tea and teacups ready ?
2.
6)) ^
yei
5£ *J it
4 t4
syoul koa syoui-chan tto isso
wine and wine-cups also are
Yes ; and also wine and wine glasses.
ir^-k'ei
thus
taichyepeul hasini
enterta'inment make-because
Thanks for your kind reception.
-n o
'}^
komapso
thanks
dt 4 177|) c^ >^Hef
• 80 oa maikkei ta sirera
bull and on pony all load
Load both the bullocks and the horses.
t^ ^> ^>fc
^ 4 ^^
pout koa chyoheui ta sa
pen and paper all buy
I have bought both pens and paper.
oasso
come
^ ^}
a
chye saram
that man
hako
and
He and
^
hako
and
na
I
I will go together.
katch'i
tosether
kakeitta
will go
syoul pout-ko ch'a kachye-onera
wine pour-and tea . bring-come
Pour out the wine and bring the tea.
156 €OEEAN MANUAL.
EXERCISE L {continued).
9.
10.
onareun kongpou-ha-ko naiireun koukyeng-kao
as for today study-make-and as for tomorrow picnic-go
Study today and go for a picnic tomorrow.
JL 7} ^]-f- ^3. 7jt^
keu kang maiou nelp-ko kipta
that river very broad-and ■ is deep
That river is very broad and deep.
»1 J-3. 11?| S.^^ f^ ^IJL
pi o-ko ilkeui chyoheumyen p'oung-Tiyen * io
rain come-ond weather if be good plenty-year is
With rain and good weather there will be full crops.
INDIRECT HPEECH.
(OB ATI 0 OBLIQU-A)
To the student, no part of the Corciin language presentii greater difficulty
than the correct rendering of the connecting particle required in indirect spoech
with the verb hanta {mal lianta) I speak, etc. The rule is that the subordinate
noun clause is regularly constructed in the Ordinary Conjugation, ending in ta
ra, etc ; the euphonic and enclitic particle ko (which otherwise possesses no in-
dependent meaning or use) is then added as a suffix to the verb closing this
noun clause ; and finally comes hatita (I speak or say) completing the sentence.
"Besides Ao as the enclitic connective, hako is also employed for the same purpose,
but much less frequently. In continuous colloquial speech, instead of actually
inserting the verb hanta, I speak, ko or hako may be used alone, as they are
sufficient to indicate the part of the phrase or sentence in the oratioobliqua,
and may be translated accordingly I say that, he says that, etc. Tliese enclitics
ko or hako must be carefully distinguished from the two copulative conjunctions
ko and hako used for and. Ko and hako followed by the verb hanta (I speak)
serve to mark the end of the clause in the oratio ohliqua, and in meaning cor-
respond with our Ea:^lish conjunction i/wi— either expressed or understood — with
the verbs to say, tell, speak, etc.
* From two C'liinesc derivatives meaning plenty and y^nr.
INDIEECT SPEECH. 157
1.
Exercise LT.
^^I^f jSL°f t^
cheika oma hanta
self will come he says
He says he will come o?' He promises to come
cheika oma-ko hanta
self will-come he says
He says he will come.
^^14 -^^^^ t^
cheika okeitta-ko hanta
self will come he says
He says he will come.
cheika orye-ko hanta
self intends to come he says
He says he intends to come.
cheika keu ttai oatta-ko hanta
self that time came he says
He says he came at that time.
ton choukeitta-ko hanta
money will give he says
He says he will give the money.
pit naiil kapheumako hanta
debt tomorrow will pay he says
He says he will pay the debt tomorrow.
echei chipei katta-oattako hanta
yesterday to house went-came he says
He says he went home yesterday.
40
lo« COREAN MANUAL.
BXEKCISE LII.
1 vi Jr S 4 a -? ^1 ^ ^ ^ 4
nenan chyot'ako hatai nanan seult'a
as for you good is though say as for me refuse
Though you say it is gO'.)d I do not want it.
'z 4 x^. ^ =1 a|. ^ t^f 5 6] fe cf a ef c|. jI t^
nanan olch'imanan tarani-nan ta keuratako hanta
as for me am right but as for otlxers all am wrong say
I am right but every body else says I am wrong.
nai chipei ittako nameuikei mal hachi mara
I in house am to otheas speech to make arvid
Don't tell any one that I am at home.
* -^ ^ 4 7j 4 <^| <^ ^ v| H] t^^X t ^ 4
onareun kyereuri epsani naiil orako * hayera
as for today leisure as is not tomorrow to come say
I have no time today : tell him to come tomorrow.
echei pyengi issesye mot oattako hanta
yesterday sickness been not have come says
He says he could not come- as he was sick yesterday.
euiouen mari yak mekeumyen natkeittako hanta
doctor's speech medicine if eat will recover says
The doctor says he v.'ill get well if he will take the medicine.
ZL ^l^ -f-61] ^^ 5^ ^ JL *)- 6}: t ^ '^:il t ^
keu ireul ouei aroiye poaya alkeittako hanta
that affair above i.e. the King reported if only see will know says
He says he will only know by memorializing the King.
keuri mot Lfmyni k'eun naugp'ai toikeittako hanta
thus not i ' make great disaster will become says
He says thcie will be serious loss unless he can act thus.
* Orako is derived from tho gerundive in ra (or re) with ko as the
enclitic connective with hania, I say.
7.
INDIKEGT SPEECH. 169
Exercise LIIL
2.
3.
^^1 ^^^^ t^^f^ ^^l ^"^ ^^
chei eronsiD.ci alleunta-ko euiouen pora kasao
oneself fathsr is Rick-(says) doctor to see has gone
He says his father is sick and he has gone to see the doctor.
sonnim oatta-ko syoiil sara kasso
guest has come- (says) wine to buy has gone
He says guests have come and he has gone to buy wine.
P3'eng kotch'ikeitta-I.o pon koukeuro torakasso
sickness he will cure-(5ays) native to c;-untry has returned
He says he will cure hi illujess and has returned to his country.
chim ta ponaiyetta-ii:o naikei p'yenchi hayesso
load all has sent- (says) to me letter has made
He has written to say that he sent all the baggage.
kasye p'alla-ko haye-poara *
having gone to sell- (enclitic) having made-see
Go and see if he will sell.
nai keuri hatera-ko nameuikei mal mara
I thus said-(^;ays) toothers speech avoid
Do not tell any one that I said so.
' p»| i: ^} 3. i-'t S.^2^JL t^
nei mal tairo hamyen chyok'eitta-ko hanta
your speech according to if he does it will be good he says
He says it Vvili be all right if he acts as you say.
i keurat sseuki cbyot*a-ko te sa-ora-ko hanta
this basin using isgood-(says) more buy-to-come- says
He says the basin is useful and bids you buy some more.
6.
* haye-pota means to try ; ko preceding haye is euphonic and palla
the gerundive.
160 COREAN MANUAL.
THE DOUBLE IMPERATIVE.
While ko, the enclitic connective, can appear even without hanta (I say,
speak, etc.), and thus marks the close of the part of the phrase or sentence con-
taining the indirect speech, ko itself, when preceded by a gerund of a verb and
followed by the imperative hay era (say etc.,) is likewise dropped, and by elision
and contraction a new combination is formed in aira. Thus ora-ko hayera
becomes ora-hayera (to come-say), which again is further modified into or-aira,
with a double imperative sense meaning — tell him to come, order him to come, etc.
%
a.
EjKFJicisE JAY.
pohaingkoun naiii ilcheuki oraira
courier tomorrow early tell to come
Tell the courier to come early tomorrow.
^mokounkoun il pouchareni haraira
coolies work diligently tell to make
Tell the coolies to be diligent.
kyokounkoun syoul chom mekeuraira
chair coolies wine little tell to eat
Tell the chair bearers to drink a little wine.
elleuii pap chieuraira naika etai kakeitta
quickly rice tell to cook I somewhere will go
Tell him to get dinner ready soon ; I am going out.
hain tarye * pang chyenghi sseullaira *
servant to (postpos.) room cleanly tell to sweep
Tell the servant to sweep the room clean.
sseullaira from sseulla the gerund oisseulta, (see gerundive page 124),
ADDITIONAL
EXEECTSES.
41
162 COREAN MANUAL
3.
Exercise 1.
oumouri maiou kipso
well very deep
The well is very deep.
ettek'ei mantalkeisso
how will make
How do you want it made?
^ 5|7l 1 ^4-^
chal toikiral parao
well becoming I expect
I expect it well made.
i ket mouesai sseukeisso
this thing for what will use
What do you use this for?
elmana kouhao
how many desire
How many do you want?
chokom man tallahao
little only demand
I only want a little.
sikinan tairo hayera
ordering according make
Do as you are told.
pf-i tj] ^^] *J>fe
taran tai sseultai epso
another place use is not
It is of no other use.
6.
6.
EXERCISES.
163
EXEBCISE 1 (continued).
10.
IL
^1
ouei
why
^V^
neutkei oannanya
late have come
"Why^are you late.
onareun pyello neutchiant'a
to-day particularly late not is
I am not very late to-day.
i mal ch'eeumeuro teuresso
this speech for first time I heard
I heard this for the first time.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
^ t i ^i^ ^1 JL
ta han moyangio
all one kind is
They are all fo one kind.
43^4 ^71) 4^] ^io}
charireul k'eukei chapchi malla
mat largely to seize avoid
Don't take up so much space.
i pang neme chyopta
this room too small
The room is too small.
nanan etai ancheura
as for me where to sit
Where am I to sit ?
hao
make
>H
iren
this
ket naika kouhanan
thing I seeking
This is what I want.
kesio
article is
164 COEEAN ll^IANUAL.
Exercise 2
1 0] y]A] zt ?X 3\. ^4^J:4
i kesi keu ket koa katchiant'a
this thing that thing with not ahke
These two things are different.
2.
yekeui amo ket to epso
here a'ny thing ever not is
There is nothing here whatever.
him sse have poara
strength use make see
Try j'our utmost and see.
4 °| ^ -7 e ^) 7j| >k
mal chal karach'ikeisso
speech well will teach
I will teach you to speak well.
patheui p'oul maiyera
field's weeds weed
Weed the field.
tongsanei namou simera
garden v/ood sow
Plant trees in the garden.
matangeul chyenghi sseurera
compound clean sweep
Sweep the court clean.
ton chom kkouye chouo
money little having lent give
Lend me a little money.
6.
8.
EXEKCISES. 165
9.
EXEBCISE 2 {continued).
^^J 4*^1 ^^
keunsim chyoiingei isso
anxiety in midst is
I am in trouble.
aronch'yei malko
interfering avoid
Don't interfere.
naikei koankyeich'iant'a
to me no concern is
It does not matter to me.
10.
12.
13.
keu sarameun * pouchya yo
that man rich is
He is a rich man.
*! ^^-1 5l/| t^
i mareul mitchi malko
this speech to trust avoid
Don't believe that talk.
kil maiou nelpta
road very broad is
The road is very broad.
^*) <*|-1*} ^^±
taiki atari myetch'io
sir sons how many are
How many children have you ?
10. 6].^ ^ 4 ^ -^vf. ^6J41
atal toul koa ttal hana touesso
sons two and daughter one placed
I have two sons and one daughter.
* Oppositive case.
42
15.
166 COEEAN MANUAL.
4.
S.
Exercise 3.
4^1 t
t'ongei moul
in tub • water
Pour water
pouera
pour
in the tub.
il anan sarameul ponaio
work knowing man send
Send somebody who knows the work.
^ 7M) ^3L ^>k
tou kachi yenko isso
two kinds reason are
Ther« are two reasons for this.
nokkeun chom maiye
string little tied
Tie this string a little.
chouo
give
keu sarameun *
that man
han
one
nouni
eye
meresso
was blind
That man is blind in one eye.
hoap'o mouri nalkeisso
coloured cloth water will fly
This cloth will fade in washing.
7.. 6] 4| 0]^^ 4 4 -f -^
i ch'aik etaisye p'ankakhao
this book where print
Where was this book printed?
i ch'aik yekeuisye pakyesso
this book here was hammered
This book was printed here.
Oppositive case.
i
EXEECISES. 167
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15-
16.
EXERCISE 3 {co7itinued).
ninsaikhan saramio
avaricious man ii
He is avaricious.
^H ^ ^^^
ch'aikeul ta poasso
book all have seen
I have read all this book.
f T^ 4^1 ^^
p'oul ouheui chari p'yera
weed above mat spread
Spread the mat over the grass.
chip syeikan ta irhesso
house property all has lost
He has lost all his property.
^
5-^71 ^n^
tteut
match'oki eryepso
opinion
to fit difficiilt
He is hard to please.
0]^
^^^^ '>}^±
inan
saranghanan aheuio
as for this
lovable child is
This is my favourite child.
4:* ^^^1 i:3L
chyongcha parichi malko
seed to throw away avoid
Don't throw away the seeds.
ssi chal touetta simera
seeds well have place sow
Take care of the seeds and sow them.
J 68 COKEAN MANUAL.
6.
Exercise 4.
sokyeii ' tairo hayera
experience according make
Act according to experience.
maiou keurat toiyesso
very wrong has become
It is exceedingly wrong.
neunghi kamtang hakeisso
able responsible will make
I have full qualifications.
oral kyentaichi mot hakeitta
long to endure not will make
I cannot endure it any longer.
pyengi chom nasso
sickness little better
He is a little better.
maiou isyanghan irio
very strange work is
This is very strange.
ettek'ei saingkak hao
how think make
What do you think?
kakpakhi koulchi malla
rudely to behave avoid
Don't behave rudely.
EXERCISES. 169
EXERCISE 4 (continued).
^^ ^e| |73) %M]v}.
ouri touri hamkkeui hapsyeita
we two together make
Let us act together.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
kapsal koahi chouesso
price too many has given
He gave too much for it.
chom koupko tto chichyera
httle boil and also fry
Boil some and fry some.
koueumyen chal mekkeitta
if boil well will eat
It will taste best boiled.
415. -S^l 4t^4
pouiro monchi sseurera
with brush dust wipe
Wipe the dust off with a brush.
^^] y}t t^} ^J'^
tetai kamyen ilk'i souipta
slow if go to lose is easy
If you are slow you will lose it.
^ 4 <*] ^ ^ 4 ^
nelp'ani nelpko kilta
board broad and long is
The boards are broad and long.
chyekeui marou nohara
there flooring place
Put the flooring there.
43
170 COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 5.
1- 4^1 f ^ :£^^
orei p'oung nyen teuresso
this year plentiful year has entered
There are full crops this year.
ssal kapsi tterechil-teut hao
rice price fall probably make
Bice will probably fall in price.
paiksyengi kekchyeng epso
people anxiety not is
The people will not be anxious.
chyen nyeneun hyonngnyen ichio
before year year of scarcity is
Last year was a year of scarcity.
chei tokkeuiro chei pareul chchikesso
his axe his foot has cut
He has brought this trouble on himself.
6.
7.
4^J ^^i ^vl-f-a.
tongsaing katch'i * ch'inhao
brothers like friendly
They are as friendly as brother.
keu saram mal hampouro hao
that man speech recklessly makes
That man speaks recklessly.
s| ^^^ y.^^
a
nameui sachyengeul moronta
others aifairs knows not
He does not consider anybody.
* Adverb.
EXEKCISES.
171
EXERCISE 5 {continued).
10.
11.
12.
13.
1
this
14.
15.
16.
^1 %
°i
^a^-f T^
chei il man saingkak hao
his work only think makes
He thinks only of himself.
nai
my
sokyeneun keure-ch'ant'a
experience thus is not
My experience is diiferent.
te
more
kouhal ket
desiring thing
I want nothing more.
epso
not is
«^) ^ ^ ^l 6] JL
yeisaron irio
ordinary work is
It is an ordinary affair.
saiei sotongi taitan
period reports exceeding
There are all kinds of reports now.
hao
make
^ 7f ^ v^ 5| Ji.
nalli nalka ryemnye toio
war producing fear becomes
They are afraid there M-ill be war.
4^1 <•)
koanoueni
officials ran away
The officials have run away
tomanghayesso
1^4 "vV^l ^^
yekchek manhi nasso
rebels many have produced
There were maiiv rebels.
172 COEEAN MANUAL.
3.
4.
Exercise 6.
paiami issani * patpi kao
serpent is quickly go
There is a snake ; go quickly.
^^] ^^ J.t>k
tasi salphye pokeisso
again having inquired I will see ,
I will make further inquiries.
t^ 1^1 ^ ^^
pyello pounpyelhal ket epso
other distniguishing thing not is
There is no other means of distinction.
t^ t T^n ^^
talli hal souka isso
other making way is
There is another way of doing it.
<^]si ^J S 5!>fc
iren ket tto isso
this thing more is
There are more of this kind.
'"^I "^l-f- f-f-fi-
tteutei maiou haphao
with feeling very corresponds
This suits my views.
naika hangsyang keurek'ei arasso
I always thus knew
I was always of this opinion.
>|;^6]6}: >7) ^ ^g dl
chikeumiya kkaitatkeisso
now only I will realise it
It is only now that I realise it.
* Ni has the force of a semicolon ; see p. 63.
EXEKCISES.
173
10.
11.
12.
EXERCISE 6 (continued).
*)
^it -^^1^1
Tl} 6
1
k'areul mouteuikei
mara
this
knife bluntly
Con't blunt this knife.
avoid
nanan pereuikei ssoyesso
as for me by bee have shot
I have been stung by a bee.
4: ^3.
ot helko terepta
clothes torn and dirty
My clothes are torn and dirty.
«a
K ^^^
ppara nipera
wash (them and) dress
Wash them and wear them.
13.
t "^3. i: «f^ 4) -f-^
syoul
wine
14.
15,
16.
^1
keurat
wrongly
mekko nal mata ch'youi
drink and day every drunk
He drinks and gets drunk every day.
4) t
ch'youihan
drmik
fl**) "^4
sarami
men
mant'a
many
There are many drunken men.
katta
same
5!^d ^}| 4
mitch'in saram koa
mad men with
They are like madmen.
toiyessini tasi sichak
have become again begin
This is all wrong; try it again.
hao
make
hao
make
44
1T4 COREAN MANUAL.
2.
3.
Exercise 1.
1. ^^. ^> 4 7^4
chyekeui ka setkera *
there go stand be
Go there and stand.
i ot chal kiouera
these clothes well mend
Mend these clothes well.
hai sye p'yenei isso
sun west side is
The sun is in the west.
^^1 ^4 t4 -t-^
chei choireul hangpok hao
his fault acknowledge make
He confesses his fault.
kireul ttarakachi mot hao
road to accompany not make
I cannot keep up with you.
tomochi elmana toio
altogether how many become
How many are there altogether ?
.3.5.73^ -e|| J. of 4
morokeisso hyei poara
I will not know count see
I do not know ; count and see.
nemou chyeke sseuchi mot hao
too littla to use not make
There is too little to be of any use.
^'' Setkera se-itkera.
5.
8.
EXEECISES. 175
10.
11.
12.
16.
EXEBCISE 7 (continued).
chyello keuri toiyesso
naturally thus become
It became so of itself.
t ^ ^^1 ^} S *] -^
nelli tankin saramio
broadly travelling men are
They are great travellers.
moun kyeni mant'a
bearing seeing many
They have had great experience.
4
H 6
4^*1-1
tou sarameun * syangkeukio
two men adversaries are
These two men are enemies.
ouri niout saramio
we neighbour men are
We are neighbours.
1* ^d f ''^l '^\'i ^
chinheulkei f ppachyesso
mud have fallen
I have fallen into the mud.
15. ^^1 4^6f Vjvfc
pathei namouri nasso
in field vegetables have produced
The vegetables have come up.
moul chye p'yenei + sao
water that side lives
He lives on that side of the water.
Oppositive case. i Locative case.
176 COEEAN MANUAL.
1.
2.
Exercise 8.
chye saram choukkei * toiyesso
that man dying has become
That man is going to die.
-T-^ ^Ji 4^7^ "^4
ouri chipei chyouika mant'a
our house rats are many
Our house is overrun with rats.
achik eroun mot toiyesso
as yet man not become
He is not yet of full age.
*a^ "f*^ 4-^
ilcheuk noue chao
early resting sleep
Go to bed early.
6. A] ^1 oj; ^ «1 T ^ 4:
syei ouel man hepi hayesso
year month only waste made
He was only wasting time.
kamcharal eteul sou epso
potatoes obtaining way not is
There are no means of getting potatoes.
7.
4.
tr^y}
^
JL^
i4
homeuika
son
pota
nasso
hos
hand
compared
superior
The hoe
is handier.
yamchyenhan pouinio
charming woman is
She is a pretty woman.
Adverb.
EXEKCIHES. 177
9.
10.
11.
EXERCISE 8 (continued).
nophi kere touera
highly hang place
Hang it high up.
kere toul tai epso
hang placing place not is
There is no place to hang it.
i pyengeul chal kotch'ikeisso
this sickness well will cure
Can you cure this sickness ?
yak meko chyosyep chal hao
medicine eat recovery well make
Take medicine and be careful.
mal chamkkan poutchapara
horse little take hold of
Hold the horse a little.
pai arai isso
ship below is
It is down in the hold.
12.
15.
16.
ourinan ryangsik epso
as for us supplies not is
We are out of food.
*>] ^^ '^]A ^ t^
i hainan nouika tang hao
this loss who responsible make
Who makes good this loss?
45
178 COREAN MANUAL.
3.
4.
5.
7.
Exercise 9.
^-1 ^4 J:
cL'aik sseukeisso
books will write
Will you write a booh ?
mot sseukeisso
not will write
I will not write (a book).
ouei keuri hao
why thus make
Why so?
7l 1 'd ^
kyeral epso
leisure not is
I have no leisure.
-I 'i,''] "J 4
pol iri marit'a
about to look work many
I have much business to attend to.
'i^]jL
f a
mousam irio
what work
What kind of business?
chyangsa hanta
trade I make
I am tradinef.
a :^}^ *a^^)*J:^t
chyanpjsa pyenpyench'ianso
trade good not is
Trade is not good.
EXEECISES. 179
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
EXEBCISE 9 {continued).
hoaryounsyen ani oasso
fire-wheel-ship not has come
A steamer has not come.
yang moki pis-ssa
foreign cloth dear is
Piece goods are dear.
syek you manhi teureoasso
stone oil many has entered
Has plenty of kerosene oil arrived ?
chikeumeun chokom man oasso
as for the present little only has come
Only a little has come at present.
keuremyen ettek'ei hao
if it is thus how makes it
What is then to be done ?
nanan morokeisso
I will not know
I cannot tell.
hal Bouka epso
about to make plan not is
There is nothing to be done.
44 ae^ -?4
olt'a keuri hacha
true thus make
Good ; do so.
180 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 10.
^y} ^^ ^^ 7}^
naika Syeoul oUa kanta
I Seoul ascend go
I am going to Seoul.
2. 6^ »^ t^ 7]. 7^>t
ena ttai kakeisso
what time will go
Wlien will you go?
3. ^1 -^ Jl 3. eH ^
chikeum morokeisso
now I will not know
I cannot tell at present.
iri epsamyen nai-il kao
work if not is to-morrow I go
If nothing prevents me I'll go to-morrow.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1 ^^^ JL^ ^^^
mal t'akeisso pokyo t'akeisso
horse will ride chair will ride
Will you go by chair or on horseback ?
yekeui chyoheun mal isso
here good horse is
Are there good horses here ?
yekeui innan mal ta chyekeun kesio
here being horse all small things are
The horses here are all small.
mal saknaiye onera
horse wages take out come
Hire a horse.
EXEKCISES. 181
9.
JO.
11.
12.
EXEBCISE 10 (continued).
ton elmana choukeisso
money how much will you give
How much money will you give.
taran earam elmana chouo
other man how much gives
How much do others give?
t I^ 5J ^ i
han mareui tan nyang sik
one horse five nyang each
Five nyang for each horse.
^ ^f/d ^^ ^^^
nai ham poulle onera
my servants call come
Call my servants.
mal chim sirera
horse burden load
Load the horse.
chim mant'a sokei sirera
baggage many on ox load
There's much baggage; load bulls.
mal epso so man isso
horse is not ox only is
There are no horses ; only bulls.
enchei tora oa molla
when back come not know
When do you return ? I cannot say.
13.
14.
15.
16.
46
182 COREAN MANUAL.
2.
Exercise 11.
^^ 51 V ^
chal innanya
well are
Are you well ?
yei chal isso
yes well I am
Yes ; I am well.
pap mekennanya
rice have eaten
Have you dined ?
pap ani mekesso
rice not have eaten
I have not dined.
t -J 1^
syoul man meke
wine only I eat
I only take wine.
tampai innanya
tobacco is
Is there any tobacco?
t^l ^} ^^
tampai sa oasso
tobacco buy have come
I bought tobacco.
i nyangpan noui taikio
this gentlemaxi who house is
Who is this gentleman?
i).
8.
EXEKCISES. 183
10,
12,
18,
14.
15.
16.
EXEBCISE 11 (continued).
yekeui irman saramio
here being man is
He belongs to this place.
syengi mouessio
name what is
What is his name?
y% /^ a^ 6) X
Pang syepang
Pang Mr.
He is Mr. Pang.
lO
is
Hi 4jL
nai ch'inko
my friend
He is my friend.
Sl
yo
is
chyenei ani poasso
formerly not have seen
I never met him before.
chyobeui kachye onera
paper bring come
Bring me paper.
p'yenchi sseukeisso
letter I will write
I intend writing a letter.
pout ani sa oasso
pen not buy come
I did not buy a pen.
184 COREAN MANUAL.
2.
Exercise 13.
1 ^/il ^.^ ^^
tai-in sonnim oasso
great man guest has come
Visitors have come, sir.
myet pouni * osennanya
how many gentlemen have come
How many gentlemen are there?
'*'l 1 *| J: ^ *>}'<^
sei poun io ne ananya
three gentlemen are you know
There are three. Do you know them ?
na mot poa achi mot hao
I not seen to know not make
I know nothing of them whatever.
3.
5.
kyokoun t'ako oannanya
chair-coolie ride and came
Have they come in chairs?
ta mal t'ako oasso
all pony ride and came
They all came on horseback.
7. ^f ol 3J vr
8.
hain iunanya
servant is
Have they any servant ?
^ ^ "^ ^ ^ !i ^
keuisyou myengham teuryesso
jBag-hand card presented
The attendant brought their cards.
* Nucaerative of gentlemen.
EXERCISES. 185
10.
11.
12.
15.
EXE BOISE 12 {continued).
^ 4t 4jI a
nai ch'inhan ch'inko yo
my friendly friend is
They are my good friends.
sarangei moisye teuryera
in guest-room attend present
Show them into the drawing-room.
chokom anchye kitario
little having sat wait
Sit down and wait a little.
ch'a poue taichyep hay era
tea poured welcome make
Pour out some tea for them.
*| 1-^ ^ ^]±
1 pouneun noui sio *
this gentleman who is
Who is this gentleman ?
alko chinaio
know and pass
Let me introduce you.
nai tongnai ch'inko yo
my village friend is
A friend from my village.
16. <| 6] .^ol o]x
taiki f chyouin io
house master is
Are you the master, sir ?
Sio please. + Tailci sir.
47
186
COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 13.
1.
2.
4.
5.
6-
7.
chikeum
now
^4 ^^H :a"J-a:
ch'acha oassini
seek have come
Thanks for your visit.
komapso
thanks
^4;
t^ *|-i
mousam malsam io
what speech is
Don't mention it.
^>
oikouk saram taran nara
foreign man another nation
A foreigner visiting another country,
v}^ ^^
5!^1
etchi
how
^ *I -I *hH
chyouineul ani
master not
Why not call on you, sir ?
oasye
come
^>fc
ch'atkeisso
will seek
^^J
hamkkewi
1^)^
oai
I
i
this
chyemsim hamkkewi hapsyeita
tifi&n together let us make
Have tiffin with me.
ehopaneul kat mekko
breakfast just eat and
I have just had my breakfast
oasso
came
^>
ket mat issani
thing taste is
Try this ; it tastes nice
$!>tH >y.^j^
chapsouo
(please) eat
mat issye
taste being
It is good.
H ^^ "^^
chal mekso
well eat
I've dinad well.
EXERCISES. 187
10.
EXERCISE 13 (continued).
nai chipeuro ban pen osio
my house one time come please
Come and see me some time.
)tyereul issamyen ch'acha karita
leisure if is seek go
I will call when I can find time.
nari chyemeuressini * kapsyeita
day late let us go
It is getting late ; I must go.
jie| ^^] ^}^ ^^ tJL
keuri patpi kamyen mouet hao
thus quickly if go what make
Why in such a hurry ?
chom ancbye niaki-na hao
little sat story some make
Sit down and talk a bit.
chamkkan pol iri isso
directly seeing work is
I have some business waiting.
12.
13.
15.
10.
iri onera kyokoun poullera
here come chair-coolie call
Boy ! call the chair-coolies.
tai-in moisiko kakera
great man serve and go
Go and see His fixcellency out.
Ni has the force of a semicolon ; see p. 63.
188 COPvEAN MANUAL.
7.
Exercise 14.
1. ry}x^6)] vf^ 6|wv|:
matangei namou innanya
in court trees are
Are there trees in the courtyard ?
2 c^a x^^ c^jl ^ oV ^^
taran namou epko kkot man isso
other wood not is and flowers only are
There are no trees, only^^fiowers.
kkot p'ouiye poki chyot'a
flowers have flowered seeing is good
The flowers in bloom are a pretty sight.
tongsanei silkoa namou isso
in garden fruit wood is
There are fruit trees in the garden.
keu silkoa mekki chyot'a
that fruit eating is good
That fruit is good to eat.
pathei p'ouri mant'a
in field weeds many are
The field is full of weeds.
f ^^ ^]a ^t >3*^ef
p'oul monchye maiko namoul simera
weeds first pull and vegetables sow
First pull out the weeds and then sow vegetables.
6| ^^ ^0] *J^
i pathei * p'ouri epso
this field weeds not are
There are no weeds in this field.
* Locative case.
EXEECISES. 189
9.
10.
11.
12.
EXERCISE 14 (continued).
^^t 'I't ^J H 4
keuremyen namoul simera
if thus vegetables sow
Sow vegetables then.
^ ^-^ ^"^1 5!^j -f JL
ta simeun houei etchi hao
all sown after how make
After they are all sown, what next ?
nal mata moul chouera
day each water give
Water them every day.
o] "^^ s.^ i.^] 51^
i namou chyoheun yelmai isso
this wood good fruit is
There is fine fruit on these trees.
houei silkoa chal yelkeisso
afterwards fruit well will open
There will be good fruit by-and-by.
nari kameumyen kkotch'i ta marakeis8o
day if dry flowers all will dry up
If the weather is dry, the flowers will all dry up.
^i*^l t ^t ^^ IJ^
ehyenyekei moul choumyen kekchyeng epta
in evening water if give fear not is
If you water them in the evening, it will be all right.
j.% «17}- -ky} ^^
onal pika olka pota
to-day rain coming likely I see
I think it will rain to-day.
.13.
14.
15.
16.
48
190 COEEAN MANUAL.
1-
2.
3.
Exercise 15.
^0] ^t-tH i-4 ^^ y\
nari syeneurhani koukyeng chal ka
day fresh sight-seeing well go
It is fine day to go for a walk.
onareun * etai ch'youriphakeisso
to-day where will saunter
Where will you go to-day for a walk ?
kal tai manheuntai al sou epso
going place being many knowing means not is
There are so many places to go to, I can't tell.
n»i tongmo hantai ka m( 'ire-po
my companion before go inquiio see
Go and ask my friend.
^\^ 7^4 "^^ ^i.*a 7)^1. -^
onareun kyereur epso nai-il kapsyeita
to-day leisure not is to-morrow let us go
We have no time to-day ; let us go to-morrow.
y\^ % ^ % A/'i<^
kamyen han sou il toikeisso
if go one several day will become
How many days will you be gone ?
i saii nari kameuressini
this period day has dried
It has been dry weather of late.
s. ^>^-) o| x^ u^e^,] ^x\
koksiki ta marakei t tointa
crops all dry become
The crops are all being burnt up.
6.
Oppositive case. + Adverb.
EXEECIBES. 191
10.
11.
EXERCISE 15 {continued),
pi omyen pori dial tointa
rain if comes barley well become
If there is rain, we will have a good crop of darley.
echyekkeui noun nianhi oatta
yesterday snow much came
There was a heavy fall of snow yesterday.
^0| ;x|4| 4>^ 4 5 ^^
nari ch'ioue koksik chal mot tointa
weather being cold crops well not become
The season is cold and the crops don't ripen properly.
o]^j\ ^J^H jL^-8: ^^
echyekkeui chipteni onareun tepta
yesterday cold to-day is warm
Yesterday it was cold; to-day it is warm.
koksik chal toimyen ssal kap narikeitta
crops well if become rice price will descend
If there are good crops, the price of rice will fall.
^^ 4 4 ^1 -1^^ "^0}^-
ouri nara keuiho * ollye tarara
our nation flag having ascended hang up
Hoist the national flag.
nari etououl ttai ke ui naryeaa
day darkening time flag descend
Lower the flag at dusk.
12.
13.
16.
nal mata keu tairo hayera
day every thus according make
Do this every day.
* Keui or keuiho flag. Here the latter is better.
192 COREAN MANUAL.
X.
2.
Exercise 16.
Chyosyen soka maiou k'euta
Corean ox very big is
The Corean ox is very large.
chim manhi sitko pat chal kalta
loads many carries and field well tills
Good for carrying loads and cultivating the fields.
*) ^^ -fTl^ zt-|7] ^^^^
i syourei moukeoue kkeueulki eryepta
tlfts cart being heavy drawing is difficult
The cart is heavy and difficult to draw.
him man sseumyen chal kkeueulkcitta
strength only if use well will draw
If you only exert yourself you will draw it easily.
3.
5.
6.
7.
hoangsokei * meiyeya chal kkeueulta
bull cafrrying well pulls
A bull yoked to it will pull it better.
*] ^^ ^3, ^1} ^*^ef
i cheumsaing molko naka mekyera
these animals drive and out go feed
Drive the animals out to feed.
4<>]-;*l ^^ «i^l ^cf
songachi nosai manch'i k'euta
calf mule size is big
A calf is about as big as a mule.
mangachi k'eukinan nakoui katta
foal as for size ass equal is
A foal is as big as an ass.
* Locative case.
J
EXEECISES.
193
EXERCISE 16 {continued).
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
lo.
16.
I
ri
mareuii sarop
as for horse three years
chinaimyen
if pass
4^1
^^^
cLvokhi
t'akeitta
sufficiently
will ride
If a horse is over three years old, it is fit to ride upon.
tovachi
chip toyachinau * moi tovachi man mot
house pig hill pig equal not
The domestic pig is not so big as the wild pig.
hata
make
1
this
7)\ ^}Jl4 4 ^fll
kai saonaoa parameul
dog fierce men
This dog h fierce, it bites men.
katkai hachi
long distance drive and near to make
Drive it far away and don't go near it.
melli
chchotko
moulta
bites
mara
afvoid
sout
male
talkeun ^^ ouroum char
fowl cry well
The cock crows well.
ounta
crows
am talkeun * al manhi natk'eitta
female fowl egg many will produce
The hen lays plenty of eggs.
chip cheumseung mekimyen rika f
house animal if rear profit
The rearing of domestic animals is profitable
i4
m&nt'a
many
>| ^] >fc ?|
1
this
sai
bird
^7]
sorai teutki
sound hearing
This bird sinss well.
S4
chyot'a
is cTQod
Oppositive case.
t Though spelt rika, it is read ika.
49
194
COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 17
mousam
what
2.
^ao) $!>fc A^t ^a**) ^^
4.
in isso
work is
What is the matter?
yoranhan in
riotous work
There is a row on.
1880
is
^}l*l -rl^l n^'^
or
sarami oumourei ppachyetta
man in well has fallen
A man has fallen into the well.
ouei ppachyesso sarami milchye nemechyetta
why has fallen man pushed fell over
How did he fall ? He was pushed over by someone.
% ^ 4^1 ^ia^y
t
mal tal ttai torei* ketch'yetta
pony riding time stone struck against
He struck against a stone while riding
keurek'ei malkei tterechyefcta
thus from horse fell down
He accordingly fell from his horse.
H4
ereum
ice
5! ^ ^ ^ t
mitkeureoue pal poutch'il sou
being slippery foot joining means
The ice is slippery and one cannot hold one's feet.
poutch'il
^ ^4
epta
not is
pika
rain
HI 4^ ^'^l -S^^'^
t»
U
manhi
oasye tami mounhechyetta
many came wall fell in ruins
After the heavy rain the wall all fell down.
it -Iv^ ^^ ^^K
mokoun poulle kotch'ye ssaraira f
coolie call renew build make
Call coolies and tell them to rebuild it.
Locative case.
^Ssaraira — ssara hay era.
EXEPwCTSES.
195
EXERCISE ir [cQutinned).
10.
11.
12.
13.
11.
15.
16.
3.^ *a ^i-
5
i tou mokouii il chal mot
this two coolies work well not
These two coolies do not work well.
hao
make
sakton
wages
mokoun
coolies
^ 3.^3, cj-i jLt -Iv^ef
choue ponaiko taran mokoun
given send and other coolies
Pay them off and get other coohes.
hanahei * ton eima sik
one money how much each
How much shall I give each coolie?
poullera
call
chouo
give
4JI -J) 7j^| 5f?f
^J^l
oumoul p'anan tai kiphi
well digcjing place deeply
"When digging a well, dig it deeply.
kipkei p'amyen moul chal sosananta
deeply if dig water well springs up
If you dig deep, you will get plenty of w^ater.
po-haing-koun Syeoul-sye narye
foot-going cooHe Seoul from descended
The courier has come from Seoul.
p'ara
dig
oatta
has come
echyekkeui ttenasye ouei chikeum oasso
yesterday departed why now have come
He left yesterday, why has he only arrived now?
y^] -^^ -& ^^-f*i
neutkei
late
omyen ton kamhaye
if come money reduced
If he arrives late, cut his pay.
chouera
give
* Locative case.
19(5 ' COKEAN ^MANUAL.
^a
Exercise 18.
I
^i^]
4^
7}y] 0]^^^
maJ
t'ako
sanei
olia
kaki eryepso
horse
ride and
hill
ascend
going is difficult
It is difficult to go
up hill on horseback.
2.
JLii
^3.
^y?]
=^^.4
pokyo
t'akj
kaki
souipta
chair
ride and
going
is easy
8.
It is easy going by chair.
kere kamyen te p'yenhata
having walked if go more comfortable
(But) going on foot is easiest.
^ Is jLii SjL vj-lr f ejT 7f4
nenan pokyo t'ako nanan mal t'ako kacha
as for you chair ride and as for me pony ride and let us go
You take a chair and I'll take a pony.
elleun kapsyeita hai chyemeulkeisso
quickly let us go sun will darken
Let us go quickly ; it is getting dark.
hai chikeissini keuphi toraka
sun will set quickly back go
Get back quickly, the sun is setting.
pamei kato koaiikyeich'ianso
at night go th®ugh concern not is
It does not matter though we go at night.
kil chyok'o chyou mak katkapta
road good and wine booth is near
Tho road is good and the inn is near.
EXERCISES. 197
10.
EXEMCISE 18 (continued).
morei naika ch'iiikoral ch'acha kakeitta
daj' after ^o-morrow I friend visit will go
I shall call on my friend the day after to-morrow.
O] ^13.7} ^i ^61) 4^
i ch'inkoka taran kotei sao
this friend another in place lives
This friend lives in anther locality.
11 7}^ 7^ 6| ^^3.^^y}7]0]^^
kanan kiri hemlniko mere kaki eryepta
going road dangerous and distant going difficult
The road is long and dangerous and difficult to go.
'■'■ "J-^ 7^*) 3!^ ^ ^^ y}
apheui kangi issye mot kenne ka
in front river being not across go
There is a river ahead which cannot be crossed.
13.
14.
15.
16.
\i]7} ^ii ;^uj 7}^] 5 ^^
pika omyen kenne kachi mot hao
raiu if come across to go not make
If there is rain, it cannot be crossed.
tari epko pai to epsani ettek'ei hao
bridge not is and boat also not is how make
There is neither bridge nor boat. "What is to be done ?
haro chinaimyen chyokhi kenne kakeitta
one day if pass able across will go
If you wait a day, you will be able to get across.
^1 *i^^ ^ ^ 51 JL
Syeoul yekeuisye myen ni toio
Seoul from here how many mile become
How many miles is it from here to Seoul?
50
198
COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 19.
HH H ^i 5|v] 4 5|.f7^
yere
several
ni
7a *
an toini chom ittaka
not become little directly
It is no distance ; you will be there directly.
t\l ?lt] <^x a^7^
taran kiri epko cbeurem-kil
amotber road not is and by-way
There is no other road ; there is a short cut.
kakeitta
will go
tF4:
ISSO
is
^6| ^v^ J.^ ,1
tan
moon
keu chimi
that package
kaki
olla omyen kil
ascend if comes road going
If the moon rises, it will be easy going.
s4
chyot'a
is good
moukeoue
being heavy
t ^> I *l >] ^1 5 t^
ban
one
sarami
man
chichi mot
to carry not
hanta
make
5.
That package is heavy, it needs more than one man to carry it.
tou-6 saram poulle chye kakera
two or more men having called carried go
Call two or more men to take it away.
chyenyekei etai ka chakeisso
at night where go will sleep
Where will you go and. stay for the night?
0]^]^^ ^^-^t
8.
syoul
wine
etaitenchi etououmyen memeulkeitta
wherever if dark I {vill stay
I will stay wherever I happen to get to at dusk.
makei t teure ka potchim chal
booth enter go baggage v/ell
See to your baggage when you enter the inn.
^^J ^^ ^>7|4
matkyera
entrust
One li is equal, approximately, to one-third of an English mile. + Locative case.
EXERCISES. 199
EXERCISE 19 {continued).
«
10.
12.
moulken ta chal touetta
articles all well I have placed
I have taken charge of all the articles.
chikeum ka pap patpi chiera
now go food quickly prepare
Go now and get me some food at once.
pap mekeun houei nai sanei olla kakeitta
food eaten after I hill up will go
I intend going up the hill after dinner.
a 4^1 ^^ 51^ 4 ^^
keu sanei * kounsa issye chin ch'yetta
that hill soldier being fort has built
The soldiers on that hill have built a fort.
yekeui k'eun chyel to itko amcha to itta
here large temple also is and shrine also is
There is here a large monastery and also a shrine.
A^ 7]-^] ^4 ^1 4 H|<i ±^^
pata kaei * chyekeun pai sa,ng naiye onera
set. edge small boat hire take out come
Hire a small boat at the seaside.
nai hoa-ryoun-syenei * ollakakeisso
I fire-wheel-ship will ascend
I intend going on board the steamer.
mil mouri raanhi teureoasye nakachi mot hanta
pushing water many having entered to go out not make
The tide is coming in and you cannot go out.
13.
14.
15.
16
* Locative case.
200 ■ COREAN MANUAL.
EXEIiCIBE 20.
6.
1 ^ 4^ i^ H-t ^> 'i^
k'eun parai)i poulmycii nakal mat epta
great wind if blow going out taste not is
There is no pleasure ni going out if it is blowing.
2. ti| ^] ^ ^ 4 V| 7^ «^ 'i ^ ^
pi kaimyen pyet nani kil ttenakeitta
rain if stop sunshine come out road will depart
I will start when the smi comes out arjd the rain stops.
parameul poni onal kakinan * koankycich'iant'a
wind see to-day going no concern
As the wind is to-day it is all right for going.
4. %]0l^ C^v^ ^]7} ^7\ JL^
nai-ireun chyengnyeng pika olka pola
as for to-morrow certainly rain come probable see
It will certainly rain to-morrow.
i- 1 Ji ^ 4 -I 4iL "k^l^}
kouram pomyen pi oi cheungchyo alkestta
cloud if see rain coming forecast will know
If you watch the clouds you can tell if it is going to rain.
6. >it -^^,| 6].^) nj^l pj^cf
san Guei aukai manhi tephita
hill above mist many covers
A heavy mist hangs over the hills.
ankai pcsyechimyen nari tepkeitta
miat if undress day will be warm
If the mist rises, the day will be warm.
ttahi ch'youkch'youkhani koksik dial tointa
ground wet crops well become
The ground is damp and there will be good crops.
Oppositive case
EXERCISES. 201
10.
EXEBCISE 20 (continued).
4 14 ^3. ^j=°f ^1^
hou tareun tepko chyangma chinta
after month hot and rainy season carries
Next month is hot and the rainy season sets in.
ne enchei oannanya keu sai ouei ani oannanya
you when came that time why not came
^Vhen did you come ? ^Tay did you not come then ?
mouet hakiro * pochi mot hayesso
what making to see not make
"NMiere were you that I did not see you?
*! ^-^^1 lAi t^] 5l^ ^1^ ^^
i cheueumei pounyohan iri issye chikeum oasso
this period troublesome work being now have come
I've been very busy and have only just now come.
myen nal manei oasso naheul manei oasso
h ow many days period have come four days period have come
How many days have you been here ? I have been here four days.
11.
12
14.
JL 4*^1 44 ^J^l ^}^^
o houei naika chipei kakeitta
uoon after I to house will go
I intend going home in the afternoon.
chokom issamyen nachai toikeitta
little if is noon will become
It will be noon in a little.
16.
"^ ofcf )J;») -^X ^'-j 4^1 ^y^^
nal mata nitchi malko sik houei onera
day every to forget avoid food after come
Don't forget to come every day after dinner.
* Instrumental ease.
51
202 COEEAN MANUAL.
2.
8.
Exercise 21.
chyoung koiik sarameun lueri kkakko
Middle Nation men head cut and
Chinese shave their heads, and,
^^ ^1-1-8: 4f ^^^
Chyosyen sarameun syangtou chchanta
Corean men top-knot weave
Coreans bind their hair up into a knot
^ ^4.*) S^l- ^H ^^\
noun chyengsini chyoha melli ponta
eye spirit being good far sees
He has good eyesight and can see a long way.
H^y} 44
noun chyengkeuika pouchyok hata
eye spairit insufficient makes
He has weak eyes
syokyengeun* pochi mot hako
blind to see not makes and
The blind cannot see and,
koui mekerinan * teutchi mot hanta
deaf man to hear not makes
The deaf cannot h ear.
pengerinan* mal mot hako
dumb speech not makes and
The dumb cannot speak, and,
ancheul panginan tannichi mot hanta
sitting room-man * to walk not makes
The lame cannot walk.
* Oppositivo case
t
EXEECISES.
203
EXERCISE 21 {continued).
«1 e| 6^) t 5!^ ^J 4 H 4 ^ 4^ ^ ^ ^
meriei t'el itko ip koa ni oa hye patak ta
on head hair is and mouth and teeth and ton^e surface all
He has hair on his head, a mouth, teeth, and a tongue.
itta
is
10.
J- ^-8:*) ^f- ^1 'la H 5: 5^^
keu neulkeunika koui mekko ni to
that old man ear eat and teeth also
That old man is both deaf and toothless.
11.
mal teutchi
speech to hear
i\ ^k
5 -fa .
mot hako koki chal
not make and flesh well
He can neither hear nor eat.
mot
not
ppachyetta
has fallen
meknanta
eats
12.
^)5.
mal
S5. ^ ^a
kouiro mal teutko k'oro nai matko
with ear speech hear and with nose smell smell and
One hears with the ear and smells with the nose.
13.
mal hako eumsik to
speech make and food also
One speaks and eats with the mouth.
ipeuro
with mouth
meke
eats
14 7] %
kich'am
^a
cough
p'arei
in arm
nako mok apheuko heri to
come out and neck sore and loins also
A cough induces pain both in the neck and loins.
apha
sore
him issye moukeon chim chal
strength being heavy pack well
His arm is strong and he can lift a heavy weight.
t ^k -^^
teunta
lifts
16.
nei
your
sonkarak chareuko sont'opi
fingers short and nails
Your fingers are short but your nails are long.
kilta
long
204 COREAN I^IAXUAL.
EXERCLSE 32.
kil kanan ttai manhi aissesso
road walking time many suffered
I have suffered much during the journey.
kil melko tto hemhao
road long and also dangerous
The road was long and also dangerous.
3. >i] ^ ^ ^y ^1 -?- ^ t H ^1 «<^ 5! V^
chikeum naika maiou konhani pouin pang innanya
now I very tired empty room is
I am very tired ; have you an empty room ?
* *1 «^^1 ^"i ^^ ^}^^] 4t-S^
an pangei sonnim issye sarangei ryouhao *
inside room guests being drawing-room stay
There are guests in the inner room ; put up in the drawing-room
i pangi moutenhaye chyokhi ryouhakeisso *
this room comfortable able will stay
I will take this room ; it is all right.
totchari chyengch'iant'a sai ket patkoua onera
mat clean not is new article changed come
The mat is not clean ; bring a new one.
6.
7.
3.
^4^ ^^ ^-^« H-l ^"^^
totchari chal p'yeko nipoul tephera
mat well spread and blanket cover
Spread the mat properly and put on a blanket.
potchim pang anheuro teurye onera
baggage room inside entered come
Take my baggage inside the room.
* The r is more or less mute, — youhao, etc.
EXEKCISES. 205
EXEBCISE 22 (continued).
poul ttaii-tenchi an ttaii-teiichi koankyeicb'iant'a
fire burn whether not burn v/hether no concern is
It does not matter whether you hght a fire or not.
teung poul hyemyen chyok'eitta
lamp fire if you light it vTill be good
It will be all right if you light a lamp.
nanan p'yengsangeisye * chom noue chakeitta
as for me level table little rested will sleep
I intend to lie down a little and have a sleep.
10.
tampai mekeun houei ka noue chao
tobacco eaten after go rested sleep
Take a smoke and then go to sleep.
13. t "-f'Hl ^^ °j-| y]A) «JU.V|:
syoul makei f mousam mekeul kesi innanya
wine booth what eatable things are
What have they got to eat in the inn ?
14. t ^J- ^^ t ^ ^N 4
pap sang notk'o I syoul te kachye oa
rice table place and wine also bring come
Bring me dinner and some wine.
chyouin poalle pap kap hoikyei hayera
master call rice price reckoning make
Call the landlord and pay the bill.
^J- 7) ^ ^5J:^ "^ *d ^*ll:*1 y}JL
pap kap ta patasso tai-in p'yengani kao
rice price all have received great man peacefully go
Your account is paid ; a pleasant journey, sir.
15.
IG
* Ablative case. + Locative case. I With an aspirated root, a7id — k'o.
52
206
COKEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 23.
4 ^ '^
4
>% «^ 6) 4
tong sye nam pouk sa pang ira
east west south north four regions are
North, South, East, and West are the four points of the compass.
2.
4 4
T^
^^1 5| ^>3 y.^]t\
tong p'yen syoup'oul sokei moi cheumsaing mohitR
east side forest inside hill beast assemble
There are many wild animals in the forests to the east.
^ ^ ^yt") ^i^ "i^i ^^^
sye
west
manhi
kouk sarami chyangsa
nation man trade many
Western nations are large traders.
hayetta
have made
nam p'yeneuro kamyen nari te
south region if go day more
If you go to the south the weather is warmer.
^^
tepta
warm
-4
fouk
north
^0) 4V)77>^^ ^6] ^]^^
nan
p"oungi pouni-kkanteuro
wind blow because day
It is chilly, as there is a north wind blowing.
ch'ioue
is cold
6. ^ 4t -t-l ^]7} 4 'i-7^^^
k'eun param poulmyen paika chal nakakeitta
large wind if blows boat well will go out
If a strong wind blows the ship will go out well.
7.
chyekeui
there
ka
go
tokkeui
7H -2. *^ 4
kachye onera
axe bring come
Go there and bring an axe.
'8.
naika namoural kkakkeitta
I wood will split
I intend cuttmg some wood.
EXERCISES.
207
EXERCISE 23 {continued).
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
16.
o]<\
7f V^
etai
where go
^Vhere are you going ?
'J- J: 3. 7} J.
apheuro kao
before I go
I am going in front.
H'^l^^ JLVi^ -]5.>^
^
etaisye onanya
whence come
Where do you come from ?
touu'osye onta
from behind I come
I come from behind.
nai
my
^^1 ^ ^fS
kyethai tou saram
side two men
There are two men at my side.
5!^
itta
are
^5£ ^ ^ ^<H) >tj?{-
nenan
as for you
nai
om
my left
You stand at my left side.
p yenei
side
syera
stand
keu
that
^>l-e: Mi
1-8: Ml -1^ ^i ^^
sarameun * nai orheun p'yenei syera
man my right side stand
Let that man stand at my right side.
etai ka noue chao chikenmemi morokeitta
where go rested sleep as for the present I will not know
Where are you going to sleep ? I cannot tell at present.
13. ^^^] ^o\^ ^f^-)-^^ -t*l4
patpi
quickly
keriei
street
nirena
tarampakchil
rise up run-action
Get up quickly and run.
hayera
make
tarananan
riinnincj
>
}
a
saram
men
i4
There are a great many men in the street running.
mant'a
many
* Oppositive case.
t Locative case.
208 COREAN I\IANUAL.
Exercise 34.
1. ^ 3^^l] >i^| ^a ^6] 7jc|.
pouk p'yenei sani nopko kori kipta
north border hills high and valley deep
There are high hills and deep valleys in the north.
2. 7| ^^ 3| 4>^J -^4
kak saik moi cheumsaing mant'a
each colour hill animals many
There aie many wild animals of all kinds.
3 «j-e: ^7] ^^3. ^^ 4?] ^j^
pemeuu * ssoki eryepko komeun chapki souipta
tiger shooting difficult and bear catching easy
Tigers are difficult to shoot ; bears are easy to catch.
Chyosyeneun * ch'ong meimyen ta p'osyou norat-hao
Corea gun if carry all hunter play the part of
All Coreans carrying guns are considered hunters.
6. 3l^2 ^ "^ 4 4 jc-sf^
chosim _ haye ch'ong chal nohara
care having made gun well ■ fire
Be careful and fire the gun properly.
6. ^7^)4^ ^^ "^3.
koankyeich'anso kekchyeng malko
concern is not fear avoid
Don't be alarmed ; there is no fear.
nai-il nai cheumsaing chapeure kanta
to-morrow I animals to catch go
I am going hunting to-morrow.
8.
morikoun poulle hamkkeui ka
drivers call together go
Get drivers to go with me.
* Oppositive case.
EXEECIrtES. 209
9.
10.
11.
EXERCISE 24 {continued).
mekeul kesal chom yeipihayera
eatable things little prepare
Prepare something to eat.
^ 0] >^}l ^o\ y}7^ ^\y^]^t^i\.
1011 i saram choue kachye kakei-hayera
money this man given take make go
Give some money to this man to take.
^^l ^<^] sef -^^2.^
sou-il houei tora okeisso
some day after back I will come
I will be back in a few days.
nai kan houei chip chal poara
I gone after house well look
Look properly after the house when I am away.
^i'i^ ^H ^^l °^l^I 4^1 -^
sanyang kasye cheumsaing manhi chapchio
hunting having gone animals many catch please
Good sport to you when hunting.
chim ta siressini kapsyeita
baggage all have loaded let us go
Let us go ; the baggage has all been packed.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
nai koukyeng karyehanta
I sight-seeing am about to go
I am going to take a walk.
>m -1*^ :'>^ i-4 °vt4
sanei * olla kamyen koukyeng mant'a
hill up if go sight-seeing many
There is an excellent view from the top of the hill.
* Locative case.
53
210 COREAN i\tANUAL.
Exercise 25.
1.
^ ^ ^ '>]±
i eun myet nyaiig chyoung
this silver how many ounces heavy are
How many ounces does this silver weigh ?
chyeoul kachye onera tara poara
scale brought come having weighed see
Bring the scales and weigh it.
tara poncheuk neng nyang chyoung io
weighed seen four ounces heavy is
The scale shows four ounces in weight.
keu kapsai p'aimyen ton mitchio
that for price if sell money lose
I will lose money if I sell at that price.
ena kesi ihanka * moure poara
what thing profitable inquired see
Ascertain which is profitable.
Chyosyen toni ihao yang-eun-chyeni ihao
Corean cash profitable foreign silver money profitable
Which is more profitable, Corean cash or dollars ?
chikeumeun yang-eun-chyeni herhaye ika epta
as for now , dollars being cheap profit not is
As dollars are cheap at present no profit can be made.
yang-eun-chyen ban ouen t kasye patkooa onera
dollar one gone changed come
Go and get me change for a dollar.
5.
7.
* Ka in ihanka — whether. +Numerative of dollars.
EXERCISES. 211
10.
EXERCISE 25 {continued).
elleun naka eun kap ara poko onera
quickly go out silver price know see and come
Go quickly and bring me word as to the price of silver.
kapsal alketeun naikei cheuksi alkeihayera
price if know to me directly make know
Let me know directly 5'ou ascertain the price.
" 7| 4 i^i jl^l JL <i ^ 5! ^ ;^ -I /^( x\
kap chom te posio 3-ekeui innan chyeoul syeita
price little more see please here being scale is strong
Please give a little more ; the scales here are heavy.
12.6]^ -f-s] ^ ^ ^]^ ^1^ 7^\ tyx
iren ou-p'i myet keun inya yere chyeoul io
such ox hide how many catties are several scales are
How many catties are these hide? They are very heavj'.
yangmok myet p'iri toi-tenchi k'ong hako patkocha
piece goods how many bales become whether beans with let us exchange
Let us exchange the beans for whatever piece goods there are.
13
"44 44 ^-8: ^H 4*1= 1k^^ ^^
k'ongeun seult'a pyer-ean kachye oaya * patkooa chounta
as for beans refuse special silver brought > come changed I give
I do not want beans ; bring gold and I'll exchange with you.
motemi moulkeun kapsi ta pis-ssasye heungchyeng hal sou epso
all articles price all being dear trade making means not is
One cannot do any business, as prices are all too high.
16. >^-^ :^}^ ^^1} 4^ 77 >) '^^l^di
syekyou chyangsa hataka ponchyen kkachi epsechyesso
kerosene trade when making capital until disappeared
His capital disappeared when he was in the kerosene trade.
* Ya added to the perfect participle has the sense of "having only," "if only."
212
COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 26.
chyechaei naka iren moulkeneul sa onera
to shop go out Buch article buy come
Go to the shop and buy such an article.
2 >t a 7l 4 ^ ^V -^ ji ^i 4 5: 4 4 ^ »^ sf
so koki pan keun sa oko silkoa to chom sa onera
ox flesh half catty buy come and fruit also little buy come
Buy half a pound of beef and also some fruit.
3. J: ^ >^]^| :£ M V ^ ^1 7j-/^| «j 0^ ^ >fc
p'omok sisyei teurennanya yei kapsi tterechyesso
cotton goods price have heard yes price has fallen
Do you know the price of cotton cloth ? Yes ; the price has fallen.
.. *^^*| ^ -i^l $\a^ 7j-^| H]J^ 4 A
yangmoki p'ek manhi oasye kapsi maiou ssao
piece goods abundant many having come price very low is
With a large import of piece goods the price is very low.
5.
^^ ^^ 314
myenchou
silk
nemou
too
pis-ssa
dear
4^]
sachi
The silk is too dear : I
5
mot
to buy not
cannot buy it.
^
hanta
make
7J-4S: s^l^i^ ^1^-^ 4^5!^
4
kapsanan chyoch'iank'o pitaneun chom
as for gauze bad and as for silk moth
The gauze is bad and the silk is moth-eaten.
mekesso
has eaten
7.
4^ 'i^'^ ^>fc -f- 3| °i^l i
so kachok
ox
elmana isso
skins how many are
How many ox hides are there?
ou p'l manhi isso
ox skins many are
There are many ox hides.
^3] 7J-4 'i^}^ '?]-?- ^^v^ ^}^]JL
tonp'i kapsi elmanya maiou noukeuni sasio
sable price how much is very cheap buy please
What is the price of sable ? Very cheap ; buy, please.
EXERCISES. 21i
EXEllCISE 26 {continued).
9JL 3| ^^*| ^>t J^ 7MI 4^MI 11:4
p'yo p'i pari cpso keu kosi koaiikyeich'iant'a
leopard skin foot not is that thing concern not is
There are no claws to the leopard's skin. That does not matter.
10.
ho p'i k'eun kct to itko cliyckeun kct to manhi isso
tiger skin large tiling also is and small thing also many is
There are large tiger skins, but there are many small ones.
kcu kapsainan * p'alchianso chom te chousio
that to price as for sell not little more give please
I cannot sell at that rate ; make it a little more, please.
12. ^^4^1 6]. >t M| 7|- 3!^ 45^ 7\^]^
pis-ssachianso naika nrtchye p'anan kesio
dear not I losing money selling thing is
It is not dear. I am selling it at a loss.
33.
p'alki seulk'cteun keumantouera ssaii kosi anita
selling if refuse let alone cheap thing not is
If you don't want to sell, all right. It is not a cheap article.
14 6] ^ 6| ^^^ 5jc^ ^ v^ ^^^1*14
i sai ch^iangsa ette hanya pyenpyench'iant'a
this period trade how make good not is
How is business at present? Not good.
4 -'l^ ^31 "M-^ 3!^f4
cun kapsan noukko yangmokeun pis-ssata
silver as for price cheap and piece goods as for dear is
The price of silver is low and piece goods are dear.
p'okouei chyangsaka mohye sero tat'oa p'alko santa
in port traders assembled each other strive sell and buy
Merchants crowd to the port and compete with each other in business.
15.
IG
* From kapsai (locative case), with nan (oppositive case ending) added.
54
214
COEEAN MANUAL.
iXERCISE) "4/.
1.
^
A-
tasat
five
kachi
kinds
A cL
massal
taste
t} 4 e^l 5.
ta
all
cb'ai'yeiio
one bv one
Name the five tastes one by one.
nV jr.
mal hay era
speech make
i^ 5f
2 ^ ^> € 1 ^J: tr *J ^> ^^1-$: ^^^1 JL
tan mat ssemi mat cbchan mat renin mat maion niiissio
sweet taste bitter taste salt taste sour taste acrid taste is
There are sweet, bitter, salt, sour, and acrid flavours.
3.^]^ ^4 l^t ti'i '"-t'^l
3. 71] ^ 7] 4
iren tasat massal etten yakeinan korokei syekkera
such live tastes some in medicine as for equally mix
Mix these five flavours equally ni some medicine.
n
V\
4. >^}|n|,i^ ^j-e:^-tS.^Vi:il^7
saram mata ipcmi kathato massal korokinan
man each as for mouth same though taste as for distii ction all dij'fer
Though men have mouths alike, they all differ as to fiavoui-s.
la lalla
11
s.f-S. i^a ^}r ^3. ^^^
kkoureun talko ch'onan seuiko hoch'onan
as for honey sweet and as for vinegar sour and as for pepper
Honey is sweet, vinegar sour and pepper pungent.
^1
maipta
is acrid
f
6. «
H
^4
pata
sea
^]-5L ^ ^^
X3
-5-^
moureun chchako saiam moureuii
as for water salt and spring as for water
Sea water is salt and spring water is tasteless.
^^
seumkcpta
insipid
7.>^^4 ^r^ «^4 y]^]^ ^t^ y^^]^.
silkoa talmyen nikeun kesio seuimyen sen kesira
fruit if sweet ripe thing is if sour unripe thing is
Fruit if sweet is ripe, but if sour unripe.
-6}Ml ^3. $J«a f ^ M|6}A)j v^c^
hyangnai nako etten p'oureun naiamsai nanta
as for flower perfume arise and some as for weed stench arises
Flowers smell sweet, ))ut certain weeds give a bad odour.
kkotch'an
10
EXi^iiLlhES. 215
EXERCISE 27 {continued).
p'oureuii ket nourcmi ket pouikeun ket beum kct kemeiui kesio
green thing yellow thing red thing white thing black thing is
There are green, yellow, red, white, &ud black (colours).
4 ^U "^ 7j 4 ^ ^f 4 ?f -I ^U T^ 4 ^ ^1 -S.
pomeinan namki p'ouratal^a kaeureinan noureuu pitch'io
as for in spring tree green is as for in autumn yellow colour is
In spring the trees arc green, but in autumn their colour is yellow.
"tl: 7\^^ 4,^^ ^3. 4lr f|^
soutch'an * kemeto poul kkotcli'an * poulkko cliainan * heuita
cliarcoal black though fire flower red and ashes white
Though charcoal is black, the flames are red and the ashes white.
12. iL>^ ^ 4 -^ t 31 ^1 °i ^ 7| ^ S:^] ^^ 4
Chyosyeu euipokemi heum pitch'i mank'o kemeuri osi + chj'ekta
Corean a.s for dress white colour many and black clothes small
Cortans wear mostly white clothes, seldom black.
13. JL i ^}J] m ^^ ^^ <^J:.
o , saik patkeui taran pitch'an pyello epso
five colour besides another as for colour specially not is
There are no special colours besides these five.
14. 6] ti] cv J. 4| A 7| 7| ^ 5| -f- 6^ ef
i ])itan o saikeul kak kak nanhoa touera
this silk five colour each each divided place
Keep these five kinds of coloured silk distinct from each other.
1-511 ^^3. l^-fjl V}] 6j-^}j 3.3:. 3I-4
pitch' an nouneuro pounpyelhako naiamsai k'oro matba
as for colour by eye distinguish and odour by nose smell
We distinguish colour by ihe eyes ; smells by the nose.
i« ^1 ^^ 31 ^ ^3. ^H ^ \1:4
kkotch'an koheun pit to itko hyangnai to nanta
as for flower pretty colour also is and perfume also arises
Flowers look pretty and smell fragrant.
* Oppositive case. + Properly oti, but read osL
216 COREAN ^MANUAL.
3.
EXEIICTSE 28.
mal pori manlii niekiinyeii sal cliiiita
horse barley mauy if feed flesh makes
If you give the pony plenty of barley, he will grow fat.
^J ^-] 5 4 JJL ^ t ^J ^} -S. ^i ef
chip paik iiiont koa pori ban syem sa onera
straw hundred bundles and barley one bag buy come
Buy one bag of barley and 100 bundles of straw.
onal nat liouei naika mal t'ako etai cbom kakeitta
to-day noon after I horse ride and where little will go
I am going out a little this afternoon on horseback.
mapou tarye mal ancliaug cliieurako * hayc a
groom to "horse saddle carry" say
Tell the groom to saddle the pony.
seuikol ka k'ong sasye malkkeui sire oUye oa
province go beans having bought on hor^e loaded nscended come
Go and buy beans in the covmtry and bring them up on ponies.
chim ta oatketeun kokkanei pourye teuriko sak choucra
load all if have come in granary unloaded enter and hire give
Put the goods into the granary when they come, and pay the hire.
7 ^ ^ ^ *f i" ^ i. ^ °d f^-fJ.
tan nyang chyekta hako yel nyang man tallahao
five nyang is small says and ten nyang only demands
He says five nyang is too little, and wants ten nyang at least.
«^ ^ ^a l£ ^|>^M H 5 ^f 51 '^ T Jl
yen nyang patkonan saksi chyeke mot kakeitta hao
six nyang receive-and-as-for price being small not will go says
He says he won't go even for 000 cash, as the hire is too small.
Ko is used to indicate the end of a quotation.
EXERCISES. 217
10.
EXERCISE 28 {continued).
^^<^] -^i-^ Hi: 7f^l 71- vt'^
Chyosyenei koksikeun yesat kachika iianta
in Corea grain five kinds produce
Coroa produces five different kinds of grain.
ssal koa k'ong koa p'at koa pori oa mireul heuni mekso
rice and beans and peas and barley and wheat mostly eat
Bice, beans, peas, barley, and wheat are mostly eaten.
" "^ ^^5. t ^J 4 4 '^f ^f "^4 sieil^
mil karo ban syem p'arataka ttek mantalkeitta
wheat flour one bag having bought bread I will make
I intend making bread when I have bought a bag of flour.
seuikol saram kananhaye pori oa kouiri man meke
province man being poor barley and oats only eat
The country people are poor and can only eat barley and oats.
13.
Syeoul sarameun nengnekhaye nipssal koa p'at man meke
Seoul as for man being sufficient shelled rice and peas only eat
The people in the capital being well-to-do can live on rice and peas.
14.^5:41-1 4^ ^3.^1 ^^ °i^) i-J^
pouk to saramteul kamcha oa momil nongsa manhi hao
north province men potato and buckwheat agriculture many make
In the north the people cultivate potatoes and buckwheat.
15 «] 4 4 -f 4 of V 4 5|. - ^61| ^ X^t^
paich'you oa mou oa nianal kya p'anan ttangeisye nanta
cabbage and turnip and garlic and onion from eai-th produce
Cabbages, turnips, garlic, and onions are grown.
16. «] 4 7^ 4 ^ ^ 4 4# ^V ^ t "^ 5l '^
pai oa kam koaneungkeum koa poksyonga oa kyoul ta itta
pear and persimmon and apple and peach and orange all are
There are pears, persimmons, apples, peaches, and oranges.
55
218 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 20.
^V 7^3. 7}^ Ji?| >J1H4
pat kalko kacul pori simera
field till and autumn barley sow
Plough the land and sow antunni barle}\
2- 7}-^ jte| 4 Ji.5) Jlf vjcf
kaeul pori pom pori potam natta
autumn barlej' spriiip^ barley more is superior
The autumn barley is superior to the spring sowing.
mil kaeurei simcuko k'ong pomei smieunta
wheat in autumn sow and beans in spring sow
Wheat is sown in autumn and beans in spring.
koksiki chal toimyen pailsyengi ta kekcliyeug epso
crop well if becomes people jdl anxiety not is
[The people are free from care if they have good crops.
chyen nyeneun * hyoungnyen itteni oreun p'oungnyen teurcsso
former year famine was but this year full year entered
Last year there was a famine, but this year there are full crops.
i sai nemou kameure sichyeri chal mot toil-teut hao
this period too much being dry crops well not become likdy make
It is too dry at present and there is every chance of bad crops.
' -^i^] f ^ ^^ -t«l ^1 ^f I "J^
orei hyoungnyen toimyen koulme choukeul saram mant'a
this year scarce year if become sta,rved about to die men many
If there is a famine tiiis year, many will die of starvation.
monchye tareun kameulteni i tareun haro kenne pika o
previous moon was dry but this moon one day across rain comes
Last month was dry, but this month there was rain every other day.
5.
6.
* Oppositive case.
EXEKCTSES. 219
10.
1
EXERCISE 20 {continued).
^o] J: 5^^ ti]7f 4-^}. jic].
iiari beuryesye pika olka pota
day being cloutl}'' rain coining likely I see
The day is cloudy and it looks like rain.
k'eun param poultcni n(;un sa m^eneuro * narakanta
great Avind blew but fiiow four faces fly away
A strong wind blew and the snow was driven in all directions.
i 6| ^1 uL i- I *| ^4 ^a^ 7f ^ ^ -f ^
nari malkko kourami noplia ilkeuika syeneurhata
day clear and clouds being high weather is refreshing
AVith a clear sky and high clouds thQ weather is fine.
2. ^} n|. ^ ti) 7|. _6 oj. 7). ^] '^ ^) 3i c| 5£ ^ 4
chyangma ttai pika otaka kaimyeu hai pit te tteukepta
rainy season time rain having come if stops sun colour more is warm
If it clears up during the rainy season, the sun is all the hotter.
11.
syonaki olchekei moucliikei sj-eko penkai oa ourei hao
shower coming time rainbow stand and lightning and thiinder makes
AVith a shower there comes the rainbow, with thunder and lightning.
penkai oa noisyeng hateni nouika pyerakeul machyetta hao
lightning and thunder made but who thunderbolt has met says
He says somebody was struck with lightning during the thunderstorm.
'I ^ 7f ^) ^ ^^-1- *| ^ '^l-^] 3,7}^'>]^t^
ilkeuika ch'ioue oupaki ssotachiko kang mouri eresso
weather being cold hailstones pour out and river water was frozen
DuriiifT the cold weather there v/as a fall of hailstones and the river froze.
param poulko nouni onikka ereum cheuch'ire mot kao
wind blow and snow having come ice to slide not go
I could not go skating on account of the snow and the wind.
15.
IG.
* Instrumental case.
220
COREAN lytANUAL.
Exercise 30,
ereum toutlieouni ppachilka nycmnye hachi
ice being thick falling anxiety to make
Don't be afraid of falling, for the ice is thick.
nfef
niara
avoid
2. dj.6,] ti]7|- $\^ «^^1 «^c].6| 5ja^o|.
pamei pika oasye ttahi taitani mitkeurepta
in night rain having come ground exceedingly is shppery
Eain fell during the night, and the ground is very slippery.
7}^ Jl^^ HJ ^I ^ t ^ ^f
kachye onera nai syei syou liakeitta
brought come I wash hand will make
Bring me some water ; I want to wash my hands.
moul
water
4.6] ^6] ;^>1*>1:«'H ^*h ^^ ^?1sf
i mouri chyengcli'ianini ssota naiye parycra
this water clean not is poured taken out throw away
This water is not clean ; throw it away.
5. ^'^] ^^ :S.^:^- ^'^] ^^ ¥f^
tokei moureun heuriko pyengei moureun malkta
in jar as for water cloudy is in bottle as for water is clear
The water in the jar is dirty, but that in the bottle is clean.
pinou oa syouken katta nok'o t'ongei teon moul pouera
soap and towel gone place and in tub hot water pour
Get soap and a towel, and put hot water in the bath,
nai konhanikka onareun ilcheuki nouechakeitta
I tired because as for to-day early will sleep
I am tired and will go to bed early to-day.
pangei chari p'yeko yo touichipe kkarara
in room mat spread and mattress reversed spread
Spread the bed on the floor and turji the mattress over.
EXEECISES. 221
EXERCISE 30 {continued).
9. 4 e| c^ ^ JL v] /}j :7j ^ a «>]■ '^i jL v] ^ ^ ef
chad tereoni sai ket })atkoa kkalko nipoul p'yera
mat dirty new thing changed spread and blunket spread
The mat is dirty;, get a new one and put a blanket over it.
nai-il ilcheuki kkaiouera nai ketong cii'ainAeihakeitta
to-morrow early awaken I royal procession will participate
Call me early to-morrow ; I assist at the Koyal Procession.
tongchi tal tongchi nal naranimkomi chyeisa banta
solstice moon solstice day king sacrifice makes
The King sacrifices on the occasion of the winter solstice.
keu sai min kanei sotongi taitan hayetta hao
that period pejple among disturbance exceedingly made says
He says that there was then much excitement among the people.
ettek'ei arasso p'yenchi to poke si;nioun to teuresso
how knew letter also see and rumours also heard
How do you know ? I had letters and I also heard rumours.
"-'I 7i^| >fe-f -f H t-B: ^ a-k "r ^Jb
mm kanei sotonghanan mareun ta miteul sou epso
people among disturbing speech all reliable means not is
Reports current among the people are never to be believed.
15.4 $^6) ^^ ^ ^^^^yts.3. «1 A )} J:
koanoueni chal mot tasarinikkanteuro minyo nasso
official well not rule because revolution arose
The people rebelled on account of the oppression of the ofticiak.
10.7] i\^] i-Ti ^^I ^«} -fv^ 4^^) J2.5.
keriei koukyeng kouni elma moUye syennanchi moro
in street sight-seeing persons how many driven stand whether know not
I cannot tell how many spectators were collected in the street.
56
222 COREAN MANUAL.
ExEliCISE 31.
I ^14 ^l-^: 4^1 I ^^ 4
null anchaiig chieuii houei mal kellyera
horse saddle carry after horse walk
Lead- the horse round after saddling.
ttam heiillyessini anchang achik petkichi mara
sweat flowed saddle as yet remove avoid
It is perspiring; don't take off the saddle yet.
param ssoimyen mal pyeng tuelki souipta
■wind if sVioot horse sickness entering is easy
If the pony catch cold it will be sm-e to be ill.
moukeoun chim sokei srtko kapayaon chim malkei sirera
heavy load on bull load I'lnd light load on horse load
The heavy packages put on a bull, the light ones on a pony.
0.
7.
onal kil ttenamyen etaicheum kasye memeulkeisso
to-day road if depart whereabout gone will stop
Where will you stop on the road if you start to-day?
7f^4 ^ t t °-^ ^I^^"^ 4^1-4.
kataka chyenghan syoul mak issamyen chachio
going when . clean wine booth if be sleep
I will rest wherever I find a clean inn.
chini sireun mal monchye ponaiko
pack loaded horse before send and
Send the pack ponies on ahead, and
ouri touri tonghainghaye toui ttarakanta
Y^(j two accompany behind follow
"We two wiJi follow up together after.
EXERCISES. 223
10.
12.
EXERCISE 31 {continued).
9. :3. 5 I 6] 6^ ^4 ^q ^A ^\ 7f 5^ -t JL
keu sarami ecbekkeui oasye oiial karyehao
that man yesterday came to-day is about to go
That man came yesterday and intends to leave to-day.
55^1 ^\^ ^^1 A^] *^^1 ^V^
etchi onareun nacbai kyeioue yekeui oannanya
wherefore to-day noon exceeded here have come
How was it that you came when it was past noon to-day V
ach'amei patpouko i ttai man kyereuri isso
early busy and this time only leisure is
I was busy in the morning and only now found time.
01 t\ -f a ;«^ v^ 61) 7|-°i 53 c| -f J^
il ta hako chyenyekei kamycn ette hao
work all make and in evening if go how make
How about going in the evening after finishing the work ?
-^^-8: 714 'iJ^t.H ^1 *i 4^ 5|7^I tjSL
onareun kyereur epsani nai-il oasye hoikyei hao
as for to-day leisure is not to-morrow came accounts make
I have no time to-day ; come to-morrow and settle accounts.
neuan koukyeng kananya nanan taran tai ch'youriphakeitta
as for you sight-seeing go as for me other place will saunter
Are you going for a walk ? I am going somewhere else.
nai chyen nyenei seuikol kattaka pan nyen manei olla oasso
I former j^ear province gone half year period up came
Last year I went to the country but came back after six months.
nei il houei naral tasi pomyen chasyeihi alkeinnanya
you da^ after me again if see distinctly will know
Will you be able to recognise me when you see me again ?
13
224 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 33.
i poi oa iiioumyengi chyoheuiika poara
this linen and cotton good whether look
See whether this linen and cotton are good.
2.
7.
i moumyengeun kaneulko chye poinan koulkta
this cotton fine and that linen eoarse is
This cotton is fine and that linen is coarse.
i mosi myet chanka * chaiye poara
this grasscloth how many feet being measured look
How many feet does this grasscloth measure ?
keu sarameul namou karioue pochi mot hata
that man trees having hidden to see not make
I could not see the man, he was hid by the trees.
^*] ^^] -fd ^^1 ^1 4tJL
nouni keunsi hamyen keunsi Ivvengeul sseuo
eye short sight if make short sight f pecti.cles use
Use spectacles if you are short-sighted.
p'ai-moul chyenei ka ankyengeul sa onera
jewel things shop go spectacles buy come
Go to the jeweller's shop and buy spectacles.
mouesitenchi chyoheun kesal sa onera
whatever good article buy come
Buy whatever is good.
chyekeui mousam pol irio yekeui mouesal ch'aseo
there what seeing woi'k is here what seek
What is there to see there? What are you looking for here?
* Chanka contracted for cha (foot) and inka (is it?).
EXERCISlilS. 225
EXEBCISE 32 {continued).
10
a <i3L^ ^l%t "^-I/^J^l ^vl4
keu yeiikoro oueiit'oiic^ban paiksyengi nmnt'a
that reason mnrmuring people are many
On that account there is much discontent among the people.
Icoanoaeni chal tasarimyen paiksyengi kitke haye
officials well if i:;overn people pleased make
If the officials rule well, the people are happy.
koanoueni chal m(jt tasarimyen paiksyengi poutaitkita
officials well not if hile people hurt
If the officials don't rule properly, tlie people suffer injury.
12.
13.
a. ^f>]<A] ^H/i M]^|«'| °i4
keu saiei he3-echin paiksyengi mant'a
that time separating people were many
At that time many of the people fled away.
koanoueni choi issye p'achik hayesso
officials fault having degraded have made
The officials being in fault were degraded.
u.^f ^ t >> I 6| 4s 4;^ ^ -f v^ ;*^ 4Hj x\
kananhan saramirato poucharen hamyen chal chinaita
poor men is though active if make well pass
The poor will be able to exist if they are industrious.
keieran saraineun mattangi kananhao
idle men properly poor
Idle people deserve to be poor.
pouchareni hamyen syangkeup patko keieramyen pel chounta
actively if make reward receive and if lazy punishment give
I reward the active and punish the lazy.
57
15.
16.
226 COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 33.
nai chip chieuryeliaiii moksyou poulle euinonliayera
I house am about to make carpenter call consult
I am going to build a house ; arrange with the carpenters.
2. ^1 ^ 4 -I cf. 6^1 ») -f ^.^1 v| ^ ^;c^ ^^
chaimok koa to! ta yeipihayessini ton monchye chouo
materials and stone all prepared money before give
I have all the materials and stones ready ; advance me some money.
niokoun poullesye ttang kipkei p'ako k'eun tol nohara
coolies having called earth deeply . dig and big stone place
Get coolies, dig the fomidations well down, and put in big stones.
patkeui tanieun * pyektollo ssako an tamemi heulkeuro si-tna
outside Vr'all with brick build and inside wall with mud build
Make the walls of brick, but use mud for the partitions.
mokoun il man cbal hamyen syangkeup pateurira
coolie work only well if make reward will receive
The coolies will only get a gratuity if they work Vvell.
onal manil pi om3^en tam ssaclii mara
to-da,y if rain come wall to build avoid
Don't build the wall to-day if it should rain.
il chal hayessini mokoun sak chouko syoiil kaj) te chouo
work well has made coolie wages give and wine price more give
They have worked well ; give the coolies their pay and a pourhoire.
hai toteul ttaiei nirena ireul ilcheuki sichakhayera
sun rising time rise work early begin
Get" up at sunrise and set about your work early.
* Oppositive case.
EXERCISES. 227
10.
1.
EXEBCISE 33 (c-ontimied) ,
keu kitong choui pitkoureiuii kotkei - syeiouera
that pillar little slanting upright erect
Put that pillar up straight ; it is slanting.
>^ 4?^ ^'^f i4^ 1 ^^ 4 7| >t i t «i ef
syekkarai oa taran chaimolceul ta koteun kesaro * haj'^era
rafter and other materials all straight thing make
Put the rafters and all the other beams properly straight.
kaioachyaiigi poulle kioa tantani niera
brickman call tile firmly connect
Call a bricklayer and roof the house properly.
chipong chal mot nieumyen pi saiki souipta
roof well not if connect rain leaking easy
If the roof is not properly put on it will leak.
^1^J=*'1 -1^1 ^'^l '^^l i-<^4
michyangi poulle tamei myenhoi hayera
plasterer call on wall lime make
Call the plasterer and plaster the walls.
pyekeun hoi oa heulkeul syekke paHara
partition lime and mud mix plaster
Piaster the wall with lime and mud mixed together.
4i ^ 4^ 4^ 7> -^fj f "i-ef
sapyek myet pari sata ka ouheui pallara
mortar several loads buy go above plaster
Get several loads of mortar and plastdr it over.
chipi tomochi myet kan inya hyeiye poara
house altogether how many kau is count see
How many rooms are there? Count and see.
* Instrumental case.
13.
15.
16.
228 COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 34.
syarangei soniiimi teuressini poul chom tteiiyera
in drawing-room guest have entered fire little light
Light a fire in the drawing-room ; guests have come.
namou epsani kakaei ponaiye han mon/^
wood not is shop having sent one bun '
There is no wood; send to the shop and buy .i
koult'ong nopkei ssamyen yenkeuika ch-;i ■ ...1,
chimney highly if build smoke we .
The chimney will draw well if you build it nigli.
ko'ilt'ong nacheumyen yenkeui syevmta
cliiumey if low srnoke rivet (turns back)
If the chimney is low it will fill the room with smoke.
taichyangchyangi oasye moun chameulsoi pakcina hayera
big workman came door lock to nail make
Tell the blacksmith when he comes to fix the lucks on the doors.
6. :£ ti| ^j: 6| ^ v| aj- 4 5. «) -f 6| 4
topaicliyangi poulle pang ta topai hayera
paper-hanger call room all paper-hanging make
Call the paper-hanger and have the whole house papered.
7.S31 4 f 5: «;J>tv| Hj 6^ «. jyi}^ ^1-4
chyoheui oa p'oul to epsani nai-il tou kachi sa oa
pape-if and batter also not is to-morrow two kinds buy come
There is neither paper nor paste. Buy both to-morrow.
8
^^ V ^ S S| 5. «'r ^31 ^ol) «f i S f| ^^ vf
inonchye nachan chyohjuiro * pareuko houei taran chyoheui palla
fi];st low paper smear and after other paper smear
Use cheap paper for the first coat, and other paper for the second.
* Instrumental case.
EXEELi.^r..-^. 2-29
EXERCISE 34 {continued).
9.
onal taikameul choiu poiopcha hako oasso
to-day excellency little let us visit saj' and have come
I have come to-day to pay my respects to Your Excellency.
10. 6) ^ 0) "i J] 7} ^] ^ ri^ ^ i* «i 5^ oJ: -f Jl
i sai ilkeuika ch'ioun-tai nyenhaye p'yenganhao
this period v\-eather cold time consecutive is well
How have you been keeping during these cold days ?
" t^l ^^ ^i 5l^°f^ l-fe ^^ i-Jt
yei nanan chal isso manan taikeun ette hao
yea as for me well is only as for sir how make
Yes, I've been very well; but how are yoa, sir?
'^ J.^-^ ^^y} -}^ 4^ ^^)^ ^^
onareun syerika manhi oasye nachaioan tepta
as for to-day frost many having come as for noon is hot
To-day there was a severe frost, but it was warm at noon.
irek'ei ch'acha okinan * tteut patktui in o
thus \nsit coming thought outside work is
YoHir calling in this way is more than I could expect.
1^ H^4 ^'^l ^^ -^^ 4 ^^^-
ye-pora tampai pout eh* ye oko ch'a taryera
look here tobacco join come and tea infuse
Here ! light his pipe and bring tea.
^^i;^^) ^t t 4H i *i 4
chyoucb3'enchaei + chyoheun syoul poue teiyera
kettle good wine pour beat
Put good wine in the kettle and heat it.
i syoureun * taran syoul koa talla tokchiant'a
this wine oiher wine with differ poisonous not is
This wine is different ; it is not strong.
13.
15.
16.
* Oppositive case. t Locative case.
53
230
COEEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 35,
5.
0.
y]^
^^^
y}t "^^ "J-sa t s. -r
kere kamyen tari apheuko pal to poureutt'e
on foot if go leg sore and foot also blistered
By going on foot your legs will be sore and your feet blistered.
^4-e: ^i-l -^lA-^ t<>|
cheykeun
small
sineul
shoes
smeumyen
if shoe
pan
feet
If you wear small shoes your feet will be sore.
chointa
squee>ze
^] ^} I ^1 ^^^]
J5l
*] :^^j=-f^
1
this
sarami salchiko momi
man flesh carry and body
This man is stout and stronef.
kenchyanghata
strong
4. JX
keu
that
A
6.
saraiaeun
man
^e|
p'arihako raomi
lean makes and body
That man is lean and w^eak.
6| ^^ ^ 4
^^1 JL-Si H-:a ^t
-?a
-r
yakhata
weak makes
4 'f^
momei ohan nako penyelhako tou t'ong nako
in body chill come out and feverish and head sore comes out and
I am feeling chilly and feverish, and I have a headache.
kak t'ong nako on momi apheuni ama hakchil inka pota
foot sore comes out and whole body is sore possibly ague is probable I see
My feet are sore and I ache all over ; I think it is an attack of ague.
1 aneui elkoreul
this child face
Look at that child's face :
aheui
J.V| <^^| ^^6| -ft^t^
poni yekchil chyoungi hayetta
look small-pox heavy has made
it has suffered severely from small-pox.
8 oV^n-^to^in^^lTli;?!^^!^^^
aheuika oumourei ppachye choukcul keeal kenchye naiyetta
child ,in well having fallen about to die thing saved extricated
A child fell into the well ; it was pulled out and saved.
EXERCISES,
231
EXERCISE 35 {continued).
tXs-
'I-
amo
whatever
^1
ket
thing
to
also
*]4t
isyanghaii
strange
There is nothing strange whatever.
kcsi
thing
^>t
epso
not is
10.-*
) ^^1 ^7l 5:4 4^1- ^^ 3.0}^
sai sorai teutki chyot'a naka teure poara
bird sound hearing is good out go hear see
The birds are singing prettily ; go and listen to them.
13.
nameui mal teureni orei sichyeri chal tointa
another's speech heard this year crops good become
I hear there will be good crops this year.
i saiei chip keuipyel myet pen teuresso
this period home news several times I have heard
Dmring this period I have heard several times from home.
monchye tareun tou pen teutko i tareun p'yenchi aui poasso
former month two times hear and this month letter not I saw
Last month I heard twice, but this month I received no letters.
chikeum
now
mousam mal teurennanya keuipyel
what speech have hcaid news
What news have you now heard '? Any news
mnanya
is
15.
16.
amo mal to mot teuresso pyei mal epso
whatever speech also not have heard particular speech not is
I have heard nothing whatever ; there is nothing special.
kcu syosik
that news
chasyeihi teuresso
clearly have heard
That news I heard distinctly
kechat man
false speech
it is not true.
o
is
232 COREAN MANUAL.
ExEiiciSE 36.
1. v^l 6\^}^^ ^ ^M^H
nai apanim py^ng teuressini
my father sickness has entered
My father is sick ;
4.
D.
'XT
y} ^^l 4^^ J^vief
elleun ka euionen ch'j^enghaye onera
quickly go doctor having invited come
Go quickly and call the doctor.
euiouen moisye oasso keuremyen teure osiraira
doc-tor served has come if so entered come say
I have brought the doctor ; tell him to come in, then.
euioueu maik poko bye patak to poasso
doctor pulse see and tongue surface also saw
The doctor felt his pulse and examined his tongue.
S] ^i t ^ ^l.^^ ^/^ t"^ -t3L
euiouen mal pyeng syeika taitan hata hako
doctor speech sickness condition severely makes says
The doctor states that his illness is quite serious.
yak pangmoun sse chyoumyensye hanan mari
medicine recipe wiitten while giving saying speech
When giving the prescription, he said:
fang yak to sseuko hoan yak to mekeusio
boil medicine also use and pill medicine also eat please
Please take the medicine, part in draught and part in pills.
karo yakeun chal ttai tdon mourei t'asye masio
flour medicine sleep time hot in water mixed drink
^ut this powder in water and take it at bedtime.
EXERCISES. 233
EXEBCISES 36 (contmed).
^ ^■f7lS ^^^)
pyeng cbyoung-hakinan * ch-young-hatai
sickness heavy making beavy though make
Although his sickness is serious,
^-^ 1 ^) "d '^^^ }i^^
yak han chyei man mekeumyen natkeitta
medicine one dose only if eat will recover
He will recover if he only takes one dose of medicine.
^'- H} ^52: ^i J.t ^<^] ^)^ idi
pap meknan ket t'ohan touiei ch'yeicheung nasso
rice eating thing vomited after constipation recovered
After vomiting his food, his constipation was relieved.
10..
12.
18.
14
onareun echei pota chom nan-teut-heio
as for to-day yesterday compared little recovered likely makes
To-day he appears somewhat 'better than he was yesterday.
^ *;»
p'yeikyeng koa kankyengeit pyengi ta teulko
lung and liver sickness all enter and
His lung and his livei: were afifected, and.
^ 4-fl^) ^^ 4*1^ '^^''l ^l^f
mok koa moureuphi tto ta pouesye taitari^ apha
neck and knee also all swollen severely sore
He suffered severely from a swollen neck and knee.
1=1: la ^1 Hj'd ^t«1*H
yakeul mekko ttameul naimyen naheul-t'e-i-ni t
medicine eat and sweat if produce recovering position
If you take medicine and begin to perspire, while recovering
4-1 ^^] 7l-^-fa 4^ ^^1 ^'fsf
momeul tepkei kansyouhako param ssoichi mara
body hotly preserve and wind to shoot avoid
Keep yourself wa^rm and avoid catching cold.
* Oppositive case. t Locative case.
I T*e-i-m, from Ve (condition) ^ i (nominative), and ni (which has the forCe of*
semicolon).
59 — -
16.
2S4 COBEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 37.
^ ir«) ^^ ^^ ^^d^ ^]%^
gyonrei ouheui yere choiineul fliresso
cart above many priBoners loaded
There are many prisoners sitting on the cart.
keu chyoungei ban nomeul soi saseullo kyelpak hayeaaa
that among one person iron with chain bound have made
One of them was bound with an iron cham.
» "^t ^"1-^ ^^5. ^]%^
taran choiineun noheuro maiyesao
other prisoners v^ith rope tied
The other prisoners were bound with ropes.
5L1
la —
^
^^4
4±^
^^
kceul
saramteuri
♦
tochekeul
chapeura
kasso
district
men
robbers
to capture
went
The people in the district went out to apprehend the robbers.
tooheki tomanghaye chapchi mot hayoaao
robbers having ran away to capture not make
(Butyihe robbers ran away and they did not catoh them.
6, 6^^| ^}6\] t^ ^ -±^ I ^X 4 ^] 3. 4^
echsi pamei yere kounsa mal t'ako ch'ong meiko oasye
yesterday at night several soldi sra hurse ride and gun carry and came
Yesterday evening a number cf eoidiars came on horseback, armed with guns ;
7. jx„^, ^4 -I t} 4<'} ^} 7} -%'«H| y}5i *|-f ^ di
kou tochekeul ta chapataka okei katna toueiso
those robbers all captured prison impriFon placed
They captured ail the robbers and imprisoned them.
« -I^Jr't 4 4 ^^4 ^1 l'^^ ^^l-^^--
pourantang koa chom tochek nomeui hamkkeui cbapa kaaso
burglars and little rolbers person altogether c»vptured went
Ihc.y captured all the burglars and thievea.
♦ i>iural.
:SX£E018Eg. iS^
10.
11.
12.
EXEBCISES 37 (conHnued).
4^*1 ^^t ^^] ^*| ^^ -3d.
koanoueni mounchoihan houei polki manhi ch'yesgo
officials having investigated after thighs many flogged
The authorities held ah investigation and flogged them severely.
koisyou nomeun m&i matko mok paihye choukiko
chief person whip meet and neck cut and kill
The chief criminal was flogged and beheaded ;
^ ^-8: nt ^3, ^ ^H ^*K
tou nomeun hyengpel patko mok maiye choukita
two persons punishment receive and neck tied kill
The other two were tortured and strangled.
keu namanan k'al sseuioue okei katoasso
those remaming knife wear in gaol imprisoned
The remainder were made to wear the cangue and put in prison.
amo Bongsa-rato ton man issamyen ikeuiko
whatever lawsuit be money only if be gain but
If you are rich you will win your lawsuit, but
14. 7} vf -f jn. -^M] 6j ^ -^ ;^| 7] ^ cf
kananhako hyengsyei epgamyen chiki souipta
poor and influence if not have losing easy
If you are poor and have no influence you will easily lose.
kananhan sarameun hangsyang chiko
poor as for man always loses but
The poor man always loses, but
pouchya sarameun haiigsyaug ikeuichio yei keure hao
rich as for man always win yea thus make
The rich man always wine. Yea, that is bo.
13.
236- COREAN MANUAL.
Exercise 38.
i nyangpaneun pyesal iiopko chye koanoueueuu kallyesso
this gentleman rank is high and that official changed
This man is of high rank; that officer was removed.
chyench\'angeisye* kongeul Hyeiouko k'eun pyesal haycsso
battle-field merit established and great rank made
He obtained distinction in the field and rose to high rank.
keu chyangsyounan komisa chal kenarichi mot hao
that general soldier well to lead not made
That general could not lead his troops properly.
4. -4 J; cf ^f «^ t^ S| 7f| ^n] 4] -f ^ 4i
ssahotaka chyek-pyeng-enikei k'eukei p'aihayesso
fought enemy soldier by largely defeated
They were severely defeated in battle by the enemy.
5. t^ 4 *i *l 4 -I '^l ^1 i- «i 4^-1 1 ^ tf
ehye koanoueni ssahomei p'aihaye p'achikhayetta
that official in battle being defeated degrade from office
That officer having been defeated in battle was degraded.
nalli namyen on narahi kekchyeng toio
war if arise entire nation anxiety becomes
If war breaks out the whole State is disturbed.
narahi t'aip'yenghamyen paiksyeng p'yetianhao
kingdom if peaceful people happy
If there is peace the people are happy.
8 5^;^ 6) ^ :^ ^H ^ *i^ B^i^"^
tocheki mot kyentaiye heyechye tomanghata
thieves not enduring scattered fled
The rebels fled, defeated, in every direction.
* Ablative case.
EXEECISES. 237
10.
EXERCISE 38 {continued).
tomanghanan tohekeul melli cbchocli'ara
flying thieves far off drive off
Drive the retreating robbers far av/ay.
kounsa ssahonan ttai taichyang koa pichyang aireul manhi ssesso
soldiers fighting time general and officers suffering many used
During war the general and the officers suifer severely.
11. ^ >^ 6| jc ^ JL 7^ -§ ^ «j- ^ ^^ ^-j ^ ^
chyekpyengi teureoketeun pyenpangeul chal chikheuio
enemy troops when enter frontier well guard
When the enemy's troops approach, carefully defend your frontiers.
12 t^ v^ 6] c, 5^ JL 7] ^ ^1 ^ ^ ^Hp] -f 6^ ef
chyekpyengi teureoki chyenei tantani yeipihayera
enemy troops entry before strongly prepare
Prepare well before the approach of the enemy's troops.
13 tA\ si\ oy H i- '^ t) ^.4 ^ j£ *M ^1 5 t '^
yeipi-ani-hamyen paik pen ssahoa to ikeuichi mot hanta
prepare not if make hundred times fight though to conquer not make
If no preparations are made, defeat will follow, however often you fight
14. 6|.o^ t^^ ^ *hH 5) /i 44 :£ *J -t eHJ:
ama yere nal ani toiye sinkoan toimhakeisso
probable several days not becoming new officer will take up duty
Probably before many days are over a new magistrate will arrive.
sinkoaneul chal mannamyen paiksyengi sal-tteut-ha o
new official well if meet people live probably make
If the new official is good, the people will have a chance of existing ;
t'amhanan koanouen mannamyen paiksyengi tot'anei teunta
avaricious official if meet people oppression enter
(But) if the official is avaricious, they will be oppresbed.
16
00
COEEAN MANUAL.
6.
8.
Exercise 39.
tto orita yei tto, popsyeita
also will eome yes also let us see
I will come again. Yes, good-bye.
nai kattaka elp'it tora orita
I having gone quickly back will come
I will come back directly I get there.
s- %] % ^}^^y} *H -2.e ^f-S^
nai-il kariitka ani onal kao
to-morrow will go no to-day go
Shall I go to-morrow? Na, go to-day.
* 1 °}^ t ^ i ^^ y}-^
tal mata ban pen sik oatta kao
moon each one time each came go
I come and go once every month.
ban pen kaorita yei encheitenchi osio
one time will go yes whenever come
I will call once Yes^ come when you like.
7^ S ?£ ^jL ojL 7l ^ 5£ -fjt,
kal tteut tto hako an kal tteut tto hao
go intention also make and not go intentioa also make
I don't know whether to go or not.
kaketeun erousineikeui* mounan-ina hao
if go father respects some make
If y-ou go, give my respects to your father.
^2^ V^?^ ^^7} ^^^^
orarak narirak hataka tterechyetta
aseend descend making fell down
It fell when floating up and down.
*Dative case.
EXERCISES, 239^
10-.
11
i:XEECWE 39 (fioiitinued),,
^ S.A ^ t t "^ ^
pai teure oattan mar epso
ship entered came speech not is
There is no news, of the ship's arrival.
i kesan nai haran ket koa taUa
this thing I said thing wi^h^ ^igerent;
This, is different |rom what I prd^yed,
nenan nai sikin kesal ta haj^ennanya
as for you I ordered thing all hfiye m^de
Have yqu done all that I ox'dered you to (^o?
ne onei chosimeul chom te 9-ni hayennany?*,
you why care little more not haye madg
^Vhy hg-ve you not been a little moy§ careful?
ne oh'inhi ka poaya chyok'einnanya,
you personally go having seen will he gopd'
Had you not better go yourself ^nd see*^
chikeumeun kyeral eptako *■ nairil omako* hatera
as for now leisure pot h to-morrow will corfte s?iy§
He says he has uq time now. but will, come to-morrow-.
14.
15.
naral ch'yenghayessitai pol iri issesye mot kassq
xnQ invited though seeing work being npt goiie
I wa^s inyited, but h^-d bu^in§ss and cpuld not go.
kakinan kakeissitai onareun iri isse niot ]^^.o
as for going though will gQ fis for to.day work being not ^Q
I'll go some time, but I am busy tQ=dfty P-nd can't so,
*Ko indicates closo of quot.i.tiQriv
240 COKEAN MANUAL.
Exercise 40.
pouekei k'eun sot koa chyekeun ket touri issani
in kitchen large pot and small thing two are
There are two pots in the kitchen, one large and one small.
^^ ^^^ ^1-^ ^1 1 ^ 3. ^ ^ "1] ^ ^ it 4 e{-
pang cli'ipta akoungei poul ttaiko hoatekei syekt'an nohara
room cold in flue fire burn and in stove coal put
The room is cold ; light the kang and put coal in the stove.
^J: 3f ^ 7|- ?|- Pf 5| «r 7lS.i>}^.:^ 7|.^a| 6}^
k'al koa syoukarak ta innanka poara chyekarak man isso
knife and spoon all are whether see .fork only is
See if all the knives and spoons are there. There are only forks.
ch'akoan koa ch'atchyong koa syoulchan maiihi itko
teapot and teacup and wineglass many are but
There are many teapots, teacups, and wineglasses ; but
5.
sapal koa taichyepeun * epsani sa oaya hakeitta
bowl and plates not are buy having come will make
There are no bowels or plates. Better buy some, then.
« 4 *! 4 ^ i ^1;^^ i ^ *| ^ 4 ^ 2| 4
hain pjuUe poul p'ouiko moul kkeuriko ch'a tarira
servant call fire burn and water boil and tea infuse
Call my servant to light the fire, boil some water, and make tea.
chari chopaneun kachye oko chyemsimeun neutkei chiera
mat breakfast bring come and as for tiffin late make
Bring my early breakfast, but make my tiffin later.
84i -^-^^ *|jl>3>a 4^-17) i" ^Ji.^^^■
chyenyelceun kouk kkeuriko saingsyen koa sokoki koue onera
as for evening soup boil and fish and ox flesh roast come
For dinner make some soup and roast some fish and beef.
* Oppositive case.
EXEECISES. 241
EXERCISE 40 {continued).
^ ^ t ^-i eH^^l H 4i ^-^^1*1 i ^] t *i rJf
osnnim hana okeissini eumsik ch'yaksiri yeipihayera
guest one will come food carefully prepare
I have a guest coming, so prepare a good dinner.
10.
etten nyangpani pokyo t'ako oasye tai-in poiopcha hao
some gentleman chair ride and came great man let us see says
A gentleman has cjms in a chair and wants to see you, sir.
nai tangsineul echei peu'te elmareul* kitarinchi moro
I sir yesterday from how much to wait not know
Since yesterday I have been looking for you ever so much.
12. ^ ^ ^1 «} ?£ ^ t "i^^^ts.^^^ ^^
oatkeitchi manan keuphan illo taikouel teurekatta oasso
was coming yet urgent work palace entered came
1 was coming, but went to the Palace on urgent business.
olchonl alko pyenpyench'i-mot-han eumsikeul 3-eipihayesso
coming know and good not make food prepared
I knew you were coming, and prepared a smaU repast.
taichyepeul irek'ei koahi hasini maamei pouranhao
welcome thus excessive make in mind uneasy
You have been so hospitable, I do not know how to thank you.
taikam encheitenchi kyeral issamyen nai ch'acha kaorita
6 vcellency whenever leisure if be I seek will go
I will call on Your Excellency whenever you have leisure.
16 -| 4^1 ^%^] ^>^ ^ f>\^t^ 5f S. -^>^| -^
hangsyang pyello iri epsani amo ttai-rato osio
always particularly work not is any time though come please
I navev hive anything special to do ; come at anj' time, please.
* Accusative case.
61f
i
RETURN EAST ASIATIC LIBRARY
TO— ^ 208 Durant Hall 642-2556
LOAN PERIOD 1
. 1 MONTH
2
3
4
5
6
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
nrn 1 9 iqR4
RECD
DEC 1 Oiqft4
EAL
RECD
imz 1 19883
. FAt.
^UG i 9 1988
'^^m
FORM NO. DD9, 38m
UNIVERSITY OF C/
, 477 BERKELEY
^LIFORNIA, BERKELEY
^CA 94720
®s j
n
ft
h-tm
n:U^:ft
Si'i;;
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11